User`s Guide

User`s Guide
TOP
c
CS2044
User’s Guide
Quick Menu
Loading Roll Media
Unexpected Printing Results
Removing Media Jams
Message Is Displayed
Ink in a Tank Run Out
Operation Panel Setting List
Printer Driver
Options
Chapter 1 Basic Use
Chapter 1
Basic Use
Chapter 2 Using Various Media
Chapter 2
Using Various Media
Chapter 3 Printing by Objective
Chapter 3
Printing by Objective
Chapter 4 Maintenance
Chapter 4
Maintenance
Chapter 5 Using the Printer in a Network
Environment
Chapter 5
Using the Printer
in a Network
Environment
Chapter 7 Troubleshooting
Chapter 7
Troubleshooting
Chapter 6 Operating the Function Menu
Chapter 6
Operating the
Function Menu
Media Configuration Tool Guide
Windows
Contents
i
How to Use This Guide
Index
‹ How to Use This Guide
TOP
How to Use This Guide
Chapter 1
Basic Use
How to Use the Top Page
• Move to top page, chapter contents pages, contents pages, and indexed pages.
• Move to the previous/next page.
• Return to the previous screen.
Chapter 2
Using Various Media
Chapter 3
Printing by Objective
Chapter 4
Maintenance
• Move to each chapter contents
page.
Chapter 5
Using the Printer
in a Network
Environment
• Move to frequently used topics.
Chapter 7
Troubleshooting
Chapter 6
Operating the
Function Menu
• Move to the page that describes
how to use this guide.
ii
How to Use the Chapter Contents Pages
•
Click either button to browse
each item of the solutions manual for the selected
operating system.
Windows
Contents
Index
‹ How to Use This Guide
TOP
How to Use the Chapter Contents Pages
• Move to top page, chapter contents pages, contents pages, and indexed pages.
• Move to the previous/next page.
• Return to the previous screen.
Chapter 1
Basic Use
Chapter 2
Using Various Media
• Click the contents page to move to
the topic pages.
Chapter 3
Printing by Objective
Chapter 4
Maintenance
Chapter 5
Using the Printer
in a Network
Environment
• Click on the ❒ checkbox, then click
the Start Print button to print the
pages of the selected topics. The
print job starts immediately after
you click the Start Print button.
Important
• Clicking the Start Print button begins printing on the printer specified in Set as Default Printer. We recommend that you specify the
printer you want to print on in Set as Default Printer and print on
A4 size plain paper.
iii
How to Use the Top Page
Chapter 7
Troubleshooting
Chapter 6
Operating the
Function Menu
• Other
Click on blue text to move to the referenced pages.
Contents
Index
TOP
Chapter 1 Basic Use
You can print the items that have been checked.
Chapter 1
Basic Use
Printer Part Names .....................................................................................1-2
Printer Main Unit .................................................................................................... 1-2
Switching the Printer On and Off ................................................................1-7
Switching the Printer On ........................................................................................ 1-7
Switching the Printer Off ........................................................................................ 1-8
Online and Offline .................................................................................................. 1-9
What’s On the Operation Panel? ..............................................................1-11
Viewing the Display ............................................................................................. 1-11
Using the Operation Panel Buttons ..................................................................... 1-12
Reading Operation Panel Lamps ........................................................................ 1-14
Function Menus ........................................................................................1-16
Printer Function Priorities .................................................................................... 1-16
How to Perform Menu Settings ............................................................................ 1-18
Menu Settings Summary Tables ......................................................................... 1-20
Chapter 2
Using Various Media
Chapter 3
Printing by Objective
Chapter 4
Maintenance
Printer Driver ............................................................................................1-32
What the Printer Driver Can Do ........................................................................... 1-32
Main Sheet ......................................................................................................... 1-35
Page Setup Sheet .............................................................................................. 1-37
Layout Sheet ...................................................................................................... 1-38
Maintenance Sheet ............................................................................................ 1-38
Options .....................................................................................................1-39
Media Take-up Unit ............................................................................................. 1-39
Chapter 5
Using the Printer
in a Network
Environment
Chapter 7
Troubleshooting
Consumables ...........................................................................................1-40
Print Media .......................................................................................................... 1-40
Specifications ...........................................................................................1-43
Basic Environmental Performance ...........................................................1-46
Chapter 6
Operating the
Function Menu
Contents
1- 1
How to Use the Chapter
Contents Pages
→ Before clicking the Start Print button
Index
‹ Printer Part Names
TOP
Printer Part Names
e Holder Stopper
The part that fastens the roll media to the roll holder.
(→ P.2-10)
Printer Main Unit
„ Front View
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
h
i
j
k
l
m
n
o
p
q
a Top Cover
Remove this cover to install the printhead, to load media,
or to remove sheets of paper jammed in the printer. (→
P.4-12, P.7-36)
b Cutter Grooves
If cutting paper manually, make sure the cutter is in
contact with this wall at all times.
c Ejection Guide
Printed media is delivered to the paper catch tray. Open
the ejection guide to load the roll media.
d Roll Holder Slot
This groove guides the roll holder. (→ P.2-14)
1- 2
f Spool Prevention Stay
This part prevents printed matter from being snagged on
the roll holder or paper feed slot.
Chapter 1
Basic Use
Chapter 2
Using Various Media
g Output stacker (provided with optional stand)
A cloth tray that catches print media ejected from the
printer.
Chapter 3
Printing by Objective
h Paper Feed Slot
Insert paper here when loading roll media. (→ P.2-10)
Chapter 4
Maintenance
i Roll Holder
The holder where the roll media is loaded. (→ P.2-10)
j Right Back Cover
Open to replace ink tanks.
Chapter 5
Using the Printer
in a Network
Environment
k Operation Panel
Provides the display panel and the operation panel
buttons. For more details, please refer to “Using the
Operation Panel Buttons”. (→ P.1-12)
Chapter 7
Troubleshooting
l Release Lever
The lever that releases the media. If you are loading or
manually feeding paper, pull up this lever and open the
paperweight bar. (→ P.2-15)
Chapter 6
Operating the
Function Menu
m Maintenance Cartridge
The cartridge that vacuums and collects excess ink.
Replace the maintenance cartridge when a message
appears prompting you to replace the cartridge.
(→ P.4-15)
Contents
Index
‹ Printer Part Names
n Moving Handles
Grasp the handles provided on the base of the printer to
lift or move the printer.
o Maintenance Cartridge Cover
Open this cover to replace the maintenance cartridge.
(→ P.4-15)
p Stand
This is a table designed specially for this printer. Casters
are attached to the legs to make it easy to move. An
optional Media Take-up Unit can also be installed.
TOP
„ Back View
Chapter 1
Basic Use
a
d
e
b
c
q Stopper
The part that locks the casters of the printer stand.
Chapter 2
Using Various Media
Chapter 3
Printing by Objective
Chapter 4
Maintenance
a Moving Handles
Grasp the moving handles provided on the base of the
printer to lift or move the printer.
b Expansion Board Slots
c USB Port
This is the communication port for USB High Speed 2.0.
Connect the USB cable here to connect the printer to the
computer via USB. (→Quick Start Guide)
d Accessory Pocket
Holds the printer manual, tools for assembly, and extra
ink tanks.
Chapter 5
Using the Printer
in a Network
Environment
Chapter 7
Troubleshooting
Chapter 6
Operating the
Function Menu
e Power Supply Connector
Provides a connection point for the printer power cord.
Contents
1- 3
Index
‹ Printer Part Names
TOP
„ Inside the Top Cover
g Standard Cutter Unit
This guide is used to feed paper. Remove this part if
mounting an optional cutter unit.
a
c
d
e
Chapter 2
Using Various Media
Chapter 3
Printing by Objective
b
g
f
a Top Cover Roller
This roller prevent the paper from peeling during output.
b Paper Alignment Line
When you are loading roll media, load it so that the
media is parallel to the right side of this guideline.
(→ P.2-10)
c Carriage Shaft
The carriage moves on the carriage shaft.
d Paperweight
An important part of the paper feed path. The plate
keeps the paper straight in the paper path.
e Platen
The printhead moves across the platen when it prints. A
suction port is provided on the front surface to prevent
the media from floating out of position.
f Borderless Printing Ink Grooves
Receives ink that drains from the edges of the media
during borderless printing.
1- 4
Chapter 1
Basic Use
Chapter 4
Maintenance
Chapter 5
Using the Printer
in a Network
Environment
Chapter 7
Troubleshooting
Chapter 6
Operating the
Function Menu
Contents
Index
‹ Printer Part Names
TOP
„ Carriage (Inside Top Cover)
a
f
b
g
c
d
g Shaft Cleaner
The shaft cleaner prevents the carriage shaft from
becoming dirty. This cleaner must be replaced at the
same time as the maintenance cartridge is replaced.
(→ P.4-20)
Chapter 1
Basic Use
Chapter 2
Using Various Media
e
a Carriage
The important part that moves the printhead during
printing.
b Printhead Fixer Cover
This cover locks and holds the printhead in place.
(→ P.4-22)
c Printhead
An important component that is equipped with the print
nozzles. The printer is shipped without the printhead
installed. You must install the printhead after unpacking
the printer. (→Quick Start Guide)
d Printhead Fixer Lever
This is the lever that locks the printhead fixer cover.
Open this lever to open the printhead fixer cover.
(→ P.4-22)
e Cutter Blade
The cutter unit that cuts print media automatically.
(→ P.4-28)
1- 5
f Printhead Height Adjustment Lever
Use to adjust the height of the printhead. You will need to
adjust the height of the printhead for high quality printing
and printing on special media. (→ P.2-26)
Chapter 3
Printing by Objective
Chapter 4
Maintenance
Chapter 5
Using the Printer
in a Network
Environment
Chapter 7
Troubleshooting
Chapter 6
Operating the
Function Menu
Contents
Index
‹ Printer Part Names
TOP
„ Back View Inside Right Back Cover
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
h
i
j
k
l
Chapter 1
Basic Use
Chapter 2
Using Various Media
Chapter 3
Printing by Objective
a Bk Ink Tank
b PC Ink Tank
c C Ink Tank
Chapter 4
Maintenance
d PM Ink Tank
e M Ink Tank
f Y Ink Tank
These are the ink cartridges. The printer is shipped
without the ink cartridges installed. You must install the
ink cartridges after unpacking the printer.
Chapter 5
Using the Printer
in a Network
Environment
Chapter 7
Troubleshooting
g Bk Ink Tank Covers
h PC Ink Tank Cover
i C Ink Tank Cover
j PM Ink Tank Cover
Chapter 6
Operating the
Function Menu
k M Ink Tank Cover
l Y Ink Tank Cover
These covers lock and protect the ink tanks. Open this
cover to replace an ink tank.
1- 6
Contents
Index
‹ Switching the Printer On and Off
TOP
Switching the Printer On and Off
Follow the procedure below to switch the printer on and off.
Note
z This section describes examples of how to use the
printer for normal operations after it has been set up. If
you have not finished setting up the printer, first follow
the instructions in the “Quick Start Guide” to confirm
the setup and operation of the printer.
Switching the Printer On
Switch on the printer before you execute a print job from the
computer.
1
Press the Power button.
Information Power
Data
Message
Cleaning
(3 sec.)
Stop/Eject
(1 sec.)
Online
Offline
Menu
Printer initialization starts after the Online lamp and
Message lamp start flashing. After the initialization
has completed and media has been loaded, the
Ready lamp and Online lamp light, and the printer is
ready to print.
If no print media is loaded in the printer when the
printer is switched on, Offline is displayed and the
printer waits for you to load media in the printer.
Chapter 2
Using Various Media
Information Power
Data
Message
Online
Load Roll Media
Cleaning
(3 sec.)
Stop/Eject
(1 sec.)
Chapter 1
Basic Use
Online
Offline
Menu
If the Message lamp is flashing, read the message
on the printer operation display and take the
appropriate action. “Message Is Displayed”
(→ P.7-2).
If the display or Online lamps do not light, check the
power cord connection at the printer to make sure
that it is secure. (→Quick Start Guide)
Chapter 3
Printing by Objective
Chapter 4
Maintenance
Chapter 5
Using the Printer
in a Network
Environment
Chapter 7
Troubleshooting
Chapter 6
Operating the
Function Menu
Information Power
Data
Message
Online
Bk
Cleaning
(3 sec.)
Stop/Eject
(1 sec.)
Contents
Online
Offline
Menu
1- 7
Index
‹ Switching the Printer On and Off
Switching the Printer Off
When you are finished using the printer, follow this
procedure to switch the printer off.
TOP
2
Press and hold down the Power button until you see
Shut Down.. in the display, and then release the
button.
Chapter 1
Basic Use
Information Power
Data
Message
Important
z Never switch the printer off, and never unplug the
power cord during a print job. This could damage the
printer.
z Remove the roll from the printer if you do not intend to
print from the roll for a long period. Leaving the roll
media in the standby position for an extended period
could cause poor feeding.
1
Look at the display and confirm that a print job is not
in progress.
Data
Online
Bk
Cleaning
(3 sec.)
Stop/Eject
(1 sec.)
Cleaning
(3 sec.)
Stop/Eject
(1 sec.)
Online
Offline
Menu
Please Wait.. is displayed for a few seconds, then
the printer goes off.
Chapter 2
Using Various Media
Chapter 3
Printing by Objective
Chapter 4
Maintenance
Chapter 5
Using the Printer
in a Network
Environment
Information Power
Message
Shut Down..
Please Wait..
Online
Offline
Menu
If you see an error message displayed, take the
required corrective action, and then make sure there
are no remaining print jobs.
If a print job is in progress, wait for the print job to
complete before switching off the printer.
Chapter 7
Troubleshooting
Chapter 6
Operating the
Function Menu
Contents
1- 8
Index
‹ Switching the Printer On and Off
TOP
Online and Offline
„ When the Printer Is Operating
This printer has three operation modes: online, offline
and menu mode. Each mode is described below.
z Online Mode
The printer immediately processes print jobs sent from
the computer.
z Offline Mode
The printer receives jobs from the computer but the
jobs are held without being processing. While the
printer is offline, you can load or cut media manually,
access the carriage, and perform other procedures.
The printer also goes offline automatically whenever
the printer cannot start processing a print job, such as
when there is no print media loaded, or when an error
occurs, etc.
z Menu Mode
In menu mode, the printer function menus are
displayed on the printer display. Press the buttons on
the operation panel to set or execute the functions in
the menus. Like offline mode, this mode pauses all
jobs without processing.
Note
z Use the Use Power Save and sleep mode settings on
the printer operation panel to set the ON/OFF timing. If
Use Power Save is set to ON, you can set the time
until sleep with Sleep Timer. (→ P.1-28)
z If the printer remains idle for more than 15 minutes
with the cover closed (i.e., if no print jobs are received
or if no operation panel buttons are pressed), the
printer automatically enters Use Power Save to
conserve power. Only the Online lamp remains on
while the printer is in Use Power Save; the display and
other lamps remain off. The printer awakens from Use
Power Save automatically if it receives a print job or if
you press any button on the operation panel. The
printer requires about 5 seconds to recover from sleep
mode.
Chapter 1
Basic Use
Chapter 2
Using Various Media
Chapter 3
Printing by Objective
Chapter 4
Maintenance
Chapter 5
Using the Printer
in a Network
Environment
Chapter 7
Troubleshooting
Chapter 6
Operating the
Function Menu
Contents
1- 9
Index
‹ Switching the Printer On and Off
TOP
„ How to Switch Modes
You can use the Online button to switch between printer
operation modes.
1
z Offline Mode
Information Power
Data
Message
Offline
Feed Paper
Press the Online button to select a new operation
mode.
Every time you press the Online button, the mode
selection changes in this order: Online / Offline /
MAIN MENU.
Cleaning
(3 sec.)
Stop/Eject
(1 sec.)
Online
In offline mode, Offline is displayed on the operation
panel, and the Online lamp goes off.
Offline Status
Online
Offline
Feed Paper
Function Menu Display Mode
MAIN MENU
Head Clianing
When Paper Is Not
Loaded or Error
Has Occurred
Paper Not Loaded
z Online Mode
Message
Online
Bk
Cleaning
(3 sec.)
Stop/Eject
(1 sec.)
Cleaning
(3 sec.)
Stop/Eject
(1 sec.)
Online
In menu mode, MAIN MENU is displayed on the
operation panel, and you can use the arrow keys ([3]
[4] [5] [6]) and the OK button to operate the function
menus.
Chapter 4
Maintenance
Chapter 5
Using the Printer
in a Network
Environment
Chapter 7
Troubleshooting
Information Power
Data
MAIN MENU
Head Cleaning
Chapter 2
Using Various Media
Chapter 3
Printing by Objective
z Menu Mode
Online Status
Chapter 1
Basic Use
Online
Offline
Menu
In online mode, Online is displayed on the operation
panel, and the Online lamp lights.
If no media is loaded, or if a message is displayed on
the operation panel, the printer will not enter online
mode even if you press the Online button. The printer
automatically enters online mode when you clear the
cause of the error.
1- 10
Chapter 6
Operating the
Function Menu
Contents
Index
‹ What’s On the Operation Panel?
TOP
What’s On the Operation Panel?
The printer operation panel of this printer provides a display
(a), 10 buttons (b) and 5 lamps (c).
z “Viewing the Display” (→ P.1-11)
z “Using the Operation Panel Buttons” (→ P.1-12)
z “Reading Operation Panel Lamps” (→ P.1-14)
a
Information Power
Data
Message
b
Cleaning
(3 sec.)
Stop/Eject
(1 sec.)
c
Online
Offline
Menu
Viewing the Display
The display shows the current status of the printer.
„ Standby
Online
z Line 1:
The first line of the display shows the current operating
status of the printer.
z Line 2:
The level of the ink supply in each ink tank is
displayed.
Chapter 1
Basic Use
„ Print Job Processing
Printing
Chapter 2
Using Various Media
z Line 1:
The first line of the display shows the current
processing status of the printer.
z Line 2:
Displays the job name and other information.
„ Function Menu Display
MAIN MENU
Media Type
Chapter 4
Maintenance
↓
z Line 1:
Displays the name of the menu or menu item.
z Line 2:
Displays the currently selected menu item.
A right arrow at the right end of the line indicates that
there are more options.
A down arrow at the right end of the line indicates that
there are more menu sublevels. When both cases
exist, you will see a down arrow and right arrow
displayed alternately.
Note
z For more details about the function menus, refer to
“How to Perform Menu Settings” (→ P.1-18).
1- 11
Chapter 3
Printing by Objective
Chapter 5
Using the Printer
in a Network
Environment
Chapter 7
Troubleshooting
Chapter 6
Operating the
Function Menu
Contents
Index
‹ What’s On the Operation Panel?
„ Items and Setting Values Display
Media Type
=Plain Paper
z Line 1:
Displays the name of the setting.
z Line 2:
Displays the item or value of the setting.
A value prefixed with an equals sign (=) indicates the
current selection.
Note
z For more details about the function menus, refer to
Chapter 1 “How to Perform Menu Settings” (→ P.1-18).
„ Message Display
ERROR
Rep. Y Ink Tank
E02501
Printing stops and the Message lamp starts flashing
when the printer requires user intervention. Take the
necessary steps to resolve the problem when this
occurs.
In some cases you can continue printing once a
message has been displayed to notify you that the
printer needs user intervention. When the Message lamp
lights, press any button to extinguish the lamp and the
message.
Note
z For more details about what to do when an error
message appears, refer to “Message Is Displayed”
(→ P.7-2).
1- 12
TOP
z While the printer is printing, warming up, or performing
other operations, the right back cover, top cover, and
release lever are locked and cannot be opened.
Using the Operation Panel Buttons
The buttons on the operation panel are used for the
functions described below.
Information Power
Data
Message
Cleaning
(3 sec.)
Stop/Eject
(1 sec.)
a
Chapter 1
Basic Use
Chapter 2
Using Various Media
Chapter 3
Printing by Objective
Online
Offline
Menu
b
a Power button
Press this button to turn ON and OFF the printer.
z Printer off:
Press to switch the printer on.
z Printer on:
Press and hold down the button for 1 second min. Shut
Down.. will be displayed, and the power supply will be
turned off.
b Online button
This button is used to switch the printer between offline,
online and menu display modes.
z Online mode:
Press to switch the printer offline.
z Offline mode:
Press to switch the printer to menu mode.
z Menu mode:
Cancels the current menu operation and switches to
online mode. If a maintenance cartridge error is being
displayed, this also temporarily clears the error and
allows you to switch the printer to online mode.
Chapter 4
Maintenance
Chapter 5
Using the Printer
in a Network
Environment
Chapter 7
Troubleshooting
Chapter 6
Operating the
Function Menu
Contents
Index
‹ What’s On the Operation Panel?
TOP
However, you cannot switch to online mode when
other messages are displayed or when there is no
paper loaded.
z While a job is processing:
Puts the printer in pause mode. The current print job
pauses temporarily.
Press and hold for 1 second or more to cancel printing
or ink drying, or to eject the media.
z Pause mode:
Press and hold for 1 second or more to cancel a
paused job and eject the media.
Chapter 2
Using Various Media
Information Power
Data
Information Power
Data
Message
c
d
1- 13
Message
e
Cleaning
(3 sec.)
Stop/Eject
(1 sec.)
Online
Offline
Menu
f
c Paper Source button
z Online, offline, or menu modes:
Press and hold for 1 second or more to switch between
Roll Media and Cut Sheet as the feed source. You
cannot change the paper source if the top cover, right
back cover, or release lever is open.
d OK button
z Setting value display:
Selects the value or setting, or executes the function,
currently displayed on the operation panel.
e Information button
Displays the submenu. The submenu displays
information about ink, the maintenance cartridge, media,
printhead height, printhead service life, and parts service
life in a prescribed order. Press and hold this button for 3
seconds to start Head Cleaning A. (→ P.4-40)
Further, if the roll has been loaded and the remaining
paper amount detection function has been turned ON,
the length of the roll will be displayed.
f Stop/Eject button
z Online, offline, and menu modes:
g
h
Cleaning
(3 sec.)
Stop/Eject
(1 sec.)
Chapter 1
Basic Use
i
Online
Offline
Menu
j
g [3] button
z Offline mode:
Press and hold for 1 second or more to move the
carriage to the center of the platen.
z Menu mode:
Operates as a menu selection button that displays the
previous menu item or setting value.
h [6] Button
z Offline mode:
If you are using the roll feed, this functions as a manual
feed button that advances the paper.
z Menu mode:
Press this button to open the next menu level below.
i [5] Button
z Offline mode:
If you are using the roll feed, this functions as a manual
feed button that reverse feeds the paper back onto the
roll.
z Menu mode:
Press to return one level up and display the previous
menu item.
Chapter 3
Printing by Objective
Chapter 4
Maintenance
Chapter 5
Using the Printer
in a Network
Environment
Chapter 7
Troubleshooting
Chapter 6
Operating the
Function Menu
Contents
Index
‹ What’s On the Operation Panel?
TOP
An error has occurred.
z Off:
The printer is operating normally, or the printer is
switched off.
j [4] Button
z Offline mode:
Press and hold for 1 second or more to move the
carriage to the center of the platen.
z Menu mode:
Operates as a scroll button to display the next
candidate for selection on the operation panel.
c Roll Media lamp
z On:
Roll media is selected as the paper source.
Reading Operation Panel Lamps
The lamps on the operation panel indicate the following
states.
a
b
c
d
Chapter 4
Maintenance
Information Power
Cleaning
(3 sec.)
Stop/Eject
(1 sec.)
Online
Offline
Menu
e
a Data lamp
z Flashing:
If the printer is printing, this indicates that the printer is
receiving or processing a print job.
If the printer is not printing, the printer is either in pause
mode and has a paused job, or the printer has received
data that it cannot process, or the firmware is being
updated.
z Off:
There are no jobs in the printer.
1- 14
Chapter 2
Using Various Media
Chapter 3
Printing by Objective
Data
Message
Chapter 1
Basic Use
b Message lamp
z On:
A warning is displayed on the operation panel.
z Flashing:
Chapter 5
Using the Printer
in a Network
Environment
Chapter 7
Troubleshooting
Chapter 6
Operating the
Function Menu
Contents
Index
‹ What’s On the Operation Panel?
d Cut Sheet lamp
z On:
Cut sheet is selected as the paper source.
e Online lamp
z On:
The printer is online or the printer is processing or
spooling a print job.
z Off:
The printer is either offline, in pause mode, in menu
mode, is initializing immediately after power on, or has
been switched off.
TOP
Chapter 1
Basic Use
Chapter 2
Using Various Media
Chapter 3
Printing by Objective
Chapter 4
Maintenance
Chapter 5
Using the Printer
in a Network
Environment
Chapter 7
Troubleshooting
Chapter 6
Operating the
Function Menu
Contents
1- 15
Index
‹ Function Menus
Function Menus
You can use the operation panel to access and use all the
functions built into the printer. You can use the menus to
make system settings, set up options, clean the printhead,
and make test prints, etc. You can press the Information
button at any time to view the submenu and view
information about the ink levels, media, and height of the
printhead.
„ Printer Function Priorities
The settings configured on the printer operation panel
are used as the default settings for all print jobs.
However, if the same settings have been configured by
the printer driver then the printer driver settings have
priority when print jobs are executed.
„ Function Menu Flow Summaries
The following illustration shows you how the menu items
in the function menus are organized. Press [3] or [4] to
display the previous or next item, press [6] to display the
next level below, or press [5] to return to the previous
level. You can also press the OK button to accept the
settings for each menu item.
TOP
Chapter 1
Basic Use
Chapter 2
Using Various Media
Chapter 3
Printing by Objective
Chapter 4
Maintenance
Chapter 5
Using the Printer
in a Network
Environment
Chapter 7
Troubleshooting
Chapter 6
Operating the
Function Menu
Contents
1- 16
Index
Information
Test Print
System Setup
Maintenance
Interface Setup
Adjust Printer
Rep. Ink Tank
Med.Detail Set.
Media Type
ࡑࠠ
࠻࡝‫࠙࠰ޓ‬Reel
࠴
Take-up
Chng Head Hght
Force Cutting
Head Cleaning
*7 *7 *7 *8 *8
*7
*7
*5 *6
Chapter 2
Using Various Media
ࡑࠠ
࠻࡝‫ޓ‬Feed
ࠝ䳦࠻ࡈ䳛䳦࠼
Auto
Chapter 3
Printing by Objective
*4
(Media Type)
Auto Head Adj.
Manual Head Adj
Feed Priority
Adjust Band
Adjust Length
Color Adj.
EOP Timer
TCP/IP
NetWare
AppleTalk
Ethernet Driver
Init. Settings
Move Printer
Replace P.head
Use Power Save
Sleep Timer
Stop Ink Check
Nozzle Check
Roll Length Set
Chk Remain.Roll
Keep Media Size
Change Cutter
Warning
Language
Date Format
Time Zone
Length Unit
Reset MediaType
Nozzle Check
Menu Map
Print Job Log
Media Details
Status Print
Version
RAM
Ext. Interface
MAC Address
Error Log
Counter
Job Log
Chapter 4
Maintenance
Head Cleaning B
Head Cleaning A
MAC Address
Spanning Tree
Ethernet Type
Comm.Mode
Auto Detect
Print Service
Frame Type
NetWare
IP Setting
Protocol
IP Mode
TCP/IP
Color Adj. K
Color Adj. C
Color Adj. M
Color Adj. Y
Color Adj. PC
Color Adj. PM
Return Defaults
Fine Tuning
Advanced Adj.
Standard Adj.
Y Ink Tank
M Ink Tank
PM Ink Tank
C Ink Tank
PC Ink Tank
Bk Ink Tank
Med.type Wrning
Head Ht. Wrning
Buzzer
Coverage
Interface
Media Type
Print Size
Print Time
Print End Time
Print Start Time
Job Status
Page Count
User Name
Document Name
Option Cut
Cut Count
Chapter 7
Troubleshooting
Standard Pttrn
Detailed Pttrn
Auto Print
Standard Adj.
Advanced Adj.
Return Defaults
Width Detection
Skew Check Lv.
Correct Smear
CutDustReduct.
Cut Speed
Standard Cutter
VacuumStrngth
Media Thickness
Far End RllMrgn
NearEnd RllMrgn
Scan Wait Time
Drying_Time
Chapter 6
Operating the
Function Menu
Default G/W
Subnet Mask
IP Address
RARP
BOOTP
DHCP
*1 Displayed only when Enable is selected as the Take-up Reel. *6 Displayed only when Print Length is selected as the Feed Priority.
*2 Displayed only when media is loaded.
*7 Displayed only when Network board is installed.
*3 Displayed only during printing.
*8 Not displayed during maintenace cartridge warning.
*4 Displays after replacing the printhead and executing Auto Head Adj..*9 Displayed only when Automatic is selected as the IP Mode.
*5 Displayed only when Band Joint is selected as the Feed Priority. *10 Displayed only when Manual is selected as the IP Mode.
Chapter 5
Using the Printer
in a Network
Environment
*9 *10
Index
1- 17
*3
Chapter 1
Basic Use
MAIN MENU
Online
TOP
‹ Function Menus
z MAIN MENU
Contents
‹ Function Menus
TOP
z Submenu (Information Button)
Information
Chapter 1
Basic Use
SUB MENU
Ink :
M
T
KPCCPMMY
Width : (Paper Width)
(Media Type)
Remaining : (Paper Remaining) m
## Printable
How to Perform Menu Settings
When making the function menu settings, press the Online
button to display the menus, then use the [3], [4], [6], [5],
and OK buttons to operate the menus.
„ Making Settings
This section explains how to set the sleep timer as an
example of how to use the operation panel buttons.
Head Height (L/M/H)
Best Head Hght (L/M/H)
2
If the printer is off, press the Power button to switch
the printer on.
After a few seconds Online is displayed in the
operation panel and the Online lamp lights.
Press the Online button to select the MAIN MENU.
MAIN MENU
Head Cleaning
3
Note
z Check that the Use Power Save function is turned ON.
If the Use Power Save function is turned OFF, the
sleep timer cannot be set.
1
Chapter 2
Using Various Media
Chapter 3
Printing by Objective
Cleaning
(3 sec.)
Stop/Eject
(1 sec.)
Online
Chapter 4
Maintenance
Press the [3] or [4] button to select System Setup,
and then press [6].
Information Power
Data
Message
MAIN MENU
System Setup
Cleaning
(3 sec.)
Stop/Eject
(1 sec.)
Online
Offline
Menu
4
The next level of the menu is displayed.
Press [3] or [4] to select Sleep Timer then press [6].
Chapter 5
Using the Printer
in a Network
Environment
Chapter 7
Troubleshooting
Chapter 6
Operating the
Function Menu
Information Power
Data
Information Power
Message
Data
Message
Cleaning
(3 sec.)
Stop/Eject
(1 sec.)
System Setup
Sleep Timer
Cleaning
(3 sec.)
Stop/Eject
(1 sec.)
Online
Offline
Menu
Online
Offline
Menu
The setting value for the selected item appears.
1- 18
Contents
Index
‹ Function Menus
5
TOP
Press the [3] or [4] button to select the desired
setting then press the OK button.
Information Power
Data
Message
Sleep Timer
10 min.
Cleaning
(3 sec.)
Stop/Eject
(1 sec.)
Online
Offline
Menu
6
An equals sign (=) is displayed to the left of the
setting value and setting is updated.
Press the Online button to display Online.
Online
Bk
Cleaning
(3 sec.)
Stop/Eject
(1 sec.)
Chapter 2
Using Various Media
Chapter 3
Printing by Objective
Chapter 4
Maintenance
Information Power
Data
Message
Chapter 1
Basic Use
Online
Offline
Menu
The Online lamp lights and the printer is ready to
print.
Chapter 5
Using the Printer
in a Network
Environment
Chapter 7
Troubleshooting
Chapter 6
Operating the
Function Menu
Contents
1- 19
Index
‹ Function Menus
TOP
Menu Settings Summary Tables
Each menu has the functions described below. Setting values marked with an asterisk “*” are the default settings for the
corresponding menu items.
„ MAIN MENU
Menu Item
Head Cleaning
Force Cutting
Chng Head Hght
Auto Feed
Take-up Reel
Media Type
Setting Values
Head Cleaning A
Head Cleaning B
No, Yes
No, Yes
No, Yes
Disable*,Enable
Plain Paper*, Plain Paper HQ, Recycled
Coated, Coated Paper, HW Coated, Ex
HW Coated, Glossy Photo, Semi-Gl
Photo, Proofing Paper, CAD Plain Paper,
CAD Trace Paper, Special 1-5
Function
Cleans the printhead.
Performs stronger cleaning than Head Cleaning A.
Executes a roll cut at the current position. If there
is 10 cm or less from the edge of the paper,
however, the paper will be fed to the prescribed
length before cutting is performed. If the feed
amount is too small, cutting will not be performed.
This menu item is displayed only while “Roll
Media” is selected for printing. 20cm If the feed
amount is too small, cutting will not be performed.
Adjusts the height of the Printhead. (→ P.2-26)
Selects whether or not to perform automatic
winding using the Media Take-up Unit. This
menu is displayed only if the Take-up Reel has
been turned Enable.
Selects whether or not to use the Media Take-up Unit.
Selects the media type.
Chapter 1
Basic Use
Chapter 2
Using Various Media
Chapter 3
Printing by Objective
Chapter 4
Maintenance
Chapter 5
Using the Printer
in a Network
Environment
Chapter 7
Troubleshooting
Chapter 6
Operating the
Function Menu
Contents
1- 20
Index
‹ Function Menus
Menu Item
Med. Detail Set.
(Media Type)
TOP
Setting Values
Scan Wait Time
Plain Paper*, Plain Paper HQ, Recycled
Coated, Coated Paper, HW Coated, Ex
HW Coated, Glossy Photo, Semi-Gl
Photo, Proofing Paper, CAD Plain
Paper, CAD Trace Paper, Special 1-5
Off, 30 sec., 1 min., 3 min., 5 min. 10
min., 30 min., 60 min.
Off, 1 sec., 3 sec., 5 sec., 7 sec., 9 sec.
NearEnd RllMrgn
20 mm, 5 mm
Drying Time
Far End RollMrgn
10 mm, 5 mm
Function
These are the names of media that you can
select.
The default ink drying time between printed
sheets can be set to match the current media.
The amount of time that printhead pauses after
each printing pass (scan) to wait for the ink to
dry can be set to match the absorption
properties of the current media. However, using
this setting will increase the printing time.
Sets the margin to reserve at the leading edge
of roll media to ensure printing quality is
maintained at the leading edge.
Important
z If set to 5 mm, the print quality at the leading
edge, or the accuracy of feeding, may
deteriorate, or the surface of the print may be
scratched. Ink may also adhere to the leading
edge of the media.
Sets the margin to reserve at the trailing edge
of roll media to ensure printing quality is
maintained at the trailing edge.
Important
z If set to 5 mm, the print quality at the trailing
edge, or the accuracy of feeding, may
deteriorate, or the surface of the print may be
scratched. Ink may also adhere to the trailing
edge of the media.
1- 21
Chapter 1
Basic Use
Chapter 2
Using Various Media
Chapter 3
Printing by Objective
Chapter 4
Maintenance
Chapter 5
Using the Printer
in a Network
Environment
Chapter 7
Troubleshooting
Chapter 6
Operating the
Function Menu
Contents
Index
‹ Function Menus
TOP
Menu Item
Media Thickness
Setting Values
Thick, Standard, Thin
VacuumStrngth
Weak, Standard, Strong, Strongest
Standard Cutter
Enable, Disable
Cut speed
Standard, Fast
Off*, On
CutDustReduct.
Correct Smear
Skew Check Lv.
1- 22
Off*, On
Standard*, Loose, Off
Width Detection
ON*, OFF, Media Size?
Return Defaults
No, Yes
Function
Selects the ideal thickness for the media type.
The printhead alert will display based on the
value of this setting.
Sets the amount of suction on the media on the
platen.
Determines whether the standard, flat blade
cutter is enabled.
Sets the speed of the cutter cutting the media.
For media such as film that has a tendency to
produce debris, select Fast to reduce the
amount of debris produced. This item is
enabled for the standard cutter only.
A line is printed at the cut line in order to reduce
the amount of dust generated by film and other
media during cutting.
Use this setting to correct the printing problems
if the media appears to smear easily.
When you are printing on media of nonstandard width, you can lower the amount of
skew detected or switch this function off.
Important
z If media is loaded crooked when this setting is
Off, this could cause jams or foul the platen.
You can switch width detection off for media of
non-standard widths. If you switch this function
Off, then Media Size? is displayed and you
can enter the width of the media.
This function restores the media type settings
to their default values.
Chapter 1
Basic Use
Chapter 2
Using Various Media
Chapter 3
Printing by Objective
Chapter 4
Maintenance
Chapter 5
Using the Printer
in a Network
Environment
Chapter 7
Troubleshooting
Chapter 6
Operating the
Function Menu
Contents
Index
‹ Function Menus
Menu Item
Rep. Ink Tank
Adjust Printer
Auto Head Adj.
Advanced Adj.
Standard Adj.
Auto Print
Manual Head Adj
Detailed Pttrn
Standard Pttrn
Feed Priority
TOP
Setting Values
No, Yes
No, Yes
No, Yes
On*, Off
No, Yes
No, Yes
Band Joint*, Print Length
Adjust Band
Standard Adj.
1- 23
No, Yes
Function
If you need to change an ink tank during a print
job, use this setting to make the printer perform
the necessary processing so that you can
change the ink tank. This menu is displayed
during printing only.
Adjusts the printhead. (→ P.4-42)
Prints the pattern used to adjust nozzle gaps,
print direction, and color gaps; the printer reads
the printed pattern and performs automatic
adjustment based on the results of the printout.
Prints the adjustment pattern used to adjust the
position of the printhead, reads the results of
the pattern, and then automatically adjusts the
values for printhead positioning.
After the printhead has been replaced,
Advanced Adj. will be implemented
automatically.
If you are not satisfied with the quality of the
image after performing Auto Head Adj., adjust
the position of the printhead manually.
Selects the feed accuracy priority. Select Print
Length when you want the media feed length
to be accurate. When Print Length is selected,
color may blur slightly in the direction of
carriage scanning.
Adjusts the amount of paper feed for each type
of media. (→ P.4-45)
The printer prints a band adjustment pattern,
then scans the resulting printout to
automatically determine adjustment values for
the paper feed settings for each type of media.
Chapter 1
Basic Use
Chapter 2
Using Various Media
Chapter 3
Printing by Objective
Chapter 4
Maintenance
Chapter 5
Using the Printer
in a Network
Environment
Chapter 7
Troubleshooting
Chapter 6
Operating the
Function Menu
Contents
Index
‹ Function Menus
Menu Item
Advanced Adj.
Fine Tuning
Adjust Length
Color Adj.
Return Defaults
Color Adj. PM
Color Adj. PC
Color Adj. Y
Color Adj. M
Color Adj. C
Color Adj. K
Interface Setup
EOP Timer
TCP/IP
1- 24
TOP
Setting Values
No, Yes
-3 ~ 0* ~ +3
-0.70 ~ 0.00* ~ 0.70%
No, Yes
No, Yes
1, 2*, 3
1, 2*, 3
1, 2*, 3
1, 2*, 3
1, 2*, 3
1, 2*, 3
10 sec., 30 sec., 1 min., 2 min., 5 min.,
10 min*., 30 min., 60 min.
Function
Use if any paper other than standard Oc paper or
paper that has been approved for output has been
loaded. The adjustment value is set automatically
by reading the printed pattern. This function takes
more time than Standard Adj., however, and
consumes more ink.
Allows manual entry of a value to fine tune the
banal adjustment of the media selected for
printing.
Adjusts the amount of stretching and shrinking
for each media type. Adjust the value to the
plus (+) side to set a larger feed volume for
media that stretches easily, or adjust it to the
minus (-) side to reduce the amount of feed for
media that shrinks easily. This menu is
displayed only if the Feed Priority has been
set to Print Length.
Returns all colors to default settings (2).
Returns all colors to default settings (2).
You can adjust the density of PM Y, M, C, K,
PM, PC one by one and perform the
corrections.
The settings can be performed in the range 1 to
3 (the standard default setting is 2). Set to 1 for
a light adjustment or set to 3 for a dark
adjustment.
Sets the job timeout setting for the printer.
Sets the TCP/IP protocol settings of the network
interface. After setting each TCP/IP item, select
Store Setting to save the settings and enable
them. This menu is displayed only when the
network interface is installed. (→ P.5-11)
Chapter 1
Basic Use
Chapter 2
Using Various Media
Chapter 3
Printing by Objective
Chapter 4
Maintenance
Chapter 5
Using the Printer
in a Network
Environment
Chapter 7
Troubleshooting
Chapter 6
Operating the
Function Menu
Contents
Index
‹ Function Menus
TOP
Menu Item
TCP/IP
On
IP Mode
Manual*, Automatic
Protocol
DHCP
BOOTP
RARP
IP Setting
IP Address
Subnet Mask
Default G/W
NetWare
Off*, On
0.0.0.0* to 255.255.255.255
Function
The setting for TCP/IP protocol is locked On.
This setting cannot be changed.
This setting determines whether the IP address
is set automatically or a fixed IP address is
entered manually.
Selects the type of server when the printer is
set for automatic entry of the IP address.
Sets the printer network information when
using a static IP address.
Enter the IP address allocated to the printer,
network subnet mask, and default gateway.
Sets the network interface for NetWare
protocol. After configuring all of the settings,
select Store Setting to save the settings and
enable them. This menu is displayed only when
the network interface is installed. (→ P.5-21)
Determines whether the NetWare protocol is
used.
Selects the frame type to use.
NetWare
Off*, On
Frame Type
Auto Detect, Ethernet 2, Ethernet
802.2*, Ethernet 802.3, Ethernet SNAP
BindaryPserver, RPrinter,
Selects the print service.
NDSPserver*, Nprinter
Sets the method of communication for the network
interface board. After configuring all of the settings,
select Store Setting to save the settings and enable
them. This menu is displayed only when the network
interface is installed. (→ P.5-5)
On*, Off
Sets the network card to automatically detect
the LAN communication protocol. If set to OFF,
the communication method and Ethernet type
setting values are enabled.
Half Duplex*, Full Duplex
Selects the LAN communication method.
Print Service
Ethernet Driver
Auto Detect
1- 25
Setting Values
Comm. Mode
Chapter 1
Basic Use
Chapter 2
Using Various Media
Chapter 3
Printing by Objective
Chapter 4
Maintenance
Chapter 5
Using the Printer
in a Network
Environment
Chapter 7
Troubleshooting
Chapter 6
Operating the
Function Menu
Contents
Index
‹ Function Menus
Menu Item
Ethernet Type
Spanning Tree
TOP
Setting Values
10 Base-T*, 100 Base-TX
Not Use*, Use
MAC Address
Store Setting
Init. Settings
Ok?
Ok?
Maintenance
Replace P.head
No, Yes
Move Printer
No, Yes
System Setup
Warning
Buzzer
Head Ht. Wrning
ON*, OFF, Check Head Hght
Med.type Wrning
On*, Off
Change Cutter
1- 26
On*, Off
No, Yes
Function
Selects the LAN communication method.
This selection determines whether the LAN spanning
tree packets are received and supported.
Displays the MAC address of the network
interface board.
Resets all of the Interface Setup settings to
their factory defaults.
Performs the processing required for printhead
replacement. This menu is not displayed if the
maintenance cartridge capacity warning is
displayed. (→ P.4-22)
Performs the processing required before
transporting the printer to another location. This
menu is not displayed if the maintenance cartridge
capacity warning is displayed. (→ P.4-34)
Sets the buzzer function. When set to On, the
buzzer sounds when an error occurs.
Determines whether a prompt is issued when
the printhead is not at the correct height for the
print media.
Determines whether a warning is issued when
the media loaded in the printer does not match
the media specified for the print job.
Prepares the printer so the cutter can be
replaced when replacement is necessary. After
replacement, you can reset the number of cuts.
Chapter 1
Basic Use
Chapter 2
Using Various Media
Chapter 3
Printing by Objective
Chapter 4
Maintenance
Chapter 5
Using the Printer
in a Network
Environment
Chapter 7
Troubleshooting
Chapter 6
Operating the
Function Menu
Contents
Index
‹ Function Menus
Menu Item
Keep Media Size
Chk Remain.Roll
Roll Length Set
Nozzle Check
Stop Ink Check
1- 27
TOP
Setting Values
Off*, On
Function
When set to On, printing is performed
according to the specified paper size. The
image may extend beyond the top, bottom,
right, and left edges.
Important
z If set to Off, the image will be printed cleanly,
leaving the recommended 5-mm border at the
top, bottom, right, and left edges. However, a
long sheet with ample top, bottom margins
should be used.
On*, Off
If set to On, a bar code is printed when the roll
is removed in order to keep track of the amount
of media remaining on each roll.
If set to Off, a bar code is not printed when the
roll is removed.
## m (if meter is selected using Length The sets the length of the roll media when the Chk
Unit), ## feet (if feet/inch is selected
Remain.Roll function is On and roll media with no
using Length Unit), Manual Setting,
bar code has been loaded. This is displayed only
when Chk Remain.Roll function is On.
Unknown
Setting values are displayed in meters or feet
depending on the values of the Length Unit setting.
You can choose the Manual Setting to directly enter
the length.
If this setting is set to Unknown, the Chk Remain.
Roll function is switched Off.
Off, 1 Page, 10 Pages*
Allows you to set the number of pages to print
when a nozzle clogs during an automatic check.
Bk Ink Tank
Switches off the ink level detection function.
PC Ink Tank
(→ P.4-9)
C Ink Tank
PM Ink Tank
M Ink Tank
Y Ink Tank
Chapter 1
Basic Use
Chapter 2
Using Various Media
Chapter 3
Printing by Objective
Chapter 4
Maintenance
Chapter 5
Using the Printer
in a Network
Environment
Chapter 7
Troubleshooting
Chapter 6
Operating the
Function Menu
Contents
Index
‹ Function Menus
Menu Item
Sleep Timer
*Use Power Save
Setting Values
5 min., 10 min., 15 min*., 20 min., 30
min., 40 min., 50 min., 60 min.
On, Off
Length Unit
meter*, feet/inch
Time Zone
0:London (GMT)
+1:Paris,Rome
+2:Athens,Cairo
+3:Moscow
+4:Eerevan,Baku
+5:Islamabad
+6:Dacca
+7:Bangkok
+8:Hong Kong
+9:Tokyo,Seoul
+10:Canberra
+11NewCaledonia
+12:Wellington
-12:Eniwetok
-11:Midway is.
-10Hawaii(AHST)
-9:Alaska(AKST)
-8:Oregon (PST)
-7:Arizona(MST)
-6:Texas (CST)
-5:NewYork(EST)
-4:Santiago
-3:Buenos Aires
-2:
-1:Cape Verde
yyyy/mm/dd
dd/mm/yyyy
mm/dd/yyyy
Date Format
1- 28
TOP
Function
Sets the amount of time the printer remains idle
before it enters sleep mode.
Set the printer sleep function. If the sleep function
is turned ON, the printer will enter sleep mode
when the time set using Sleep Timer has elapsed
if the covers are closed, print data has been
received, or the printer controls are not being
operated, to conserve power consumption. If set
to OFF, sleep mode is disabled. (→ P.1-9)
Sets the units used to display the length of the
roll media on the display. This changes the
units used to display the roll media length and
remaining roll length.
You can select a representative city in the
appropriate time zone, along with the selection
of the GMT time difference.
Chapter 1
Basic Use
Chapter 2
Using Various Media
Chapter 3
Printing by Objective
Chapter 4
Maintenance
Chapter 5
Using the Printer
in a Network
Environment
Chapter 7
Troubleshooting
Chapter 6
Operating the
Function Menu
Contents
Sets the display format for the date.
Index
‹ Function Menus
Menu Item
Language
Reset MediaType
Test Print
Status Print
Menu Map
Print Job Log
Nozzle Check
Media Details
Information
Version
RAM
Ext. Interface
MAC Address
Error Log
Job Log
Document Name
User Name
Page Count
Job Status
Print Start Time
Print End Time
Print Time
Print Size
Media Type
Interface
Coverage
1- 29
TOP
Setting Values
, English*, Français, Italiano,
Deutsch, Español
No, Yes
Function
Selects the display language.
Details changed using the Media Configuration
Tool are restored to the default values.
Prints the printer information and setting values.
Prints a list of all the items on the MAIN MENU.
Prints a list of information about printed jobs, including
media size and type, amount of ink consumed, etc.
Prints the nozzle check pattern.
Prints a list of media type settings.
Displays the version numbers of the printer unit
and firmware.
Displays the memory capacity of the printer.
Displays the name of the interface that can be
used at the expansion slot.
Displays the MAC address of the network
interface. This menu is displayed only when the
network interface is installed.
Displays the most recent error message.
Displays information regarding the maximum of
the last three print jobs printed.
Displays the document name from the print job.
Displays the user name from the print job.
Displays the number of pages in the print job.
Displays the result of processing the print job.
Displays the time that the print job was started.
Displays the time that the print jobs ended.
Displays the time elapsed for the print job.
Displays the size of the media used in the print job.
Displays name of the media type used in the print job.
Displays the job interface.
Displays the ink density of each color used in
the print job.
Chapter 1
Basic Use
Chapter 2
Using Various Media
Chapter 3
Printing by Objective
Chapter 4
Maintenance
Chapter 5
Using the Printer
in a Network
Environment
Chapter 7
Troubleshooting
Chapter 6
Operating the
Function Menu
Contents
Index
‹ Function Menus
Menu Item
Counter
Cut Count
Option Cut
TOP
Setting Values
Function
Displays the number of cuts made by the
standard cutter. You can reset this counter after
the cutter blade has been replaced.
Displays the number of cuts made by the
optional cutter. You can reset this counter after
the cutter blade has been replaced.
Chapter 1
Basic Use
Chapter 2
Using Various Media
Chapter 3
Printing by Objective
Chapter 4
Maintenance
Chapter 5
Using the Printer
in a Network
Environment
Chapter 7
Troubleshooting
Chapter 6
Operating the
Function Menu
Contents
1- 30
Index
‹ Function Menus
TOP
„ Submenu
Menu Item
Setting Values
Ink:
Chapter 1
Basic Use
Function
The center of the display shows the remaining
amount of ink in each ink tank from the 7 levels
of (100%, 80%, 60%, 40%, 20%, 0%), and no
ink.
100%
80%
60%
(100~90%) (90~70%) (70~50%)
40%
(50~30%)
20%
0%
(30~6.9%) (6.9~0%)
The right side of the display shows the amount
of ink that the maintenance cartridge can still
absorb as a 7-level bar.
~700ml ~600ml ~500ml ~400ml ~300ml ~200ml 200ml~0ml
(7dot) (6dot) (5dot) (4dot) (3dot) (2dot) (1dot)
Width: X
Y
Remaining: X m
## Printable
Head Height X
Best Head Hght Y
1- 31
X: Media width
Y: Media Type
The width of the media is shown on the top line,
and the type of media is shown on the bottom
line.
X: Roll Remains
When the roll media supply detection is On, this
Y: Sheets printable with remaining ink. displays the length of media that remains on
the roll. When the low ink alert is displayed, a
guide to the number of sheets that can be
printed is also displayed.
X: Current printhead position (L, M, H) Displays the current and optimum position of
Y: Optimum position for media (L, M, H) the printhead. When the Head Ht. Wrning is
Yes, an alert is issued if the current height of
the printhead is lower than the ideal height for
the media.
Chapter 2
Using Various Media
Chapter 3
Printing by Objective
Chapter 4
Maintenance
Chapter 5
Using the Printer
in a Network
Environment
Chapter 7
Troubleshooting
Chapter 6
Operating the
Function Menu
Contents
Index
‹ Printer Driver
TOP
Printer Driver
Chapter 1
Basic Use
The computer uses the printer driver to send print jobs to
the printer. This section describes the functions of the
printer driver.
What the Printer Driver Can Do
The printer driver is used to configure the information that is
need to print a print job, including the media type, print
quality, color, and page size. The printer driver also
provides a variety of functions that allow you to easily
perform the following tasks. For details about operation
procedures, refer to Chapter 3 “Printing Methods for Basic
Tasks”, or the printer Online Help.
Chapter 2
Using Various Media
Banner Printing
You can make long printouts of up to
15.24 meters long to make vertical
hangings or horizontal banners (up to 18m
with Mac OS X). (→ P.3-31, )
The printer can print without borders on
any of the 4 sides, similar to a photograph.
(→ P.3-13,)
Chapter 4
Maintenance
Chapter 5
Using the Printer
in a Network
Environment
Enlarged/
Reduced
Printing
Borderless
Printing
Chapter 3
Printing by Objective
Chapter 7
Troubleshooting
You can print such that the print data is
automatically enlarged or reduced to fit
the width of the currently loaded roll
media. This makes it easy to make
printouts that fill the entire width of the
media. (→ P.3-6, )
Chapter 6
Operating the
Function Menu
Contents
1- 32
Index
‹ Printer Driver
TOP
Chapter 1
Basic Use
Multiple Page
Printing
You can reduce the size of the page
images to print multiple pages on each
sheet. Use this feature to save paper
when you want to check the content of a
printout. (→ P.3-24, )
Chapter 2
Using Various Media
Preview Display
Displays a graphical representation of
what the printout will look like by showing
the effects of the printer driver settings.
This allows you to confirm what the print
job will look like before you print it.
(→ P.3-5, )
Printing
Watermarks
1- 33
Color
Adjustment
Chapter 7
Troubleshooting
You can use the printer driver to adjust the
tones of the colors in your printed
materials. (→ P.3-43, )
Chapter 6
Operating the
Function Menu
Contents
Custom Sizes
You can print watermarks or transparent
overlays onto printed material. (→ P.3-29)
Chapter 4
Maintenance
Chapter 5
Using the Printer
in a Network
Environment
Poster Printing
You can enlarge a single page of print
data and print it out across multiple
sheets. This is convenient when you need
to paste together sheets to form a large
poster. (→ P.3-27, )
Chapter 3
Printing by Objective
You can register custom sizes for paper
and other media. (→ P.3-53, )
Index
‹ Printer Driver
TOP
Default
Settings
Print Types
POP Ad
Poster Photo
Photo
(From digital (From
camera)
scanner)
Long
Format
(Banner)
CAD
The printer driver provides predefined
settings that match the purpose of the
document. You can easily performing
printing that meets the purpose of the job.
Further, you can register the settings that
you have made on each sheet under a
name. (→ P.3-2, )
Chapter 1
Basic Use
Chapter 2
Using Various Media
Chapter 3
Printing by Objective
Chapter 4
Maintenance
Chapter 5
Using the Printer
in a Network
Environment
Maintenance
You can print nozzle check patterns,
perform printhead cleaning, adjust the
printhead, and adjust the amount of feed
all from the computer screen.
(→ P.4-40, P.4-42, P.4-45, P.4-48)
Chapter 7
Troubleshooting
Chapter 6
Operating the
Function Menu
Contents
1- 34
Index
‹ Printer Driver
TOP
Main Sheet
The Main sheet provides the following settings.
Print
Preferences
Media Type
Default Settings:
Use these settings to print a document
that contains text, images, and graphics
mixed together.
POP Ad:
Best selection for printing sharp, bright
posters for store advertising.
Poster:
Best selection for printing posters that
primarily use photographs.
Photo (from digital camera):
Best for printing photographs taken with
a digital camera.
Photo (from scanner):
Best selection when you need faithful
reproduction of color photos captured
with a scanner.
Long Format (Banner):
Best for long print jobs with mixed text
and illustrations, such as for vertical
hangings and horizontal banners.
CAD:
Best choice when you want to print fine,
sharp lines in architectural or
engineering plans.
Sets the media type to use. Printing is
performed to match the characteristics
of the media. If this setting does not
match the type of media loaded in the
printer, this will cause poor print quality.
Chapter 1
Basic Use
Chapter 2
Using Various Media
Chapter 3
Printing by Objective
Chapter 4
Maintenance
Chapter 5
Using the Printer
in a Network
Environment
Chapter 7
Troubleshooting
Chapter 6
Operating the
Function Menu
Contents
1- 35
Index
‹ Printer Driver
1- 36
High:
This print mode places priority on quality.
Standard:
Prints the printout at normal quality.
Draft:
Print Quality
This print mode places priority on speed.
Custom Settings:
Printing is performed using the process
set by the user. If Highest is selected, the
printed image will be the highest quality.
If selecting Custom Settings in Print
Quality, set the processing methods for
Print Quality, Resolution, Enhance
Settings...
Text with Photos, and Halftones. The
set values that can be selected for each
item depends on the paper type.
Color:
Uses all the inks to print the job in color.
Monochrome:
Converts all print data to grayscale and
prints using only the black ink.
Color Mode
Solid Color:
Solid colors are printed differently so they
stand out, light color lines print sharp.
Black Only:
All areas other than white are printed in
black.
Manual
Allows manual adjustment of color
Color
balance, saturation, brightness, and
Settings
contrast.
An image of the print job is displayed on
Open Preview
the screen as soon as the print job starts
When Print Job
so you can confirm the content before
Starts
you start the print.
Starts the Status Monitor of the GARO
Status Monitor...
Status Monitor.
TOP
About
Defaults
Displays the version number of the
printer driver.
Returns the settings on the sheets to
their initial (default) settings.
Chapter 1
Basic Use
Chapter 2
Using Various Media
Chapter 3
Printing by Objective
Chapter 4
Maintenance
Chapter 5
Using the Printer
in a Network
Environment
Chapter 7
Troubleshooting
Chapter 6
Operating the
Function Menu
Contents
Index
‹ Printer Driver
Page Setup Sheet
The Page Setup sheet provides the following settings.
1- 37
TOP
Page Size
Sets the size of the page for the print data.
Prints the image with no margin at the
Borderless four edges of the sheet. There are
Printing
limitations on the width and type of
media. (→ P.3-13, )
Enlarged/
Allows you to enlarge or reduce printing.
Reduced
You can select one of the following
Printing
methods to do this.
Automatically sets the enlargement/
Fit Media
reduction ratio to match the Media Size
Size
setting.
Automatically sets the enlargement/
Fit Roll
Paper Width reduction ratio to between 5% to 600%
to match the Roll Paper Width setting.
Allows you to scale the size of the image
Scaling
manually in the range 5% to 600%.
Specifies the actual size of the media
Media Size
that the print data will print on.
Allows you to select either portrait or
Orientation
landscape printing.
Automatically rotates the image 90
Rotate Page 90
degrees when print job would result in a
degrees
printout with the length smaller than the
(Conserve Paper)
width. This saves paper.
Specifies whether to use roll media, roll
Media Source
media (banner printing), or cut sheets.
Roll Paper
Specifies the width of the roll media to
Width
use.
Specifies whether the sheet is cut after
Auto Cut...
printing.
Allows you specify arbitrary paper sizes
Size Options... outside of the standard paper sizes for
long printouts, etc.
Chapter 1
Basic Use
Chapter 2
Using Various Media
Chapter 3
Printing by Objective
Chapter 4
Maintenance
Chapter 5
Using the Printer
in a Network
Environment
Chapter 7
Troubleshooting
Chapter 6
Operating the
Function Menu
Contents
Index
‹ Printer Driver
TOP
Layout Sheet
Maintenance Sheet
The Layout sheet provides the following settings.
The Maintenance sheet provides the following settings.
Chapter 1
Basic Use
Chapter 2
Using Various Media
Chapter 3
Printing by Objective
Chapter 4
Maintenance
1- 38
This feature allows you to print multiple
pages onto a single sheet or enlarge a
Page Layout
single page and print it over several
sheets (poster printing).
Overlays a watermark on the printed
image. You can freely configure the text,
Watermark
border, angle, position and transparency
settings of a watermark and register the
watermark under an arbitrary name.
When the image to be printed is smaller
Print Centered than the sheet, you can print the image
centered so the margins are even.
Rotate 180 degrees This feature rotates the image 180 degrees.
No Spaces at
When the image to be printed is smaller than
Top or Bottom the media, you can set the printer it does not
(Conserve
feed and there is no margin at the top or
Paper)
bottom. This conserves roll paper.
Copies
Specifies the number of copies to print.
Special
If the print results are not what you expect, you
Settings...
can change how the print job is processed.
Utility
Open the Status Monitor and display the
Utility sheet. This is used to print the
nozzle check pattern, perform printhead
cleaning, adjust the printhead position,
and adjust the feed amount.
For status prints, refer to the
Information tab in the status monitor.
Chapter 5
Using the Printer
in a Network
Environment
Chapter 7
Troubleshooting
Chapter 6
Operating the
Function Menu
Contents
Index
‹ Options
TOP
Options
Chapter 1
Basic Use
The following options are provided for this printer.
„ Media Take-up Unit
Printed media can be automatically spooled when you
are using roll media. This is convenient for printing long
prints or performing continuous printing.
z Media Take-up Unit
„ Roll Holder Sets
This set contains the roll holder and holder stoppers. If
you need different types of media and different widths,
you should keep multiple sets available and ready to
use. There is a 2 inchversion wich isprovided on the
printer.
z Roll Holder Set (For 2 inch Tubes)
Chapter 2
Using Various Media
Chapter 3
Printing by Objective
Chapter 4
Maintenance
Note
z Refer to the “Media Take-up Unit Setup Guide” binding
to the Media Take-up Unit for the installation.
z Refer to the “Using the Media Take-up Unit” (→ P.2-29)
for the Media Take-up Unit usage.
Chapter 5
Using the Printer
in a Network
Environment
Chapter 7
Troubleshooting
Chapter 6
Operating the
Function Menu
Contents
1- 39
Index
‹ Consumables
TOP
Consumables
The following consumables are available for this printer.
z Roll Media Sizes
You should have consumables on hand before they run out.
Purchase consumables at the dealer where you purchased
the printer.
„ Print Media
The following types of media can be used with this
printer.
z Type
Width:
44 inch (1117.6 mm), 42 inch (1066.8 mm),
JIS B0 (1030.0 mm), ISO A0 (841.0 mm),
36 inch (914.4 mm), 30 inch (762.0 mm),
24 inch (609.6 mm), ISO A1 (594.0 mm),
JIS B2 (515.0 mm), ISO A2 (420.0 mm),
16 inch (406.4 mm), 14 inch (355.6 mm),
ISO A3 (297.0 mm), 10 inch (254.0 mm)
Roll diameter: 150 mm max.
Photo:
z Glossy Photo Paper
z Semi-Glossy Photo Paper
CAD:
z CAD Plain Paper
z CAD Tracing Paper
Proof:
z Proofing paper
Generic:
z Plain Paper
z Plain Paper (High Quality)
z Recycled Coated Paper
z Coated Paper
z Heavyweight Coated Paper
z Extra Heavyweight Coated Paper
Media core
inside
diameter:
2 inch, 3 inch
Print surface:
Front side
z Cut Sheets
Sizes: Photo 6P (203.2 x 254.0 mm) to poster (44 x 62
inch) (1117.6 x 1574.8 mm)
Note
z For more details about media sizes, please refer to
“Media Size”. (→ P.2-2)
z The quality of media varies with the manufacturer. To
purchase print media, contact the dealer where you
purchased the printer.
Chapter 1
Basic Use
Chapter 2
Using Various Media
Chapter 3
Printing by Objective
Chapter 4
Maintenance
Chapter 5
Using the Printer
in a Network
Environment
Chapter 7
Troubleshooting
Chapter 6
Operating the
Function Menu
Contents
1- 40
Index
‹ Consumables
TOP
„ Ink Tanks
The following seven types of ink tanks are used in this
printer.
z Ink Tanks for the Océ CS2044
„ Maintenance Cartridge
The replaceable maintainence cartridge number is as
follows. A shaft cleaner (a) is included with the
maintainence cartridge.
z Maintenance Cartridge
Chapter 1
Basic Use
Chapter 2
Using Various Media
a
Yellow Ink
Magenta Ink
Photo Magenta Ink
Cyan Ink
Photo Cyan Ink
Black Ink
IJC244J
IJC244M
IJC244C
IJC244PC
IJC244BK
Note
z For more details about how to replace the ink tanks,
see “Replacing Ink Tanks”. (→ P.4-2)
Chapter 3
Printing by Objective
Note
z For more details about how to replace the
maintenance cartridge, see “Replacing the
Maintenance Cartridge”. (→ P.4-15)
Chapter 4
Maintenance
Chapter 5
Using the Printer
in a Network
Environment
Chapter 7
Troubleshooting
Chapter 6
Operating the
Function Menu
Contents
1- 41
Index
‹ Consumables
„ Printhead
The product number of the printhead that can be used on
the printer is:
z Printhead IJC200
TOP
„ Cutter Blade
The product number of the cutter blade that can be used
on the printer is:
z Cutter Blade
Chapter 1
Basic Use
Chapter 2
Using Various Media
Note
z For more details about how to replace the printhead,
see “Replacing the Printhead”. (→ P.4-22)
Note
z For more details about how to replace the cutter blade,
see “Replacing Standard Cutter Blades (Flat Cutters)”.
(→ P.4-28)
Chapter 3
Printing by Objective
Chapter 4
Maintenance
Chapter 5
Using the Printer
in a Network
Environment
Chapter 7
Troubleshooting
Chapter 6
Operating the
Function Menu
Contents
1- 42
Index
‹ Specifications
TOP
Specifications
Chapter 1
Basic Use
Océ CS2044
Print Features
Print Method
Print Modes
Max. Resolution
Interface
Serial Bubble Jet
Highest (Custom Settings), High, Standard, Draft
2400 x 1200 dpi
Chapter 2
Using Various Media
USB Interface
(USB 2.0 Standard)
1
(If the computer port, operating system, or USB cable does not support USB 2.0 High Speed
Mode, you will not be able to use High Speed Mode.)*1
Chapter 3
Printing by Objective
Network Interface
(10base-T/100base-TX)
Option*2
Chapter 4
Maintenance
Interface Connector
Printhead
Resolution
Number of nozzles
USB Interface: USB Standard Series B Receptacle
USB Interface Recommended Printer Cable:
Material: AWG28 or above
Type: Twisted-pair sealed cable (high speed mode compliant)
Length: 5.0 m max.
Connector: USB Standard Series B Plug
Replacement Printhead IJC200
1200 dpi (600 dpi x 2 lines)
1280 nozzles per color x 6 colors
Chapter 5
Using the Printer
in a Network
Environment
Chapter 7
Troubleshooting
Chapter 6
Operating the
Function Menu
Contents
1- 43
Index
‹ Specifications
TOP
Océ CS2044
Ink Tanks
Yellow Ink
Magenta Ink
Photo Magenta Ink
Cyan Ink
Photo Cyan Ink
Black Ink
Ink type
Ink tank capacity
Print Media
Media Width
Maximum length
Thickness
Type
Media Size and Print
Area*3
Compatible Borderless
Media
Output Stacker Capacity
Main Unit
Power source
Replacement Ink Tank IJ244Y
Replacement Ink Tank IJ244M
Replacement Ink Tank IJ244PM
Replacement Ink Tank IJ244C
Replacement Ink Tank IJ244PC
Replacement Ink Tank IJ244BK
Dye ink
330 ml per color
Range: 203.2 min. to 1,117.6 mm max.
Roll media: 18 m, Cut sheet: 1600 mm
70 to 800 µm
Plain Paper, Plain Paper (High Quality), Recycled Coated Paper, Coated Paper, Heavyweight Coated Paper,
Extra Heavyweight Coated Paper, Glossy Photo Paper, Semi-Glossy Photo Paper, Proofing Paper, CAD
Plain Paper, CAD Tracing Paper, Special 1 to 5
Normal Size:
Printable Area “Roll Media” Top 5 mm, Bottom 5 mm, Left/Right: 5 mm
“Cut Sheet” Top 5 mm, Bottom 23 mm, Left/Right: 5 mm
Recommended Print Area
“Roll Media and Cut Sheet” Top 20mm, Bottom 23mm, Left/Right: 5mm
Borderless Size: Printable Area “Roll Media” Top 0 mm, Bottom 0 mm, Left/Right: 0 mm
Oversize*4:
“Roll Media, Cut Sheet” Top 0 mm, Bottom 0 mm, Left/Right: 0 mm
254.0 mm, 355.6 mm, 406.4 mm, 515.0 mm, 594.0 mm, 609.6 mm, 841.0mm, 914.4mm,
1030.0mm, 1066.8mm
Media types: Heavyweight Coated Paper, Extra Heavyweight Coated Paper, Photo Glossy
Paper, Photo Semi-Glossy Paper, Special 1-5
1 sheet
AC 100 V to 240 V, 1.6 A, 50/60 Hz
Max. 160 W*5 (same as using Network Interface Board)
Sleep Mode: 100-115V: Less than 6W (same as using Network Interface Board)
Power consumption
220-240V: Less than 9W
Power off : Less than 1 W*6
Noise (Operation)
Approximately 54 dB (A) or less (less than 6.9 Bels)
Ideal operating environment 15 °C to 30 °C (59 ~ 86 °F), 10% to 80% RH with no condensation
Operating Environment
5 °C to 35 °C (41 ~ 95 °F), 10% to 90% RH with no condensation
1- 44
Chapter 1
Basic Use
Chapter 2
Using Various Media
Chapter 3
Printing by Objective
Chapter 4
Maintenance
Chapter 5
Using the Printer
in a Network
Environment
Chapter 7
Troubleshooting
Chapter 6
Operating the
Function Menu
Contents
Index
‹ Specifications
TOP
Océ CS2044
Dimensions (w x d x h)
Printer only
1642 mm x 715 mm x 478 mm
Printer + Stand
1642 mm x 972 mm x 1075 mm
Weight (including printhead, ink tanks)
Printer only
Approx. 80 kg
Printer + Stand
Approx. 98 kg
*1. If using a USB 2.0 interface in Hi-Speed mode, the following environment is required.
• Computer: USB 2.0 Hi-Speed-compatible
• OS: Windows Server 2003/Windows XP/Windows 2000/Mac OS X v10.3.3 or later
• USB2.0 driver: Microsoft USB 2.0 driver (The Microsoft USB 2.0 driver can be obtained using Windows Update, or
from the Service Pack.)
• USB cable: USB 2.0-authorized cable
• USB 2.0 interfaces whose operations have been approved by Cannon (i.e., Microsoft OS standard USB drivers):
• Adaptec USB 2.0 expansion card: USB2CONNECT3100
• Adaptec USB 2.0 expansion card: USB2CONNECT5100
• Adaptec USB 2.0 expansion card: USB2CONNECT2000LP
• Intel: 845G chip set
• Sis: SiS740 chip set
For problems concerning the chip sets described above, consult the relevant computer manufacturer.
*2. A network interface port or willl be mounted..
*3. Borderless Size and Oversize may not be able to be printed, depending on the media type and size. Further,
depending on the paper type, Borderless Size may be at the left and right edges only.
*4. If oversize has been selected, set media 10 mm min. wider than the media size selected, and set the roll height 10
mm min. higher than the roll media, or 28 mm min. higher than the cut sheet.
*5. If an option board has been mounted, this may be different.
*6. A considerable amount of power is consumed even when the power supply has been turned OFF. To completely
eliminate power consumption, remove the power supply plug from the outlet.
• These specifications are subject to change for improvements.
• The above specifications may vary for different operating environments.
Chapter 1
Basic Use
Chapter 2
Using Various Media
Chapter 3
Printing by Objective
Chapter 4
Maintenance
Chapter 5
Using the Printer
in a Network
Environment
Chapter 7
Troubleshooting
Chapter 6
Operating the
Function Menu
Contents
1- 45
Index
‹ Basic Environmental Performance
TOP
Basic Environmental Performance
Chapter 1
Basic Use
Océ CS2044
Printer
Power Consumption (Operation)
Standby Power
Power supply OFF
(with power plug connected)
Power Source Efficiency
Printer Weight
Dimensions (w x d x h)
Recycling
Product Safety
Content of Harmful Materials
Noise (Operation)
External Cover Material
Content of Heavy Metals
(Pb, Hg, Cr (VI), Cd)
Recycling
Applicable Standards
100-115V: Less than 6W (same as using Network Interface Board)
220-240V: Less than 9W
Chapter 2
Using Various Media
Less than 1 W
Chapter 3
Printing by Objective
Approx. 80 kg
1642 mm x 715 mm x 478 mm
Exterior covers are technically certified as fully recyclable.
Chapter 4
Maintenance
Total Configuration: No special unburnable bromide materials (PBB, PBDE) used.
External Cover Plastic: No heavy metals (Pb, Hg, Cr (VI), Cd) or Halogen
unburnable materials used.
Approximately 54 dB (A) or less (less than 6.9 Bels)
Chapter 5
Using the Printer
in a Network
Environment
Not used (Packing Material)
All containers, packing material recyclable (from April, 2004)
International Energy Star Program, VCCI (Class B)
Chapter 7
Troubleshooting
Chapter 6
Operating the
Function Menu
Contents
1- 46
Index
TOP
Chapter 2 Using Various Media
You can print the items that have been checked.
Chapter 1
Basic Use
Media Size ..................................................................................................2-2
Media Size ............................................................................................................. 2-2
Media Type Sizes and Print Area .......................................................................... 2-4
Handling Paper and Other Print Media .................................................................. 2-9
Chapter 2
Using Various Media
Printing with Rolls Media ..........................................................................2-10
Loading Roll Media .............................................................................................. 2-10
Removing a Roll .................................................................................................. 2-18
Printing with Cut Sheets ...........................................................................2-22
Loading Cut Sheets ............................................................................................. 2-22
Removing a Cut Sheet ........................................................................................ 2-25
Change the height of the printhead ..........................................................2-26
Changing Printhead Height ................................................................................. 2-26
Aligning the Printhead ......................................................................................... 2-28
Changing Printhead Height Again ....................................................................... 2-28
Chapter 3
Printing by Objective
Chapter 4
Maintenance
Using the Media Take-up Unit ..................................................................2-29
Settings for Using the Media Take-up Unit .......................................................... 2-30
Attaching Roll Media ............................................................................................ 2-30
Removing Media that Has Finished Printing ....................................................... 2-36
Settings to Not Use the Media Take-up Unit ....................................................... 2-39
Chapter 5
Using the Printer
in a Network
Environment
Chapter 7
Troubleshooting
Chapter 6
Operating the
Function Menu
Contents
2- 1
How to Use the Chapter
Contents Pages
→ Before clicking the Start Print button
Index
‹
TOP
Media Size
The following table lists the media sizes and feeding
methods that can be used with this printer.
„ Roll Media
This table lists roll media with maximum diameters of
150 mm (5.1 in.) and media core inside diameters of 2 or
3 inches that can be used in this printer.
Width
Non-category 44”
Width: 1,117.6 mm (44 in.)
Non-category 42”
Width: 1,066.8 mm (42 in.)
JIS B0
Width: 1,030.0 mm
(40.55 in.)
Non-category 36”
Width: 914.4 mm (36 in.)
ISO A0
Width: 841.0 mm (33.11
in.)
Non-category 30”
Width: 762.0 mm (30 in.)
Size Name in
Printer Driver*1
Poster 44 x 62 inch
ARCH E1
Poster 42 x 60 inch
JIS B0
JIS B1
ARCH E
ARCH D
ISO A0
ISO A1
Poster 30 x 40 inch
Poster 20 x 30 inch
ARCH D
Non-category 24”
ARCH C
Width: 609.6 mm (24 in.)
Complete Works
(20 x 24 inch)
ISO A1
ISO A1
Width: 594.0 mm (23.39 in.) ISO A2
JIS B2
JIS B2
Width: 515.0 mm (20.28 in.) JIS B3
2- 2
Borderless
Printing*2
Width
ISO A2
Width: 420.0 mm (16.54 in.)
Non-category 16”
Width: 406.4 mm (16 in.)
Non-category 14”
Width: 355.6 mm (14 in.)
ISO A3
Width: 297.0 mm (11.69 in.)
Non-category 10”
Width: 254.0 mm (10 in.)
Size Name in
Printer Driver*1
Borderless
Printing*2
ISO A2
ISO A3
US Photo
(16 x 20 inch)
14 x 17
ANSI Legal
ISO A3
ISO A4
10 x 15
10 x 12
8 x 10
*1. Borderless printing is also possible using the user
media settings for the paper widths described
above.
*2. Media Type can be set to borderless printing for
the following: Heavyweight Coated Paper, Extra
Heavyweight Coated Paper, Glossy Photo Paper,
Semi-Glossy Photo Paper, Special 1 to 5.
Chapter 1
Basic Use
Chapter 2
Using Various Media
Chapter 3
Printing by Objective
Chapter 4
Maintenance
Chapter 5
Using the Printer
in a Network
Environment
Chapter 7
Troubleshooting
Chapter 6
Operating the
Function Menu
Contents
Index
‹
TOP
„ Cut Sheet
Cut sheets up to 1,117.6 mm wide (44 inche) can be
used.
2- 3
Size (Width)
ISO A0
ISO A1
ISO A2
ISO A3+
ISO A3
ISO A4
ISO B0
ISO B1
ISO B2
ISO B3
ISO B4
JIS B0
JIS B1
JIS B2
JIS B3
JIS B4
ANSI F
ANSI E
ANSI D
ANSI C
ANSI B
ANSI B Super
ANSI Letter
ANSI Legal
ARCH E
ARCH E1
ARCH E2
ARCH E3
Dimensions
841.0 x 1189.0 mm (33.11 x 46.81 inch)
594.0 x 841.0 mm (23.39 x 33.11 inch)
420.0 x 594.0 mm (16.54 x 23.39 inch)
329.0 x 483.0 mm (12.95 x 19.02 inch)
297.0 x 420.0 mm (11.69 x 16.54 inch)
210.0 x 297.0 mm (8.27 x 11.69 inch)
1000.0 x 1414.0 mm (39.37 x 55.67 inch)
707.0 x 1000.0 mm (27.83 x 39.37 inch)
500.0 x 707.0 mm (19.69 x 27.83 inch)
353.0 x 500.0 mm (13.90 x 19.69 inch)
250.0 x 353.0 mm (9.84 x 13.90 inch)
1030.0 x 1456.0 mm (40.55 x 57.32 inch)
728.0 x 1030.0 mm (28.66 x 40.55 inch)
515.0 x 728.0 mm (20.28 x 28.66 inch)
364.0 x 515.0 mm (14.33 x 20.28 inch)
257.0 x 364.0 mm (10.12 x 14.33 inch)
711.2 x 1060.0 mm (28 x 41.73 inch)
863.6 x 1117.6 mm (34 x 44 inch)
558.8 x 863.6 mm (22 x 34 inch)
431.8 x 558.8 mm (17 x 22 inch)
279.4 x 431.8 mm (11 x 17 inch)
330.2 x 482.6 mm (13 x 19 inch)
215.9 x 279.4 mm (8.5 x 11 inch)
215.9 x 355.6 mm (8.5 x 14 inch)
914.4 x 1219.2 mm (36 x 48 inch)
762.0 x 1066.8 mm (30 x 42 inch)
660.4 x 965.2 mm (26 x 38 inch)
685.8 x 990.6 mm (27 x 39 inch)
Size (Width)
ARCH D
ARCH C
ARCH B
ARCH A
DIN C0
DIN C1
DIN C2
DIN C3
DIN C4
Poster
44 x 62 inches
Poster
42 x 60 inches
Poster
30 x 40 inches
Poster
20 x 30 inches
Photo
Full Size
Photo
Whole Sheet
Photo
14 x 17
Photo
10 x 15
Photo
10 x 12
Photo
8 x 10
US Photo
Dimensions
609.6 x 914.4 mm (24 x 36 inch)
457.2 x 609.6 mm (18 x 24 inch)
304.8 x 457.2 mm (12 x 18 inch)
228.6 x 304.8 mm (9 x 12 inch)
917.0 x 1297.0 mm (36.10 x 51.06 inch)
648.0 x 917.0 mm (25.51 x 36.10 inch)
458.0 x 648.0 mm (18.03 x 25.51 inch)
324.0 x 458.0 mm (12.76 x 18.03 inch)
229.0 x 324.0 mm (9.02 x 12.76 inch)
Chapter 1
Basic Use
Chapter 2
Using Various Media
Chapter 3
Printing by Objective
1117.6 x 1574.8 mm (44 x 62 inch)
1066.8 x 1524.0 mm (42 x 60 inch)
Chapter 4
Maintenance
762.0 x 1016.0 mm (30 x 40 inch)
508.0 x 609.6 mm (20 x 24 inch)
Chapter 5
Using the Printer
in a Network
Environment
457.2 x 558.8 mm (18 x 22 inch)
Chapter 7
Troubleshooting
508.0 x 762.0 mm (20 x 30 inch)
355.6 x 431.8 mm (14 x 17 inch)
254.0 x 381.0 mm (10 x 15 inch)
Chapter 6
Operating the
Function Menu
254.0 x 304.8 mm (10 x 12 inch)
203.2 x 254.0 mm (8 x 10 inch)
406.4 x 508.0 mm (16 x 20 inch)
Contents
Index
‹
TOP
Media Type Sizes and Print Area
The printer is equipped with “borderless size” and
“oversize” paper types in addition to the normal paper sizes.
The printable area, the size of the paper that is actually
loaded, and the range that that is actually printed varies
between these types. Select the paper size according to
your objective.
Printing possible inside the area 5 mm in
from the top, bottom, left and right
margins.
5 mm
Media Size
Printable Area
5 mm
Note
z To display the oversize, click the Size Options button
on the Page Setup sheet, then select the Oversize of
the Display Series.
„ Normal Size
Print results can be obtained for the same size as the
paper size. All paper sizes and types can be printed. The
resulting printouts have margins at the top, bottom, left,
and right, and the image beyond these margins is
discarded.
5 mm
5 mm
Print Area
Same size as the Media Size or wide roll
paper.
Media to Load
Printable
Paper Sizes
Printable
Paper Types
Chapter 3
Printing by Objective
Chapter 4
Maintenance
Chapter 5
Using the Printer
in a Network
Environment
Roll Media
Size to
Load
Data created the same size as Media Size.
Chapter 7
Troubleshooting
Chapter 6
Operating the
Function Menu
Print Data and
Results
All media types
Original data the
same as the media
2- 4
Chapter 2
Using Various Media
Media Size
z Roll Media
Width 44 inch, 42 inch, JIS B0, 36 inch,
ISO A0, 30 inch, 24 inch, ISO A1, JIS B2,
ISO A2, 16 inch, 14 inch, ISO A3, 10 inch
(all fixed sizes), and user-set paper of the
widths described above.
Chapter 1
Basic Use
Print Results
Contents
Index
‹
TOP
z Cut Sheet
Printable
Paper Sizes
All fixed sizes from poster 44 x 62 inch to
photo 8 x 10, and user-defined paper sizes
from 203.2 x 203.2 mm to 1117.6 x 1600 mm
Printable
Paper Types
All media types
Printing possible inside the area 5 mm in
from the top, left, right and 23 mm from the
bottom margins.
5 mm
5 mm
23 mm
5 mm
Chapter 2
Using Various Media
Chapter 3
Printing by Objective
Chapter 4
Maintenance
Print Area
Data created the same size as cut sheet.
Media Size
Cut Sheet
Size to
Load
Data created the same size as Media Size.
Print Data and
Results
2- 5
Chapter 1
Basic Use
Media Size
Printable Area
Media to Load
Important
z The print quality or the feed precision may deteriorate
at the top margin of the media, or the printhead may
scratch the surface of the print. Further, ink may
adhere to the top and bottom edges. If the printhead
scratches the media, the printer may be damaged. If
the printhead scratches the media, raise the height of
the printhead before printing. (→ P.2-26)
Chapter 5
Using the Printer
in a Network
Environment
Chapter 7
Troubleshooting
Chapter 6
Operating the
Function Menu
Contents
Original data the
same as the media
Print Results
Index
‹
TOP
„ Borderless Printing
Borderless printing can be performed on all paper sizes.
Media on which borderless printing can be performed,
however, have the following limitations. For borderless
printing, refer to Chapter 3 “Basic Procedure for
Borderless Printing”
(→ P.3-13, ).
z Roll Media
Printable Paper Types
Printable Paper
Sizes
Borderless
printing to all
edges is
possible.
Width 42 inch, JIS B0, 36 inch, ISO
A0, 24 inch, ISO A1, JIS B2, 16 inch,
14 inch, 10 inch (all fixed sizes), and
user-defined paper sizes of the
widths described above.
Heavyweight Coated Paper, Extra
Heavyweight Coated Paper, Glossy
Photo Paper, Semi-Glossy Photo
Paper, Special 1 to 5
Data created the same width as roll
paper
Media Size
Media to Load
Roll Media
Size to
Load
Chapter 1
Basic Use
Chapter 2
Using Various Media
Chapter 3
Printing by Objective
Chapter 4
Maintenance
Chapter 5
Using the Printer
in a Network
Environment
Chapter 7
Troubleshooting
Allowed Printing Area of Media Size
0 mm
Media Size
Printable Area
0 mm
0 mm
2- 6
0 mm
Print Area
Chapter 6
Operating the
Function Menu
Contents
Index
‹
TOP
Data created the same size as Media
Size.
Scale to fit the
Page Size Print
Example
Printed slightly
enlarged
automatically
Original data the
same as the media
Print Results
Print Data and Results
Create data of any size.
Note
z To display Oversize click the Size Options button on
the Page Setup sheet, then under Display Series
select Oversize.
z Roll Media
Scale to fit the
Roll Paper
Width Print
Example
Enlarge/Reduce
to Fit Roll Paper
Width
Original data
of desired size
Print Results
Create data larger by 3 mm at the
top, bottom, left, and right margins.
Print Image
with Actual Size
Print Example
Printable
Paper Widths
Width 42 inch, JIS B0, ISO B0, 36 inch,
ISO A0, 30 inch, 24 inch, ISO A1, JIS B2,
ISO A2, 16 inch, 14 inch, ISO A3+, ISO
A3, 10 inch, ISO A4 (all fixed sizes), and
user-set paper of the widths described
above.
Printable
Paper Types
All media types
Allowed printing surface area of media
size
0 mm
Media Size
Printable Area
Print
actual size
Original data 3 mm larger
than the media size at the
top, bottom, left, right margins.
2- 7
„ Oversize
With oversize media, printing can be performed on the
full surface of the media size. All media types can be
printed. If printing using oversize, it is necessary to load
paper that is larger than the media size. Further, the print
results will have margins larger than the media size.
0 mm
Chapter 2
Using Various Media
Chapter 3
Printing by Objective
Chapter 4
Maintenance
Chapter 5
Using the Printer
in a Network
Environment
Chapter 7
Troubleshooting
Chapter 6
Operating the
Function Menu
0 mm
Print Results
0 mm
Chapter 1
Basic Use
Print Area
Contents
Index
‹
TOP
Roll paper 10 mm wider than the media
size
Media Size
Media to Load
Roll Media
Size to
Load
z Cut Sheet
Printable
Paper Sizes
All fixed sizes from poster 42 x 60 inch to
photo 8 x 10, and user-set paper from
203.2 x 203.2 mm to 1107.6 x 1600 mm
Printable
Paper Types
All media types
Allowed printing surface area of media size
0 mm
Media Size
Data created the same size as Media Size
Printable Area
Print Data and
Results
Actual
size full
coverage
print
Original data the
same as the media
0 mm
0 mm
Print Area
Media Size
Important
z Printing may be misaligned if the end of the roll media
has come off the core. Take care that the end of the roll
media is not within the printing area.
Media to Load
Size of
loaded
cut sheet
Chapter 2
Using Various Media
Chapter 3
Printing by Objective
0 mm
Cut sheets 10 mm wider and 28 mm taller
than the media size
Print Results
Chapter 1
Basic Use
Chapter 4
Maintenance
Chapter 5
Using the Printer
in a Network
Environment
Chapter 7
Troubleshooting
Chapter 6
Operating the
Function Menu
Contents
2- 8
Index
‹
TOP
Data created the same size as Media Size
Chapter 1
Basic Use
Print Data and
Results
Actual
size full
coverage
print
Original data the
same as the media
Chapter 2
Using Various Media
Print Results
Important
z You cannot use Oversize to print poster 44 x 62 inch
and other sizes wider than 1,107.6 mm.
Handling Paper and Other Print Media
For details about how to handle and store print media,
please refer to the instructions provided with the packet.
Chapter 3
Printing by Objective
Chapter 4
Maintenance
Chapter 5
Using the Printer
in a Network
Environment
Chapter 7
Troubleshooting
Chapter 6
Operating the
Function Menu
Contents
2- 9
Index
‹ Printing with Rolls Media
TOP
Printing with Rolls Media
Loading Roll Media
This is the general procedure for loading roll media.
After printing remove the completed printout and any
media loaded on the platen. (→ P.2-18, P.2-25)
„ Selecting the Paper Source
When printing on roll media, select roll media as the
paper source using the operation panel.
1
On the operation panel, select the roll media source.
(→ P.2-10)
Press and hold the Paper Source button for 1
second or more to light the Roll Media lamp.
Load the roll media in the roll holder slot. (→ P.2-11)
Message
Offline
Feed Paper
Load the roll media on the platen. (→ P.2-15)
Online
Offline
Menu
On the printer operation panel, select the media type.
(→ P.2-15)
When cut paper is loaded, the printer will display
Remove CutSheet?.
Adjust the amount of media feed. (→ P.4-45)
Start the print job from the computer.
Important
z Make sure to turn off the power supply to the printer
before loading the roll media. Further, if the loaded
media differs from the media type setting, the print
quality may be reduced.
Cleaning
(3 sec.)
Stop/Eject
(1 sec.)
2
Chapter 2
Using Various Media
Chapter 3
Printing by Objective
Information Power
Data
Chapter 1
Basic Use
If you have loaded another roll, press and hold the
Stop/Eject button for 1 second or more to display
Remove RllMedia?.
If the cut sheet or roll media is set to the printer,
press the OK button.
Remove CutSheet?
Press OK/Stop
Remove the cut sheets or roll media.
(→ P.2-18, P.2-25)
Chapter 4
Maintenance
Chapter 5
Using the Printer
in a Network
Environment
Chapter 7
Troubleshooting
Chapter 6
Operating the
Function Menu
Contents
2- 10
Index
‹ Printing with Rolls Media
„ Loading the Roll Media
Load the roll media into the roll holder slot using the
following procedure. If there are cut sheets or printed
sheets still on the platen, remove them first.
Important
z If printing banners or other long sizes, the paper may
reach the floor after printing and the printing surface
become dirty. Wipe the floor beforehand using a clean
cloth or paper.
z If using roll media, wear clean cloth gloves when
handling the media to protect the print surface.
Note
z The platen may be fouled with ink so clean inside the
top cover before you switch to printing on a large size.
(→ P.4-12)
z For more details about media that can be loaded in the
roll holder, please refer to “Media Size”.
(→ P.2-2)
1
Open the top cover, and lift out the ejection guide.
TOP
Important
z Do not touch any areas other than those indicated.
Your hands could get dirty or this could damage the
printer.
2
If there is any roll media still present, rotate the top
of the holder stopper towards the back, then rewind
the media onto the roll and remove the roll holder.
Chapter 1
Basic Use
Chapter 2
Using Various Media
Chapter 3
Printing by Objective
Chapter 4
Maintenance
3
Chapter 5
Using the Printer
in a Network
Environment
Push the holder stopper lever (a) towards the
outside to unlock the stopper, then pull out the
holder stopper and remove the roll media.
a
Chapter 7
Troubleshooting
Chapter 6
Operating the
Function Menu
Contents
2- 11
Index
‹ Printing with Rolls Media
Important
z Store unused roll media in its original package. Store
the package in a cool, dry location that is not exposed
to direct sunlight.
4
TOP
Important
z If the edge of the roll paper is not straight, take up the
roll paper until the edge is straight before loading it.
Misalignment of the edges may cause poor paper
feed.
Place the roll media end at the bottom, and insert
the shaft of the roll holder firmly into the roll from the
right side until the holder meets the roll.
Chapter 2
Using Various Media
Chapter 3
Printing by Objective
z Firmly insert the roll holder into the shaft. Any gaps
may cause poor paper feed.
Caution
z Place the roll holder horizontally on a table, and then
load the roll holder. The roll media is heavy, so
dropping it may cause an injury.
Chapter 1
Basic Use
5
Attach the holder stopper to the left side of the roll
holder and insert it until it contacts the roll media
shaft, then push the holder stopper lever (a) over
toward the shaft to lock it.
Chapter 4
Maintenance
Chapter 5
Using the Printer
in a Network
Environment
Chapter 7
Troubleshooting
Chapter 6
Operating the
Function Menu
a
Contents
The roll media is locked in place by the roll holder.
2- 12
Index
‹ Printing with Rolls Media
Important
z If the edge of the roll paper is not straight, or there is
blot or imprint of a tape. This could cause poor paper
feed and reduce printing quality. In these cases, cut
the edge of the roll media before loading the roll holder
to the printer.
TOP
Chapter 1
Basic Use
Chapter 2
Using Various Media
Chapter 3
Printing by Objective
Chapter 4
Maintenance
Chapter 5
Using the Printer
in a Network
Environment
Chapter 7
Troubleshooting
Chapter 6
Operating the
Function Menu
Contents
2- 13
Index
‹ Printing with Rolls Media
6
TOP
Hold the roll holder such that the role media end is
down and towards you, and then align the roll holder
(b) with the left and right guide grooves (c) and load
the roll holder.
7
Pull the roll media out keeping the right and left
sides even and insert it into the top of the paper feed
slot (d). Feed the roll media until it makes contact
with the paperweight (e).
If the roll paper is wide and its edge is not straight,
take up the roll slack until the edges are straight then
set it.
Chapter 1
Basic Use
Chapter 2
Using Various Media
e
c
Chapter 3
Printing by Objective
d
b
c
b
Once the roll media has been advanced to where it
touches the paperweight, the roll media will
automatically be fed to the platen.
Important
z If you see the media is wrinkled or curled, remove the
wrinkles or curls before loading the media.
8
Chapter 4
Maintenance
Chapter 5
Using the Printer
in a Network
Environment
Chapter 7
Troubleshooting
Close the ejection guide.
Chapter 6
Operating the
Function Menu
Contents
2- 14
Index
‹ Printing with Rolls Media
9
TOP
Hold the end of the paper, and lift the release lever.
Note
z If the release lever is open, the platen paper suction
can be adjusted. If it is difficult to load the paper, adjust
the suction using the [5] button (stronger) and [6]
button (weaker) on the operation panel.
11 Close the top cover.
edge of the roll media to the ejection guide (f), align
the right edge of the media with the right side of the
paper alignment line (g), then pull down the release
lever.
f
Important
z Make sure to carry out Step 9 and 10. Otherwise, the
paper may not be feed straight, or the paper may
become wrinkled causing a paper jam or friction on the
printhead.
z Do not pull strongly on the roll media when you align it
with the paper alignment line (g). The roll media may
not feed out straight in some cases.
2- 15
Chapter 2
Using Various Media
Chapter 3
Printing by Objective
10 While gently pulling out the center of the leading
g
Chapter 1
Basic Use
Chapter 4
Maintenance
Media Type is displayed.
Chapter 5
Using the Printer
in a Network
Environment
media type, and then press the OK button.
Chapter 7
Troubleshooting
12 Press the [3] or [4] buttons to select the loaded
If the same type of media already matches the
loaded media, just press the OK button.
Chapter 6
Operating the
Function Menu
Media Type
HW Coated
The selection is prefixed with an equals sign (=) to
indicate the roll media type that is selected.
The table below lists the possible settings for the
Media Types.
Media Name
Plain Paper
Media Type Setting
Plain Paper
Contents
Index
‹ Printing with Rolls Media
Media Name
Media Type Setting
Plain Paper(High Quality) Plain Paper HQ
Recycled Coated Paper
Recycled Coated
Coated Paper
Coated Paper
Heavyweight Coated Paper HW Coated
Extra Heavyweight Coated
Ex HW Coated
Paper
Glossy Photo Paper
Glossy Photo
Semi-Glossy Photo Paper Semi-Gl Photo
Proofing paper
Proofing paper
CAD Plain Paper
CAD Plain Paper
CAD Tracing Paper
CAD Trace Paper
Special 1-5
Special 1-5
Roll media starts to feed as soon as the type of
media is selected.
Important
z Make sure to choose the correct media type setting. If
the configured media type is incorrect, perform the
“Media Size” operation. (→ P.2-2)
z As soon as each sheet prints, remove it from the
output stacker.
z Manually remove paper from the ejection guide and
output stacker after cutting such media as trimmed
paper and pre-cut paper.
z If you are replacing the roll media, cut off a suitable
amount of paper for the paper type to align the edge of
the paper. Depending on the paper type, the paper
may not be ejected but remain in the printer. If this
happens, remove the paper manually.
2- 16
TOP
Note
z If a message appears in the display after loading roll
paper, the operation panel lamp flashes.
z The factory default Media Type setting is Plain Paper.
Or, when the release lever is opened and closed, the
media type setting is reset automatically to Plain
Paper.
z The media size is detected automatically, and so no
settings are required.
z If you are replacing the roll media, cut off a suitable
amount of paper for the paper type to align the edge of
the paper. If the roll media remaining amount detection
function is turned ON, the barcode, which is at the
edge of the roll paper, will be cut off after it has been
read.
Chapter 1
Basic Use
Chapter 2
Using Various Media
Chapter 3
Printing by Objective
Chapter 4
Maintenance
Chapter 5
Using the Printer
in a Network
Environment
Chapter 7
Troubleshooting
Chapter 6
Operating the
Function Menu
Contents
Index
‹ Printing with Rolls Media
13 If the roll media remaining detection feature is ON,
press [3] or [4] to detect the length of the loaded
media, then press the OK button.
For roll media lengths, refer to the manual that
accompanies the roll media.
If you have loaded roll that has a barcode showing
the remaining length printed on it, the amount of
media remaining is detected automatically so you do
not need to make any settings.
Roll Length Set
30.0 m
TOP
„ Selecting the Media Type
If you have loaded paper into the printer, make sure to
set the paper type using the operation panel. You cannot
achieve accurate printing results is the paper type is
incorrect. If the printer paper type settings are incorrect,
the settings can be changed using the following
procedure.
1
→
Press the Online button to display MAIN MENU on
the printer display.
MAIN MENU
Head Cleaning
After a few seconds, Online is displayed and the
printer is ready to print.
Important
z If you changed the paper type, make sure to adjust the
paper feed amount. (→ P.4-45)
Note
z The printer adjusts the paper feed amount minutely for
each media type to deliver optimum print quality.
Consequently, the image size and margins may
change according to the paper type.
2
Cleaning
(3 sec.)
Stop/Eject
(1 sec.)
Online
Press [3] or [4] to select Media Type, then press [6].
MAIN MENU
Media Type
↓
Chapter 1
Basic Use
Chapter 2
Using Various Media
Chapter 3
Printing by Objective
Chapter 4
Maintenance
Chapter 5
Using the Printer
in a Network
Environment
Chapter 7
Troubleshooting
Chapter 6
Operating the
Function Menu
Contents
2- 17
Index
‹ Printing with Rolls Media
3
Press [3] or [4] to select the name of the media type
then press the OK button.
Media Type
HW Coated
The selection is prefixed with an equals sign (=) to
indicate the roll media type that is selected.
Important
z In order to achieve the best printing results with this
printer, the amount of feed is fine adjusted for each
type of media. For this reason, the image size,
margins, and other settings change for each media
type.
z If you have changed the paper type, make sure to
adjust the paper feed amount. (→ P.4-45)
TOP
Removing a Roll
If you are removing roll media that has already been
loaded, or if you are using a paper type that cannot be cut
automatically, perform the following procedure. Further, if
printing on a media type for which Eject Cut has been set to
Yes using the Océ imagePROGRAF Media Configuration
Tool (→ P.3-62, ), perform the same operation if Cut by Stop
key is displayed after printing has ended.
Important
z If the roll media remaining amount detection function
has been turned ON, make sure to use the following
procedure to remove the roll media. If the release lever
is opened before the remaining amount bar code is
printed and the roll media removed, the printer will not
be able to keep track of the amount of media
remaining.
z Place the roll media that has been removed in a PVC
bag and store in a safe place. If you are printing on roll
media that has been left to stand for some time, the
print surface may be scratched and print quality
reduced.
1
Hold down the Stop/Eject button for at least
1 second.
Online
Bk
2- 18
2
Press the OK button.
Cleaning
(3 sec.)
Stop/Eject
(1 sec.)
Online
Chapter 1
Basic Use
Chapter 2
Using Various Media
Chapter 3
Printing by Objective
Chapter 4
Maintenance
Chapter 5
Using the Printer
in a Network
Environment
Chapter 7
Troubleshooting
Chapter 6
Operating the
Function Menu
Contents
Index
‹ Printing with Rolls Media
Remove RllMedia?
Press OK/Stop
TOP
„ Paper Types for which the Standard Cutter Has
Been Turned Enable
1. The remaining amount barcode will be printed
at the leading edge of the media, if the roll
media remaining detection function is ON.
Plain Paper
XX
2. Roll media is ejected from the back.
Important
z When the release lever is opened, the remaining
amount barcode will not be printed without pushing the
Stop/Eject button even if the roll media remaining
detection function is ON. In this case, the printer will
not be able to keep track of the amount of media
remaining.
Chapter 1
Basic Use
Chapter 2
Using Various Media
Chapter 3
Printing by Objective
Chapter 4
Maintenance
Chapter 5
Using the Printer
in a Network
Environment
Chapter 7
Troubleshooting
Chapter 6
Operating the
Function Menu
Contents
2- 19
Index
‹ Printing with Rolls Media
TOP
„ Paper Types that Cannot be Cut Automatically
1. Press the Online button. The printer will
become offline.
2. Press the [6] button (not longer than 0.8 sec) to
feed the media 330 mm.
3. Cut along the guideline using a pair of scissors.
4. Press and hold the [5] button on the operation
panel for more than 1 sec. until you see Feed
Limit... The roll media will spool 300 mm, and
stop automatically.
5. Press the Online button. The printer will
become online.
Important
z If the printer receives new print data before performing
this operation, printing will continue.
z Cut accurately along the guideline. If the cutting
position is misaligned by 30 mm or greater from the
guideline, subsequent printing may not be performed
accurately.
Chapter 1
Basic Use
Chapter 2
Using Various Media
Chapter 3
Printing by Objective
Chapter 4
Maintenance
Chapter 5
Using the Printer
in a Network
Environment
Chapter 7
Troubleshooting
Chapter 6
Operating the
Function Menu
Contents
2- 20
Index
‹ Printing with Rolls Media
3
Open the top cover, and left the ejection
guide.
TOP
5
Close the ejection guide, and then close the
top cover.
Chapter 1
Basic Use
Chapter 2
Using Various Media
Chapter 3
Printing by Objective
4
Rotate the top of the roll holder toward the
back to spool and remove the roll media.
Chapter 4
Maintenance
Chapter 5
Using the Printer
in a Network
Environment
Chapter 7
Troubleshooting
Chapter 6
Operating the
Function Menu
Contents
2- 21
Index
‹ Printing with Cut Sheets
TOP
Printing with Cut Sheets
Loading Cut Sheets
This is the general procedure for printing cut sheets.
If there is a cut sheet in the printer, remove it.
(→ P.2-18, P.2-25)
„ Selecting the Paper Source
When printing on cut sheets, set the media source to cut
sheet using the operation panel.
Press and hold the Paper Source button for 1
second or more to light the Cut Sheet lamp.
1
On the printer operation panel, select cut sheet as the
paper feed source. (→ P.2-22)
Offline
Feed Paper
Adjust the amount of media feed. (→ P.4-45)
Start the print job from the computer.
2- 22
Cleaning
(3 sec.)
Stop/Eject
(1 sec.)
Online
Offline
Menu
On the printer operation panel, select the media type.
(→ P.2-24)
Note
z Store unused cut sheets in the original package. Store
the package in a cool, dry location that is not exposed
to direct sunlight.
Chapter 2
Using Various Media
Information Power
Data
Message
Place the cut sheet on the platen. (→ P.2-23)
Important
z Make sure to turn OFF the power supply to the printer
before loading the cut sheets. Further, if the paper type
that has been loaded, and the paper type set using the
operation panel, are different, a paper load error will
occur, and print quality may be reduced.
Chapter 1
Basic Use
2
When a roll is loaded, the printer will display
Remove RllMedia?
If another cut sheet has been set, press and hold the
Stop/Eject button for 1 second or more. Remove
CutSheet? will be displayed.
If the cut sheet or roll media is set to the printer,
press the OK button.
Remove RllMedia?
Press OK/Stop
Remove the cut sheets or roll media.
(→ P.2-18, P.2-25)
Important
z If you load a cut sheet with roll paper loaded in the
printer, this may cause a jam. Before loading a cut
sheet, we recommend that you remove the roll paper.
To use the printer with roll paper loaded, wrap a sheet
of paper (A3 size or larger) around the roll and fasten
the sheet with a piece of tape to prevent the roll from
loosening.
Chapter 3
Printing by Objective
Chapter 4
Maintenance
Chapter 5
Using the Printer
in a Network
Environment
Chapter 7
Troubleshooting
Chapter 6
Operating the
Function Menu
Contents
Index
‹ Printing with Cut Sheets
TOP
1
Open the top cover, and lift the release lever.
Chapter 1
Basic Use
Chapter 2
Using Various Media
z When you set the cut sheet with roll paper loaded in
the printer, the media may be damaged.
„ Loading Cut Sheets
Load the cut sheets into the platen using the following
procedure. If there are cut sheets or printed sheets still
on the platen, remove them first.
Note
z The platen may be fouled with ink so clean inside the
top cover before you switch to printing on a large size.
(→ P.4-12)
z For more details about media that can be set, refer to
“Media Size”. (→ P.2-2)
z If the paper is creased, the paper and printhead may
be misaligned, so smooth out any paper creases.
Chapter 3
Printing by Objective
Important
z Do not touch any areas other than those indicated.
Your hands could get dirty or this could damage the
printer.
2
With the print side of the cut sheet facing up, hold
the sheet square between the paperweight, making
sure that the stack is aligned with the paper
alignment line (a) on the right and aligned with the
paper alignment line (b) at the back.
Chapter 4
Maintenance
Chapter 5
Using the Printer
in a Network
Environment
Chapter 7
Troubleshooting
b
a
Chapter 6
Operating the
Function Menu
Contents
2- 23
When the cut sheet is inserted, it is held against the
platen by vacuum force.
Index
‹ Printing with Cut Sheets
TOP
4
Important
z Align and load parallel the cut sheets to the paper
alignment line on the right of the platen. If the paper is
loaded at an angle, an error will occur. If this happens,
reload the paper straight.
Note
z If the release lever is open, the platen paper suction
can be adjusted. If it is difficult to load the paper, adjust
the suction using the [5] button (stronger) and [6]
button (weaker) on the operation panel.
z This printer uses vacuum to hold paper against holes
in the platen. A warning may sound depending on the
paper position, but this is not abnormal.
z If the buzzer sounds, align the paper with the guide
and try changing the position 1 mm to the left or right.
z The suction time when the media is loaded is approx.
30 seconds. If the media cannot be loaded during
suction, remove and then reinsert the paper. Suction
will be performed again.
3
Press [3] or [4] to select the name of the media type
then press the OK button.
If the same type of media already matches the
loaded media, just press the OK button.
Media Type
HW Coated
An equals (=) mark is displayed to the left of the
option to show the media type that has been
selected, and the printer begins preparing to feed
the cut sheets.
The paper size and angle will be detected, and
printing will be enabled if there are no problems.
Chapter 1
Basic Use
Chapter 2
Using Various Media
Chapter 3
Printing by Objective
Chapter 4
Maintenance
Chapter 5
Using the Printer
in a Network
Environment
Chapter 7
Troubleshooting
Lower the release lever, and close the top cover.
Chapter 6
Operating the
Function Menu
Contents
2- 24
Media Type is displayed.
Index
‹ Printing with Cut Sheets
TOP
The table below lists the possible settings for the cut
sheet type.
Media Name
Plain Paper
Plain Paper(High Quality)
Recycled Coated Paper
Coated Paper
Heavyweight Coated Paper
Extra Heavyweight Coated
Paper
Glossy Photo Paper
Semi-Glossy Photo Paper
Proofing paper
CAD Plain Paper
CAD Tracing Paper
Special 1-5
Media Type Setting
Plain Paper
Plain Paper HQ
Recycled Coated
Coated Paper
HW Coated
Removing a Cut Sheet
Follow the procedure below to remove a cut sheet from the
printer.
1
Hold down the Stop/Eject button for at least 1
second.
Online
Bk
Ex HW Coated
Glossy Photo
Semi-Gl Photo
Proofing paper
CAD Plain Paper
CAD Trace Paper
Special 1-5
2
Cleaning
(3 sec.)
Stop/Eject
(1 sec.)
Online
Press the OK button.
Remove CutSheet?
Press OK/Stop
The cut sheet is ejected at the front.
Important
z If the paper is loaded at an angle, an error will occur. If
this happens, reload the paper from step 1.
z Make sure to set the correct media type. If an incorrect
media type is set, perform the “Selecting the Media
Type”. (→ P.2-17)
z As soon as each sheet prints, remove it from the
output stacker.
Note
z With the default setting, the Media Type is set for Plain
Paper.
z The media size is detected automatically, therefore no
setting for the size is required.
2- 25
Chapter 1
Basic Use
Chapter 2
Using Various Media
Chapter 3
Printing by Objective
Chapter 4
Maintenance
Chapter 5
Using the Printer
in a Network
Environment
Chapter 7
Troubleshooting
Chapter 6
Operating the
Function Menu
Contents
Index
‹ Change the height of the printhead
TOP
Change the height of the printhead
It is possible to achieve the higher print quality by adjusting
the height of the printhead. Follow the procedure below to
operate.
Use the following procedure.
Chapter 1
Basic Use
Changing Printhead Height
1
Press the Online button to display MAIN MENU.
Chapter 2
Using Various Media
Information Power
Data
Change the height of the printhead. (→ P.2-26)
Message
MAIN MENU
Head Cleaning
Cleaning
(3 sec.)
Stop/Eject
(1 sec.)
Set a cut sheet of the type you intend to use.
(→ P.2-10, P.2-22)
Aligning the Printhead. (→ P.4-42)
Printing.
2
After completing the special print job, return the
printhead height to its original setting and re-align the
printhead. (→ P.4-42)
Important
z If the printhead height was changed, make sure to
adjust the print status. If adjustment is not performed,
optimal printing results cannot be obtained.
z When printing on paper-base media (ex: Coated
Paper, Plain Paper) or any type of media that wrinkles
easily, never print with the printhead lower than the
best height for each media. This could damage the
printer.
Note
z Press the Information button to check the current
height of the printhead using Head Heigh, and the
optimum height for the paper type selected.
2- 26
Online
Chapter 3
Printing by Objective
Press [3] (or [4]) to select Chng Head Hght then
press [6].
Information Power
Data
Message
MAIN MENU
Chng Head Hght
Cleaning
(3 sec.)
Stop/Eject
(1 sec.)
Online
Offline
Menu
3
Chapter 4
Maintenance
Press [3] or [4] to select Yes, then press OK button.
Chng Head Hght
=Yes
The carrige moves to the center when you see
Carriage Moving.
Chapter 5
Using the Printer
in a Network
Environment
Chapter 7
Troubleshooting
Chapter 6
Operating the
Function Menu
Contents
Index
‹ Change the height of the printhead
4
Open the top cover when you see Open
UpperCover, then Chng Head Hght is displayed.
TOP
5
Adjust the height of the printhead with the printhead
height adjustment lever.
If printing on CAD standard paper, or CAD tracing
paper set the lever to the down position (a). If
printing any other type of media, set the lever to the
middle (standard) position (b). If the printhead is
misaligned, or if printing on paper that creases
easily, set the printhead higher than the optimum
printhead height for each media type.
Chapter 1
Basic Use
Chapter 2
Using Various Media
Chapter 3
Printing by Objective
Important
z Do not touch any areas other than those indicated.
Your hands could get dirty or this could damage the
printer.
z If the printhead height adjustment lever is dirty, before
continuing with this procedure, wring out a damp cloth
and use it to clean the printhead height adjustment
lever.
b
a
6
Close the top cover.
Chapter 4
Maintenance
Chapter 5
Using the Printer
in a Network
Environment
Chapter 7
Troubleshooting
Chapter 6
Operating the
Function Menu
The carrige returns to the home when you see
Carriage Moving. The printer returns to the print
ready status.
2- 27
Contents
Index
‹ Change the height of the printhead
Aligning the Printhead
After the printhead height has been adjusted, on the printer
operation panel adjust the print mode by selecting
Printhead Adj., and then Standard Adj.. (“Aligning the
Printhead” (→ P.4-42)
Changing Printhead Height Again
After a print job is finished and you want to perform the next
job on a different type of media, repeat the procedure to
adjust the height of the printhead “Changing Printhead
Height” (→ P.2-26), and then reset the printhead height
adjustment lever to the optimum position for the media
type.
Further, if the printhead height was changed, readjust the
printhead using the operation panel.
“Aligning the Printhead” (→ P.4-42)
TOP
Chapter 1
Basic Use
Chapter 2
Using Various Media
Chapter 3
Printing by Objective
Chapter 4
Maintenance
Chapter 5
Using the Printer
in a Network
Environment
Chapter 7
Troubleshooting
Chapter 6
Operating the
Function Menu
Contents
2- 28
Index
‹ Using the Media Take-up Unit
TOP
Using the Media Take-up Unit
If you are using the optional media take-up unit, paper that
has been printed from roll media can be spooled
automatically. This is convenient if you are printing a large
quantity continuously. Refer to the following table for the
paper types that can be used with the media take-up unit.
•
•
•
•
•
•
Paper Types
that Can Be Spooled
Recycled Coated Paper
Coated Paper
Heavyweight Coated Paper
Extra Heavyweight Coated
Paper
Glossy Photo Paper
Semi-Glossy Photo Paper
•
•
•
•
Paper Types
that Cannot Be Spooled
Plain Paper
Plain Paper (High Quality)
CAD Plain Paper
CAD Tracing Paper
• Proofing paper
If you are using the media take-up unit, perform the
following procedure.
Loading the Roll Media (→ P.2-10)
Set the media take-up unit to Enable using the
operation panel (→ P.2-30)
Mount the roll media in the media take-up unit
(→ P.2-30)
Printing
Remove printed paper from the media take-up unit
(→ P.2-36)
Set the media take-up unit to Disable using the
operation panel (→ P.2-39)
2- 29
Chapter 1
Basic Use
Important
z If you are using the media take-up unit, do not tread on
the sensor, or place any object between the sensor
and the paper. This could cause misoperation.
z If you are using the media take-up unit, auto cutting
cannot be performed regardless of the the auto cutter
setting. If Auto Cut is turned ON in the printer driver,
however, auto cutting will be performed, so check that
the auto cutter is turned OFF before printing.
z If you are using cut sheets, the media take-up unit
cannot be used.
z With some print media, the hue of some colors may
change slightly when the ink on the surface of the
media has dried completely. Make sure the ink is dry
before performing the final coloring check or handling
the printed matter.
z If you are printing large quantities of ink onto thin,
weak paper such as thin coated paper, etc., spooling
may not operate correctly in humid environments. In
such cases, improve the operating environment, or
use the ink drying time function to make sure the ink is
dry before the paper is spooled.
Chapter 2
Using Various Media
Chapter 3
Printing by Objective
Chapter 4
Maintenance
Chapter 5
Using the Printer
in a Network
Environment
Chapter 7
Troubleshooting
Chapter 6
Operating the
Function Menu
Contents
Index
‹ Using the Media Take-up Unit
Settings for Using the Media Take-up
Unit
1
Cleaning
(3 sec.)
Stop/Eject
(1 sec.)
1
Set the spool mode switch on the media
take-up unit to Manual.
Press [ ] or [ ] to select Take-up Reel,
and then press [ ].
Press [ ] or [ ] to select Enable, and then
press the OK button.
Take-up Reel
Enable
(=) will be displayed to the left of the set value, and
the media take-up unit will be set.
Chapter 1
Basic Use
Chapter 2
Using Various Media
Chapter 3
Printing by Objective
Online
MAIN MENU
Take-up Reel
3
Attaching Roll Media
Press the Online button to display MAIN
MENU on the printer.
MAIN MENU
Head Cleaning
2
TOP
2
If using the output stacker, remove the two
basket rods at the front, and roll up the stacker
cloth while placing it at the back of the stopper
at the bottom the stand, and then pull the
stacker arm towards you and fold it up.
Make sure that the stacker rods and cloth do not
crush the sensor.
Chapter 4
Maintenance
Chapter 5
Using the Printer
in a Network
Environment
Chapter 7
Troubleshooting
Chapter 6
Operating the
Function Menu
Contents
2- 30
Index
‹ Using the Media Take-up Unit
3
TOP
Mount the 2 inch or 3 inch flange adaptor to the
media take-up flange according to the size of
the tube in the roll media to be spooled.
z Mounting a 2 Inch Tube
Mount flange adaptor L (a) on the left flange
and flange adaptor R (b) on the right flange
such that the corrugations in the holes are
aligned with the flange grooves.
Important
z For both the 2 inch and 3 inch tubes, the flange
adaptor with the spacer is located on the left side, and
the flange adaptor without the spacer is on the right.
Thoroughly check which adapters correspond to the
left and right sides before mounting them.
z If using adhesive media and the flange adaptor is dirty,
wipe the dirt from the flange adaptor using a cloth.
Continuing to use a dirty flange adaptor may cause
defective spooling.
4
Move the slide holder to the left while
pressing the slide holder release lever (a).
g
b
a
c
Chapter 2
Using Various Media
Chapter 3
Printing by Objective
Chapter 4
Maintenance
Chapter 5
Using the Printer
in a Network
Environment
Chapter 7
Troubleshooting
z Mounting a 3 Inch Tube
Mount flange adaptor L (c) on the left flange
and the flange adaptor R (d) on the right flange.
Chapter 1
Basic Use
5
Insert the tube into the spool holder axis.
Chapter 6
Operating the
Function Menu
Contents
d
2- 31
f
e
Index
‹ Using the Media Take-up Unit
Important
z Make sure to use roll media for spooling that is the
same size as the tube installed in the media take-up
unit.
6
TOP
z After firmly pushing in the slide holder, check that the
tube is not loose. If the paper moves left and right, and
there is a height difference between surfaces (h) and
(i), remove and reset the conduits.
7
Insert the slide holder axle into the left side of the
tube, then push on the right side of the slide holder
until you hear a clicking sound, then push the holder
firmly until it locks.
Press the Online button to display MAIN
MENU on the printer display.
MAIN MENU
Head Cleaning
Push the slide holder until the left and right holder
axles (h) are fully seated.
8
9
Online
Press [ ] or [ ] to select Auto Feed, and
then press [ ].
MAIN MENU
Auto Feed
h
Cleaning
(3 sec.)
Stop/Eject
(1 sec.)
↓
Press [ ] or [ ] to select Yes, and then
press the OK button.
Auto Feed
Yes
g
i
Important
z Take care not to catch the slide holder release lever (g)
while you are pushing the slide holder. The holder will
not be completely fixed in place, and may cause
defective spooling.
2- 32
(=) will be displayed to the left of the set value, and
the roll media will be fed to the media take-up unit.
Chapter 1
Basic Use
Chapter 2
Using Various Media
Chapter 3
Printing by Objective
Chapter 4
Maintenance
Chapter 5
Using the Printer
in a Network
Environment
Chapter 7
Troubleshooting
Chapter 6
Operating the
Function Menu
Contents
Index
‹ Using the Media Take-up Unit
10 Hold the center of the roll media leading
edge and align the right edge of the paper
with the spool holder. Keep the roll media
stretched taut and tape the center to the
tube.
TOP
12 Press the Online button. Offline will be
displayed. Next, press the [
slacken the roll media.
] button to
Chapter 1
Basic Use
Chapter 2
Using Various Media
Chapter 3
Printing by Objective
Chapter 4
Maintenance
11 While taking care that the roll media does not
go slack, fix the left and right lead edges of
the roll media using tape.
Chapter 5
Using the Printer
in a Network
Environment
Chapter 7
Troubleshooting
Chapter 6
Operating the
Function Menu
Contents
2- 33
Index
‹ Using the Media Take-up Unit
13 Press down the spool switch on the media take-up
unit, and spool the paper until there is no more
slack.
TOP
14 Press the [
media.
] button to slacken the roll
Chapter 1
Basic Use
Chapter 2
Using Various Media
Chapter 3
Printing by Objective
Chapter 4
Maintenance
Chapter 5
Using the Printer
in a Network
Environment
Chapter 7
Troubleshooting
Important
z Spool the paper until the tube has completed two full
rotations. If the spooled amount is less than two full
rotations, repeat Steps 12 and 13.
Chapter 6
Operating the
Function Menu
Contents
2- 34
Index
‹ Using the Media Take-up Unit
15 Align to the roll media width, and then
assemble the weight roll (a, b, c, d) and the
weight joint (e).
TOP
16 Gently place the weight roll on the slack in
the roll media.
Chapter 1
Basic Use
Assemble the weight rolls as described below.
Colored labels are affixed to the weight rolls.
Chapter 2
Using Various Media
a
a
Compatible Roll
Media Sizes
(24”/610 mm)
(36”/914 mm)
(42”/1,067 mm)
(44”/1,118 mm)
e
Chapter 3
Printing by Objective
b,c,d
Weight Rolls that
Can Be Used
Black (a)
Black (a) + Blue (b)
Black (a) + Red (c)
Black (a) + Yellow (d)
Note
z The weight roll top surface (b, c, d) can be used only
for assembly.
Chapter 4
Maintenance
Important
z Make sure to place the weight roll as described.
Failure to do so may cause defective spooling.
z When mounting the weight roll, take care that you do
not touch the tube and knock the left-right position of
the roll media out of alignment.
17 Press the Online button to display Online on
the printer display.
Online
Bk
Cleaning
(3 sec.)
Stop/Eject
(1 sec.)
Chapter 7
Troubleshooting
Chapter 6
Operating the
Function Menu
Information Power
Data
Message
Chapter 5
Using the Printer
in a Network
Environment
Online
Offline
Menu
Contents
2- 35
Index
‹ Using the Media Take-up Unit
18 Set the spool mode switch on the media
take-up unit to Auto.
TOP
Removing Media that Has Finished Printing
When printing has finished, use the following procedure to
remove paper from the media take-up unit.
1
Press the Online button to display Offline on the
printer display.
Chapter 1
Basic Use
Chapter 2
Using Various Media
Information Power
Data
Message
This completes the media take-up unit preparations.
Perform printing from the computer.
2
Offline
Feed Paper
Cleaning
(3 sec.)
Stop/Eject
(1 sec.)
Online
Press the [6] button to feed the roll media slightly.
To protect the spooled paper, feed out paper longer
than the external circumference of the roll.
Chapter 3
Printing by Objective
Chapter 4
Maintenance
Chapter 5
Using the Printer
in a Network
Environment
Chapter 7
Troubleshooting
Chapter 6
Operating the
Function Menu
Contents
2- 36
Index
‹ Using the Media Take-up Unit
3
Set the spool mode switch on the media take-up unit
to Manual.
TOP
6
Press [3] or [4] to select Force Cutting, then press
[6].
MAIN MENU
Force Cutting
7
4
Remove the weight roll from the roll media.
Chapter 1
Basic Use
↓
Select Yes using the [3] and [4] buttons while holding
the trailing edge of the printed paper, and then press
the OK button.
Force Cutting
Yes
The roll media will be cut.
Important
z If you are cutting roll media, make sure to hold the
trailing edge of the printed paper. If cutting is
performed without holding the paper, the paper may
fall to the floor and the printed surface become dirty.
Chapter 2
Using Various Media
Chapter 3
Printing by Objective
Chapter 4
Maintenance
Chapter 5
Using the Printer
in a Network
Environment
Chapter 7
Troubleshooting
5
Press the Online button to display MAIN MENU on
the printer display.
MAIN MENU
Head Cleaning
2- 37
Cleaning
(3 sec.)
Stop/Eject
(1 sec.)
Online
Chapter 6
Operating the
Function Menu
Contents
Index
‹ Using the Media Take-up Unit
8
Press down the spool switch on the media take-up
unit while holding the trailing end of the printed
paper to spool the printed paper.
TOP
9
Press the slide holder release lever while manually
supporting the printed paper, and move the slide
holder to the left to remove the printed paper.
Chapter 1
Basic Use
Chapter 2
Using Various Media
Chapter 3
Printing by Objective
Chapter 4
Maintenance
Fix the paper using tape as required.
Important
z Take care not to damage the printed surface.
Important
z Mount the tube even if you are not Using the Media
Take-up Unit. Failure to do so may cause misfeeds.
Chapter 5
Using the Printer
in a Network
Environment
Chapter 7
Troubleshooting
Chapter 6
Operating the
Function Menu
Contents
2- 38
Index
‹ Using the Media Take-up Unit
10 If you are using the output stacker, hold up the
stacker arm keeping the left and right sides
horizontal, and then press the arm towards the back
until the arm locks. Next, mount the two front stacker
rods on the front of the rod holder and the backmost
stacker arm.
TOP
Settings to Not Use the Media Take-up
Unit
1
Press the Online button to display MAIN
MENU on the printer display.
MAIN MENU
Head Cleaning
2
Important
z Make sure to attach the stacker rods to the backmost
rod holder and front of the stacker arm. Attaching the
stacker rods to the second rod holder from the back
may cause the ejected paper to miss the output
stacker, causing the printed surface to become dirty.
Use the second rod holder from the back as a
temporary holder for the front of the stacker rod during
maintenance.
Online
Press [ ] or [ ] to select Take-up Reel,
and then press [ ].
MAIN MENU
Take-up Reel
3
Cleaning
(3 sec.)
Stop/Eject
(1 sec.)
↓
Press [ ] or [ ] to select Disable, and
then press the OK button.
Chapter 1
Basic Use
Chapter 2
Using Various Media
Chapter 3
Printing by Objective
Chapter 4
Maintenance
Chapter 5
Using the Printer
in a Network
Environment
Chapter 7
Troubleshooting
Take-up Reel
Disable
(=) will be displayed to the left of the set value, and
the seeder will be set to Disable.
Chapter 6
Operating the
Function Menu
Contents
2- 39
Index
TOP
Chapter 3
Printing by Objective
You can print the items that have been checked.
Chapter 1
Basic Use
Printing from Windows ...............................................................................3-2
Before You Begin .................................................................................................. 3-2
Enlarging and Reducing the Original ..................................................................... 3-6
Printing Photos and Illustrations without Borders (Borderless Printing) .............. 3-13
Rotating the Page 90 Degrees for Printing (Conserve Paper) ............................ 3-23
Printing Several Pages on One Sheet (Page Layout) ......................................... 3-24
Printing Posters (Page Layout) ............................................................................ 3-27
Using Watermarks ............................................................................................... 3-29
Vertical and Horizontal Banner Printing (Long Prints) ........................................ 3-31
Printing without Top and Bottom Margins (Conserve Paper) .............................. 3-39
Custom Print Quality ............................................................................................ 3-40
Fine Adjusting Color for Printing .......................................................................... 3-43
About Size Options .............................................................................................. 3-53
When the Printout Quality Is Not Clean ............................................................... 3-58
Software Provided for Windows .......................................................................... 3-58
Chapter 2
Using Various Media
Chapter 3
Printing by Objective
Chapter 4
Maintenance
Chapter 5
Using the Printer
in a Network
Environment
Chapter 7
Troubleshooting
Chapter 6
Operating the
Function Menu
Contents
3- 1
How to Use the Chapter
Contents Pages
→ Before clicking the Start Print button
Index
‹ Printing from Windows
TOP
Printing from Windows
The printer driver includes various printer functions to
enable printing suited to the application. These functions
are described here.
Before You Begin
This section describes functions for which advanced
knowledge is useful if using this printer driver. Make sure to
read this section before performing printing by objective.
Print Types
Content
Paper Type
Set Values
Print
Matching
Quality
Method
Color
Adjustment
Default
Settings
Best for printing normal
documents, with text, images,
graphics, etc. mixed together.
Plain Paper
Standard
Auto
Default
POP Ad
Best for printing store posters
with bright and forceful eyecatching mixed text and
illustrations.
Heavyweight Coated
Paper
Standard
Saturation
Contrast: +5
Poster
Best for printing posters with
centered photographs.
Proofing paper
Standard
Auto
Contrast: +10
Brightness: +5
Photo (from
Best for printing photos
digital
captured with a digital camera.
camera)
Photo
(from
scanner)
3- 2
„ Basic Settings to Meet Your Needs (Print Type)
To perform optimal printing, it is necessary to set the
color adjustment corresponding to the intended text in
advance. The printer driver includes optimal settings for
frequently-used documents such as posters, POP, digital
cameras, or CAD, etc. Simply select the type of print job
by objective from the list to perform optimal printing.
The following applications are provided for the types of
printing described below.
Best for reproduction of
scanned photographs with
color faithful to the quality of
the original.
Glossy Photo Paper
Standard
Glossy Photo Paper
Standard
Perceptual
Contrast: +10
(Photographic) Brightness: +5
Colorimetric
Default
Chapter 1
Basic Use
Chapter 2
Using Various Media
Chapter 3
Printing by Objective
Chapter 4
Maintenance
Chapter 5
Using the Printer
in a Network
Environment
Chapter 7
Troubleshooting
Chapter 6
Operating the
Function Menu
Contents
Index
‹ Printing from Windows
Print Types
TOP
Content
Best for long banner formats
Long format
(vertical and horizontal) with
(Banner)
mixed illustrations and text.
CAD
Paper Type
Set Values
Print
Matching
Quality
Method
Heavyweight Coated
Paper
Standard
CAD Plain Paper
Standard
Best for plans and design
drawings with fine lines.
Saturation
Saturation
Color
Adjustment
Contrast: +10
Saturation: +5
Chapter 1
Basic Use
Chapter 2
Using Various Media
Default
Chapter 3
Printing by Objective
Note
z For more details about print quality, please refer to
“Custom Print Quality” in “Customizing Print Quality”.
(→ P.3-40)
z For more details about color mode matching and color
adjustments, please refer to “Fine Adjusting Color for
Printing” in “Adjusting Color” (→ P.3-43) see “Color
Matching”. (→ P.3-47)
To make the print settings, first open the Main sheet of
the printer driver, and then in Print Preferences, select
the type of printing that you want to perform.
Chapter 4
Maintenance
Chapter 5
Using the Printer
in a Network
Environment
Chapter 7
Troubleshooting
Note
z The item in the list marked by the red ball contains the
settings that the printer is already set up to execute.
z Use the Add... button to add print objectives, and the
Edit... button to edit print objectives. For details, use
the Help function to select Selecting a Print
Preferences, and Adding a Print Preferences, and then
Editing a Print Preferences.
3- 3
Chapter 6
Operating the
Function Menu
Contents
Index
‹ Printing from Windows
„ Printer Driver Settings at a Glance (Settings Preview)
The current printer driver settings details are displayed in
preview. To change the manuscript size, print orientation
or paper feed method, the settings details are displayed
in preview, so the details can be checked easily.
TOP
The Preview reflects changes in the settings described
below.
Setting Preview Description
The following settings are shown in the Preview image.
A : Borderless Printing, Color Mode, Orientation,
Page Layout, Watermark
Chapter 2
Using Various Media
The Page Size and Media Size are displayed as
numbers. Further, if Enlarged/Reduced Printing or
B
Borderless Printing has been set, the mode and
print ratio will be displayed.
Chapter 3
Printing by Objective
A
B
C
Chapter 1
Basic Use
The following settings are shown in the Preview image.
: Media Source, Borderless Printing, Enlarged/
Reduced Printing, Auto Cut... , Print Centered,
C
No Spaces at Top or Bottom (Conserve Paper),
Rotate Page 90 degrees (Conserve Paper),
Orientation, Rotate 180 degrees, Mirror
Chapter 4
Maintenance
Chapter 5
Using the Printer
in a Network
Environment
Chapter 7
Troubleshooting
Chapter 6
Operating the
Function Menu
Contents
3- 4
Index
‹ Printing from Windows
„ Confirming the Print Image (Print Preview)
Preview also includes a function to display the
manuscript print image without modification. This is
called “Print preview”. If the printer driver has been set to
display the preview before printing, the preview can be
displayed during printing, and print failures can be
forestalled.
To have the Print Preview display, open the Main sheet
of the printer driver and select Open Preview When Print
Job Starts.
TOP
During printing, the PageComposer is displayed. Select
the name of the document to be printed, and check the
image displayed in Preview.
Chapter 1
Basic Use
Chapter 2
Using Various Media
Chapter 3
Printing by Objective
Chapter 4
Maintenance
Chapter 5
Using the Printer
in a Network
Environment
Chapter 7
Troubleshooting
Chapter 6
Operating the
Function Menu
Contents
3- 5
Index
‹ Printing from Windows
Once you have checked that the image layout on the
media is correct, close the Preview screen. Check that
the name of the document to be printed has been
selected using PageComposer, and then perform
printing using the File menu.
TOP
Enlarging and Reducing the Original
The original can be printed at a larger or smaller size.
There are three methods for enlargement and reduction.
z Enlarging or Reducing Printing to Fit the Size of the
Media (→ P.3-7)
z Enlarge/Reduce to Fit Roll Paper Width
(→ P.3-9)
z Selecting the Magnification Rate for Printing
(→ P.3-11)
Note
z Select the document name (print data) displayed using
PageComposer, and then perform editing as required
using the Edit menu. For the edit function, refer to the
PageComposer Help.
Note
z When you need to enlarge TIFF image data or JPEG
images captured with a digital camera, in Adobe
Photoshop or a similar software application set the
resolution setting above 150 dpi to achieve better
printing results.
Chapter 1
Basic Use
Chapter 2
Using Various Media
Chapter 3
Printing by Objective
Chapter 4
Maintenance
Chapter 5
Using the Printer
in a Network
Environment
Chapter 7
Troubleshooting
Chapter 6
Operating the
Function Menu
Contents
3- 6
Index
‹ Printing from Windows
„ Enlarging or Reducing Printing to Fit the Size of the
Media
By setting the size of the media actually loaded for
printing, you can automatically enlarge or reduce the
print automatically to match the size of the loaded media.
TOP
3
Select the size of the original created in the software
application using Page Size.
Chapter 1
Basic Use
Chapter 2
Using Various Media
Chapter 3
Printing by Objective
1
Chapter 4
Maintenance
Open the printer driver dialog box from the Print
dialog box of the application.
Note
z For more details about how to open the printer driver
dialog box, please refer to Chapter 1 “Basic Use” . (→
P.1-1)
2
Select the Page Setup sheet.
4
Select Enlarged/Reduced Printing.
Chapter 5
Using the Printer
in a Network
Environment
Chapter 7
Troubleshooting
Chapter 6
Operating the
Function Menu
Contents
3- 7
Index
‹ Printing from Windows
TOP
7
Note
z If the Enlarged/Reduced Printing checkbox is not
displayed, clear the Borderless Printing checkbox. The
Enlarged/Reduced Printing checkbox will be
displayed.
5
6
Check the output paper size using the settings
preview, and then click the OK button.
Chapter 1
Basic Use
Chapter 2
Using Various Media
Confirm that Fit Media Size is selected under
Enlarged/Reduced Printing.
Chapter 3
Printing by Objective
For Media Size select the size of the media that will
be used for printing.
Chapter 4
Maintenance
Note
z To obtain the correct print results, it is recommended to
check the print preview screen before printing. For the
print preview screen display, refer to “Before You
Begin” in “Confirming the Print Image (Print Preview)”.
(→ P.3-5)
8
Click the Print button in the Print dialog box.
Chapter 5
Using the Printer
in a Network
Environment
Chapter 7
Troubleshooting
Chapter 6
Operating the
Function Menu
The print job starts.
Contents
3- 8
Index
‹ Printing from Windows
„ Enlarge/Reduce to Fit Roll Paper Width
You can enlarge or reduce the entire size of the original
so it fits the width of the roll.
TOP
3
Select the size of the original created in the software
application using Page Size.
Chapter 1
Basic Use
Chapter 2
Using Various Media
Chapter 3
Printing by Objective
1
Open the printer driver dialog box from the Print
dialog box of the application.
Note
z For more details about how to open the printer driver
dialog box, please refer to Chapter 1 “Basic Use” in
“Basic Use”. (→ P.1-1)
2
Chapter 4
Maintenance
4
Select Enlarged/Reduced Printing.
Chapter 5
Using the Printer
in a Network
Environment
Chapter 7
Troubleshooting
Select the Page Setup sheet.
Chapter 6
Operating the
Function Menu
Contents
3- 9
Index
‹ Printing from Windows
Note
z If the Enlarged/Reduced Printing checkbox is not
displayed, clear the Borderless Printing checkbox. The
Enlarged/Reduced Printing checkbox will be
displayed.
5
TOP
Note
z If Fit Roll Paper Width is selected in Enlarged/Reduced
Printing, the following dialog box will be displayed.
Select the roll media width loaded to the printer from
the Roll Media Width list, and then press the OK
button.
Under Enlarged/Reduced Printing select Fit Roll
Paper Width.
Chapter 2
Using Various Media
Chapter 3
Printing by Objective
6
Check the content of the settings Preview, and then
click the OK button.
Note
z To obtain the correct print results, it is recommended to
check the print preview screen before printing. For the
print preview screen display, refer to “Before You
Begin” in “Confirming the Print Image (Print Preview)”.
(→ P.3-5)
7
Click the Print button in the Print dialog box.
The print job starts.
3- 10
Chapter 1
Basic Use
Note
z During printing, check that the width of the roll media
loaded to the printer is the same as the width of the roll
media set using the printer drivers. If the width of the
roll media loaded to the printer and the printer driver
settings are different, printing will pause.
Chapter 4
Maintenance
Chapter 5
Using the Printer
in a Network
Environment
Chapter 7
Troubleshooting
Chapter 6
Operating the
Function Menu
Contents
Index
‹ Printing from Windows
„ Selecting the Magnification Rate for Printing
You can enter the rate of magnification directly if you
need to scale the enlargement or reduction for a desired
effect.
TOP
3
Select the size of the original created in the software
application using Page Size.
Chapter 1
Basic Use
Chapter 2
Using Various Media
Chapter 3
Printing by Objective
1
Open the printer driver dialog box from the Print
dialog box of the application.
Note
z For more details about how to open the printer driver
dialog box, please refer to Chapter 1 “Basic Use” in
“Basic Use”. (→ P.1-1)
2
Select the Page Setup sheet.
Chapter 4
Maintenance
4
Select Enlarged/Reduced Printing.
Chapter 5
Using the Printer
in a Network
Environment
Chapter 7
Troubleshooting
Chapter 6
Operating the
Function Menu
Contents
3- 11
Index
‹ Printing from Windows
Note
z If the Enlarged/Reduced Printing checkbox is not
displayed, clear the Borderless Printing checkbox. The
Enlarged/Reduced Printing checkbox will be
displayed.
5
Under Enlarged/Reduced Printing select Scaling
then specify the desired setting.
TOP
z You can do a setting that is larger than the size of the
media loaded in the printer, but some portions of the
will be cut off and not printed.
z Reduction is done starting from the upper left corner of
the image, but if you select Print Centered on the
Layout sheet, the image will print in the center of the
media.
z If Scaling has been selected, the maximum possible
rate of magnification is displayed to the right of the
magnification entry box.
6
7
Check the content of the settings Preview, and then
click the OK button.
Click the Print button in the Print dialog box.
The print job starts.
Important
z For the print ratio, press the direction arrow buttons to
the right of the entry column, or enter the value directly.
Print ratios can be specified in units of 1%. The range
of possible ratio settings is displayed to the right of the
ratio entry field.
3- 12
Chapter 2
Using Various Media
Chapter 3
Printing by Objective
Select the Media Size setting that you want.
Note
z To obtain the correct print results, it is recommended to
check the print preview screen before printing. For the
print preview screen display, refer to “Before You
Begin” in “Confirming the Print Image (Print Preview)”.
(→ P.3-5)
8
Chapter 1
Basic Use
Chapter 4
Maintenance
Chapter 5
Using the Printer
in a Network
Environment
Chapter 7
Troubleshooting
Chapter 6
Operating the
Function Menu
Contents
Index
‹ Printing from Windows
Printing Photos and Illustrations without Borders
(Borderless Printing)
Normally a printed document has white space around its
edges (margins), but a borderless print for a photograph or
created image has no white space at its borders; its entire
surface is covered by printing.
„ Settings Required for Borderless Printing
Before printing, check that the paper corresponding to
borderless printing has been loaded to the printer.
Borderless printing is possible with this printer only if roll
media is used in the paper feed.
Here is a list of the types of roll media and their widths
that can be used for borderless printing.
Paper Type
Important
z Paper of types and roll widths other than those listed
above cannot be used for borderless printing.
z If, after cutting, the trimming paper, pre-cut paper, etc.,
remains in the ejection guide or the output stacker,
remove the paper manually.
Chapter 1
Basic Use
Chapter 2
Using Various Media
Chapter 3
Printing by Objective
Chapter 4
Maintenance
Corresponding Roll Width
10-in. Roll (254.0mm)
14-in. Roll (355.6mm)
16-in. Roll (406.4mm)
Glossy Photo Paper,
Semi-Glossy Photo
Paper, Heavyweight
Coated Paper, Extra
Heavyweight Coated
Paper, Special 1 to 5
TOP
JIS B2/B3 Roll (515.0 mm)
Chapter 5
Using the Printer
in a Network
Environment
Chapter 7
Troubleshooting
ISO A1/A2 Roll (594.0 mm)
24-in. Roll (609.6mm)
ISO A0/A1 Roll (841.0mm)
Chapter 6
Operating the
Function Menu
36-in. Roll (914.4mm)
JIS B0/B1 Roll (1,030.0mm)
42-in. Roll (1,066.8mm)
3- 13
Contents
Index
‹ Printing from Windows
„ Basic Procedure for Borderless Printing
This section introduces the basic procedure for
borderless printing by using media of the same size as
the original.
1
Create the original in the software application so it
matches the size of the media used for printing.
Important
z The following page sizes can be set for borderless
printing. When creating a document, refer to the
following table and create a document with a size for
which borderless printing can be performed.
z If the media size was pre-selected in the software
application, the selected size must support Borderless
Printing.
„Borderless
printing on media
the same size as
the original
document
ISO A0, ISO A1, ISO A2, JIS B0,
JIS B1, JIS B2, JIS B3, ARCH E
(width 36”), ARCH E1, ARCH D
(width 24”), ARCH C, Full Size
(20”x24”), 14”x17”, 10”x12”,
14”x21”, 8”x10”, US Photo
(16”x20”), Poster (42”x60”)
„Borderless
printing with
All page sizes
enlargement and
reduction
z The Borderless Printing Method that can be selected
on this printer is limited by document size. If a
document size other than those described above is
selected, Borderless Printing Method will be set
automatically in Scale to fit Roll Paper Width.
3- 14
TOP
z For more details about Scale to fit Roll Paper Width
and Print Image with Actual Size, refer to “More About
Borderless Printing Methods”. (→ P.3-17)
Note
z Make sure the image created for borderless printing
covers the entire original page.
z If using an application for which margins can be set,
such as MSWord, etc., set the margins to 0 mm. For
the settings methods, refer to the software application
user guide.
2
Open the printer driver dialog box from the Print
dialog box of the application.
Note
z For more details about how to open the printer driver
dialog box, please refer to “Basic Use” in Chapter 1
“Basic Use”. (→ P.1-1)
Chapter 1
Basic Use
Chapter 2
Using Various Media
Chapter 3
Printing by Objective
Chapter 4
Maintenance
Chapter 5
Using the Printer
in a Network
Environment
Chapter 7
Troubleshooting
Chapter 6
Operating the
Function Menu
Contents
Index
‹ Printing from Windows
3
TOP
Display the Main sheet and do the settings for borderless printing.
Chapter 1
Basic Use
Chapter 2
Using Various Media
1 Select the paper type corresponding to borderless printing.
Chapter 3
Printing by Objective
2 Select the Open Preview When Print Job Starts checkbox to
check the print image in the preview screen before printing.
4
Display the Page Setup sheet and do the settings for borderless printing.
1 Select the size of the original created in the software application
using Page Size.
2 Select the Borderless Printing checkbox.
* Select a document size for which borderless printing is possible
to set Borderless Printing Method in Scale to fit the Page
Size.
3 Check that the Media Source is the same size as the roll media,
or that the document size is the same as the roll media width.
* The settings details will be supplied in the settings preview.
3- 15
Chapter 4
Maintenance
Chapter 5
Using the Printer
in a Network
Environment
Chapter 7
Troubleshooting
Chapter 6
Operating the
Function Menu
Contents
Index
‹ Printing from Windows
TOP
6
Note
z If you change the page size to any other size that
allows borderless printing, the setting for the width of
the roll changes automatically to a roll width that
matches the original width.
z If the settings are changed to a document size for
which borderless printing is not possible, the following
dialog box will be displayed. Specify the roll media
width from the Roll Paper Width list and then click the
OK button. Borderless printing will continue, but it will
be enlarged or reduced as necessary to fit the roll
media width. Printing to the same size as the
document is not possible.
Click the Print button in the Print dialog box.
The print job starts.
Note
z If Borderless Printing Method is set to Scale to fit Roll
Paper Width, the edges of the document will be
enlarged automatically at the top, bottom, left, and
right by 3 mm by the printer driver. Consequently, the
margin created by the printer configuration will be
covered, and borderless printing will be performed.
Parts that protrude beyond the 3 mm area at the edges
will not be printed.
z Use Scale to fit Roll Paper Width in the Borderless
Printing Method to enlarge or reduce the size of the
document for borderless printing.
Chapter 1
Basic Use
Chapter 2
Using Various Media
Chapter 3
Printing by Objective
Chapter 4
Maintenance
Chapter 5
Using the Printer
in a Network
Environment
5
Chapter 7
Troubleshooting
Check the content of the settings Preview, and then
click the OK button.
Note
z To obtain the correct print results, it is recommended to
check the print preview screen before printing. For the
print preview screen display, refer to “Confirming the
Print Image (Print Preview)” in “Before You Begin”.
(→ P.3-2)
3- 16
Chapter 6
Operating the
Function Menu
Contents
Index
‹ Printing from Windows
z If performing borderless printing to images for which
there are blanks at the top and bottom of the print data,
combine printing with the No spaces at Top or Bottom
(conserve paper) function in the Layout sheet for
simpler borderless printing than borderless printing
with no margins at top, bottom, left, or right. For
details, refer to “Printing without Top and Bottom
Margins (Conserve Paper)”. (→ P.3-39)
TOP
„ More About Borderless Printing Methods
There are two ways to create a document for borderless
printing in addition to the methods described above
(Scale to fit the Page Size).
<To do borderless document printing with a size not
allowed for borderless printing>
z Enlarge/Reduce to Fit Roll Paper Width
You can enlarge or reduce the size of the original so it
fits the width of the roll. The roll media width can be
enlarged or reduced for borderless printing of
document sizes that are not compatible with borderless
printing (A4, A3, irregular sizes, etc).
Chapter 1
Basic Use
Chapter 2
Using Various Media
Chapter 3
Printing by Objective
Chapter 4
Maintenance
Chapter 5
Using the Printer
in a Network
Environment
Chapter 7
Troubleshooting
Chapter 6
Operating the
Function Menu
Contents
3- 17
Index
‹ Printing from Windows
1
2
TOP
Create the original in the software application so it matches the size of the media used for printing.
Open the printer driver dialog box from the Print dialog box of the application.
Note
z For more details about how to open the printer driver dialog box, please refer to “Basic Use” in Chapter 1 “Basic Use”.
(→ P.1-1)
3
Display the Main sheet and do the settings for borderless printing.
Chapter 1
Basic Use
Chapter 2
Using Various Media
Chapter 3
Printing by Objective
Chapter 4
Maintenance
1 Select the paper type corresponding to borderless printing.
Chapter 5
Using the Printer
in a Network
Environment
2 Select the Open Preview When Print Job Starts checkbox to
check the print image in the preview screen before printing.
Chapter 7
Troubleshooting
Chapter 6
Operating the
Function Menu
Contents
3- 18
Index
‹ Printing from Windows
4
TOP
Display the Page Setup sheet and do the settings for borderless printing.
1 Select the size of the original created in the software application
using Page Size.
Chapter 1
Basic Use
2 Select the Borderless Printing checkbox.
* In this example, A4 and document sizes that are not compatible with
borderless printing have been selected.
* Set Borderless Printing Method in Scale to fit Roll Paper Width.
3 To change the roll media width setting, select using the Roll
Paper Width list.
* The settings details will be supplied in the settings preview.
Note
z Select a document size compatible with borderless printing, and select the Borderless Printing checkbox. The following
dialog box will be displayed. Select the width of the roll media loaded to the printer, and then press the OK button. Set
Borderless Printing Method in Scale to fit Roll Paper Width.
Chapter 2
Using Various Media
Chapter 3
Printing by Objective
Chapter 4
Maintenance
Chapter 5
Using the Printer
in a Network
Environment
Chapter 7
Troubleshooting
Chapter 6
Operating the
Function Menu
3- 19
z If performing borderless printing to images for which there are blanks at the top and bottom of the print data, combine
printing with the No spaces at Top or Bottom (conserve paper) function in the Layout sheet for simpler borderless
printing than borderless printing with no margins at top, bottom, left, or right. For details, refer to “Printing without Top
and Bottom Margins (Conserve Paper)”. (→ P.3-39)
Contents
Index
‹ Printing from Windows
5
Check the content of the settings Preview, and then
click the OK button.
Note
z To obtain the correct print results, it is recommended to
check the print preview screen before printing. For the
print preview screen display, refer to “Confirming the
Print Image (Print Preview)” in “Before You Begin”.
(→ P.3-5)
6
TOP
<To print a high-precision image with borderless
printing>
z Print Image with Actual Size
Create a document with the top, bottom, left, and right
borders and image protrusion enlarged by 3 mm, and
then perform borderless printing on paper the same
size as the manuscript. Use this method to avoid
reduced image quality due to enlargement or
reduction.
Chapter 1
Basic Use
Chapter 2
Using Various Media
Chapter 3
Printing by Objective
Click the Print button in the Print dialog box.
The print job starts.
Note
z After the print data has been enlarged automatically to
fit the roll media width, Scale to fit Roll Paper Width
printer driver will enlarge automatically by 3 mm the
top, bottom, right, and left edges of the document.
Consequently, the margin created by the printer
configuration will be covered, and borderless printing
will be performed. Parts that protrude beyond the 3
mm area at the edges will not be printed.
Chapter 4
Maintenance
Note
z If printing having set Borderless Printing Method in
either Scale to fit the Page Size or Scale to fit Roll
Paper Width, depending on the printer driver,
protrusion will be automatically enlarged, causing a
slight reduction of image quality. If Print Image with
Actual Size is selected in Borderless Printing Method,
borderless printing can be performed while retaining
the original highly-accurate quality. Select to prioritize
accuracy ant quality of fine lines, photos, etc.
Chapter 5
Using the Printer
in a Network
Environment
Chapter 7
Troubleshooting
Chapter 6
Operating the
Function Menu
Contents
3- 20
Index
‹ Printing from Windows
1
TOP
In the software application create an image with borders (top, bottom, right, left) 3 mm larger than the original
document.
Note
z Example: If the media size is JIS B2 (515 x 728 mm), set the dimensions for the original as 521 x 734 mm.
z If you are using MS-Word or another Microsoft application, before you create the original select Page Setup... from the
File menu and select the Page Size and Orientation.
2
Open the printer driver dialog box from the Print dialog box of the application.
Note
z For more details about how to open the printer driver dialog box, please refer to “Basic Use” in Chapter 1 “Basic Use”.
(→ P.1-1)
3
Chapter 1
Basic Use
Chapter 2
Using Various Media
Chapter 3
Printing by Objective
Chapter 4
Maintenance
Display the Main sheet and do the settings for borderless printing.
Chapter 5
Using the Printer
in a Network
Environment
Chapter 7
Troubleshooting
1 Select the paper type corresponding to borderless printing.
Chapter 6
Operating the
Function Menu
2 Select the Open Preview when Print Job Starts checkbox to
check the print image in the preview screen before printing.
Contents
3- 21
Index
‹ Printing from Windows
4
TOP
Display the Page Setup sheet and do the settings for borderless printing.
Chapter 1
Basic Use
1 Select the size of the original created in the software application
using Page Size.
2 Select the Borderless Printing checkbox.
3 Select Print Image with Actual Size using Borderless Printing
Method.
4 Check that the Media Source is the same size as the roll media,
or that the document size is the same as the roll media width.
5
* The settings details will be supplied in the settings preview.
Check the content of the settings Preview, and then click the OK button.
Note
z To obtain the correct print results, it is recommended to check the print preview screen before printing. For the print
preview screen display, refer to “Confirming the Print Image (Print Preview)” in “Before You Begin”. (→ P.3-5)
6
Click the Print button in the Print dialog box.
The print job starts.
Chapter 2
Using Various Media
Chapter 3
Printing by Objective
Chapter 4
Maintenance
Chapter 5
Using the Printer
in a Network
Environment
Chapter 7
Troubleshooting
Chapter 6
Operating the
Function Menu
Contents
3- 22
Index
‹ Printing from Windows
Rotating the Page 90 Degrees for Printing (Conserve
Paper)
If the page to be printed has been fits the roll media width, a
page created vertically can be rotated 90 degrees and
printed horizontally. By rotating the vertical page, paper can
be conserved.
If this setting has been set in the printer driver, when the
page is rotated, the page will be rotated and printed
automatically if the roll media width is suitable. If the roll
media width is not suitable, the page will not be rotated.
TOP
1
Open the printer driver dialog box from the Print
dialog box of the application.
Note
z For more details about how to open the printer driver
dialog box, please refer to “Basic Use” in Chapter 1
“Basic Use”. (→ P.1-1)
2
3
Select the Page Setup sheet.
For Page Size on the Page Setup sheet select the
size of the original created in the software
application.
Chapter 1
Basic Use
Chapter 2
Using Various Media
Chapter 3
Printing by Objective
Chapter 4
Maintenance
Chapter 5
Using the Printer
in a Network
Environment
Important
z Confirm that the Roll Paper Width setting is correct for
the media loaded in the printer.
z If the selection for the Media Source is not Roll Paper,
or if Borderless Printing is selected, this function
cannot be used.
Chapter 7
Troubleshooting
Chapter 6
Operating the
Function Menu
Contents
3- 23
Index
‹ Printing from Windows
4
Select Rotate Page 90 Degrees.
TOP
Further, advanced settings can also be made by entering
the line boundaries and page distribution for the print
sheets using the Page Layout Printing dialog box.
Chapter 1
Basic Use
Chapter 2
Using Various Media
Chapter 3
Printing by Objective
5
Check the content of the settings Preview, and then
click the OK button.
Note
z To obtain the correct print results, it is recommended to
check the print preview screen before printing. For the
print preview screen display, refer to “Confirming the
Print Image (Print Preview)” in “Before You Begin”.
(→ P.3-5)
6
Click the Print button in the Print dialog box.
Important
z This function is not supported with Windows NT 4.0.
1
Open the printer driver dialog box from the Print
dialog box of the application.
Note
z For more details about how to open the printer driver
dialog box, please refer to “Basic Use” in Chapter 1
“Basic Use”. (→ P.1-1)
Chapter 4
Maintenance
Chapter 5
Using the Printer
in a Network
Environment
Chapter 7
Troubleshooting
Chapter 6
Operating the
Function Menu
The print job starts.
3- 24
Printing Several Pages on One Sheet (Page Layout)
You can reduce the size of the image and print 2 to 16
pages on one sheet. For example, if printing multiple-page
documents two pages at a time, half the paper is sufficient.
Contents
Index
‹ Printing from Windows
2
Select the Layout sheet.
TOP
4
From the Page Layout list, select the page layout
that you want to print.
Chapter 1
Basic Use
Chapter 2
Using Various Media
Chapter 3
Printing by Objective
Chapter 4
Maintenance
3
Select Page Layout.
5
If you want to change the arrangement of the pages
on the sheet or specify each page to print with a
border line, click the Set... button to open the Page
Layout Printing dialog box.
Chapter 5
Using the Printer
in a Network
Environment
Chapter 7
Troubleshooting
Chapter 6
Operating the
Function Menu
Contents
3- 25
The Preview shows you want the printed page will
look like with the number of pages selected for one
sheet, then click the Set... button in the lower right
corner of the Page Layout group.
Index
‹ Printing from Windows
6
To change the arrangement of the pages on the
sheet, select the page order from the Page Order
list.
TOP
9
Check the content of the settings Preview, and then
click the OK button.
Note
z To obtain the correct print results, it is recommended to
check the print preview screen before printing. For the
print preview screen display, refer to “Confirming the
Print Image (Print Preview)” in “Before You Begin”.
(→ P.3-5)
7
If you want each page on the sheet to print with a
border line, from the Page Border list click the type
of border.
10 Click the Print button in the Print dialog box.
Chapter 1
Basic Use
Chapter 2
Using Various Media
Chapter 3
Printing by Objective
The print job starts.
Chapter 4
Maintenance
Chapter 5
Using the Printer
in a Network
Environment
Chapter 7
Troubleshooting
Note
z If you select a border line to print, the image is sized
down by 5% to allow for the border line.
z As soon as you select a border line, you will see this
reflected in the Preview.
z If you select None then the size of the page is not
reduced.
8
3- 26
Click the OK button to close the Page Layout
Printing dialog box.
Chapter 6
Operating the
Function Menu
Contents
Index
‹ Printing from Windows
Printing Posters (Page Layout)
After the image is enlarged and divided into several
sections, you can print the print the sections and paste
them together to assemble one large poster.
TOP
2
Select the Layout sheet.
Chapter 1
Basic Use
Chapter 2
Using Various Media
Chapter 3
Printing by Objective
Chapter 4
Maintenance
Important
z This function is not supported with Windows NT 4.0.
1
Open the printer driver dialog box from the Print
dialog box of the application.
3
Select Page Layout.
Note
z For more details about how to open the printer driver
dialog box, please refer to “Basic Use” in Chapter 1
“Basic Use”. (→ P.1-1)
Chapter 5
Using the Printer
in a Network
Environment
Chapter 7
Troubleshooting
Chapter 6
Operating the
Function Menu
Contents
3- 27
4
Select Poster (2x2) from the Page Layout list.
Index
‹ Printing from Windows
Confirm the appearance of the selected layout in the
Preview.
TOP
6
Click and select either the panel or the appropriate
checkbox to deselect the panel for printing.
Chapter 1
Basic Use
Chapter 2
Using Various Media
Chapter 3
Printing by Objective
5
If you do not want to print any panel
(a section of the divided image), click the Set...
button in the lower right corner of the Page Layout
section to display the Pages to Print dialog box.
Note
z Press the Invert button to select and deselect the
check mark. In the preview print image, an icon will be
displayed for the pages selected to be printed, and for
pages selected not to be printed, the area will be blank
and no icon will be displayed.
7
8
Click the OK button to close the Pages to Print
dialog box.
Check the content of the settings Preview, and then
click the OK button.
Note
z To obtain the correct print results, it is recommended to
check the print preview screen before printing. For the
print preview screen display, refer to “Confirming the
Print Image (Print Preview)” in “Before You Begin”.
(→ P.3-5)
9
3- 28
Chapter 4
Maintenance
Chapter 5
Using the Printer
in a Network
Environment
Chapter 7
Troubleshooting
Chapter 6
Operating the
Function Menu
Contents
Click the Print button in the Print dialog box.
The print job starts.
Index
‹ Printing from Windows
Using Watermarks
Add a mark (Watermarks) to documents that are to be
handled particularly for printing. A range of stamps
(Confidential, copying prohibited, etc.) have been prepared
as standard.
TOP
2
Select the Layout sheet.
Chapter 1
Basic Use
Chapter 2
Using Various Media
Chapter 3
Printing by Objective
Important
z This function is not supported with Windows NT 4.0.
z The Watermark function cannot be used if the print job
is set up with a poster page layout.
1
Open the printer driver dialog box from the Print
dialog box of the application.
Note
z For more details about how to open the printer driver
dialog box, please refer to “Basic Use” in Chapter 1
“Basic Use”. (→ P.1-1)
Chapter 4
Maintenance
3
Select Watermark.
Chapter 5
Using the Printer
in a Network
Environment
Chapter 7
Troubleshooting
Chapter 6
Operating the
Function Menu
Contents
3- 29
Index
‹ Printing from Windows
4
From the Watermark list, select the watermark that
you want to print.
The watermark that you selected will appear in the
Preview on the left.
TOP
5
Check the content of the settings Preview, and then
click the OK button.
Note
z To obtain the correct print results, it is recommended to
check the print preview screen before printing. For the
print preview screen display, refer to “Confirming the
Print Image (Print Preview)” in “Before You Begin”.
(→ P.3-5)
6
Chapter 1
Basic Use
Chapter 2
Using Various Media
Chapter 3
Printing by Objective
Click the Print button in the Print dialog box.
The print job starts.
Chapter 4
Maintenance
Chapter 5
Using the Printer
in a Network
Environment
Note
z The following watermarks can be selected from the
list.
“Confidential”, “Copy”, “Draft”, “In-House Only”, and
“Copying prohibited”
z If the Edit Watermark... button is pressed, the Edit
Watermark dialog box will be displayed. Use this
dialog box to create, save, and edit unique stamps in
addition to the stamps prepared by the printer driver.
For details, refer to Printing Watermarks and then
Creating an Original Watermarks, or to Editing and
Deleting an Original Watermark in Help.
3- 30
Chapter 7
Troubleshooting
Chapter 6
Operating the
Function Menu
Contents
Index
‹ Printing from Windows
Vertical and Horizontal Banner Printing (Long Prints)
TOP
3
„ Matching the Width of the Roll
Once you become familiar with fitting images to the full
width of the roll with your software application, it is very
easy to print vertical and horizontal banners.
Here we will describe as an example how to take a 100
mm x 500 mm original and enlarge to fit a 24 inch roll
(approximately 610 mm wide), and then print it as a
banner (609.6 mm x 3,273.4 mm).
Confirm that the printer name “Océ CS2044” is
displayed.
The sample of the Print dialog box below is from
Microsoft Word.
Chapter 1
Basic Use
Chapter 2
Using Various Media
Chapter 3
Printing by Objective
Note
z This printer can print a sheet up to 15, 250 mm (50 ft.)
long.
Chapter 4
Maintenance
Note
z If the above printer name is not displayed, select “Océ
CS2044” from the Name list.
4
Click the Properties button to open the printer driver
dialog box.
Chapter 5
Using the Printer
in a Network
Environment
Chapter 7
Troubleshooting
Chapter 6
Operating the
Function Menu
1
2
3- 31
Start the software application.
From the File menu select Print... to display the Print
dialog box.
Contents
Index
‹ Printing from Windows
5
TOP
Select the Page Setup sheet.
Chapter 1
Basic Use
Chapter 2
Using Various Media
Chapter 3
Printing by Objective
Chapter 4
Maintenance
6
Click the Size Options... button to open the Media Size Options dialog box.
Chapter 5
Using the Printer
in a Network
Environment
Chapter 7
Troubleshooting
Chapter 6
Operating the
Function Menu
Contents
3- 32
Index
‹ Printing from Windows
7
TOP
Define the size in the Media Size Options dialog box.
1 Displays any Custom Media Size Name.
Chapter 1
Basic Use
Chapter 2
Using Various Media
2 Set the Width and Height in Media Size.
* Here, enter 100 mm in Width, and 500 mm in Height.
Chapter 3
Printing by Objective
3 Finally, press the Add button.
4 Click the OK button to close the Media Size Options dialog box.
Note
z If the details have been saved using the Media Size Options dialog box, the custom media size name and media size
will be added to the Media Size List display. For details of the Media Size Options dialog box, refer to “About Size
Options”. (→ P.3-53)
z The paper size settings can also be set using the Custom Size Settings dialog box, in addition to the method described
above. The Custom Size Settings dialog box can be displayed by selecting custom size in the Page Size window in the
Page Setup sheet.
Chapter 4
Maintenance
Chapter 5
Using the Printer
in a Network
Environment
Chapter 7
Troubleshooting
Chapter 6
Operating the
Function Menu
Contents
3- 33
Index
‹ Printing from Windows
z The custom size temporarily sets the user-defined
paper size between the application software and the
printer driver. Consequently, when the software
application is closed, the media size set using the
Custom Size Settings dialog box will be disabled. To
save the media size setting, it is recommended to save
the media size using the Size Options... dialog box.
z Depending on the application, the custom sizes may
not be displayed. In this case, save the paper size
using the Size Options... dialog box.
8
TOP
<If you are using Microsoft Word...>
a Select the Paper Size sheet, then for the Paper Size
select the size you defined and registered in the Size
Options... dialog box.
Chapter 1
Basic Use
Chapter 2
Using Various Media
Chapter 3
Printing by Objective
Click the OK button to close the printer driver dialog
box.
9 Click the Close button to close the Print dialog box.
10 In the software application select Page Setup... from
the File menu to open the Page Setup... dialog box.
b Select Landscape for the Orientation, and then click
the OK button to close the Page Setup dialog box.
Note
z This sets the Orientation to Landscape for the banner.
Chapter 4
Maintenance
Chapter 5
Using the Printer
in a Network
Environment
Chapter 7
Troubleshooting
Chapter 6
Operating the
Function Menu
Contents
3- 34
Index
‹ Printing from Windows
<If you are using Microsoft Excel...>
a Display the Page sheet, then for the Paper size
select the size you defined and registered in the Size
Options dialog box.
TOP
box.
Note
z Click Zoom... on the View menu to adjust the display to
the size you want.
Chapter 1
Basic Use
Chapter 2
Using Various Media
Chapter 3
Printing by Objective
Chapter 4
Maintenance
b Select Landscape for the Orientation, and then click
the OK button to close the Page Setup dialog box.
Note
z This sets the Orientation to Landscape for the banner.
<If you are using Microsoft PowerPoint...>
a Select the Custom in Slide sized for, and then set
the Width and Height. Here, enter 100 mm in Width,
and 500 mm in Height.
Chapter 5
Using the Printer
in a Network
Environment
Chapter 7
Troubleshooting
Chapter 6
Operating the
Function Menu
Contents
c Click the OK button to close the Page Setup dialog
3- 35
Index
‹ Printing from Windows
b Click the OK button to close the Page Setup dialog
box.
Note
z Also when printing the original from PowerPoint if you
select Scale to fit paper in the Print dialog box the
driver will size the page to fit the media loaded in the
printer.
TOP
11 Create the original in the software application.
Note
z The following document example uses Microsoft Word.
On the Menu bar, select Insert, then Picture, and then
Word Art..., and then select the desired style and enter
the text.
z For more details about how to create the original,
please refer to the operating instructions for each
software application.
Chapter 1
Basic Use
Chapter 2
Using Various Media
Chapter 3
Printing by Objective
Chapter 4
Maintenance
Chapter 5
Using the Printer
in a Network
Environment
12 After the original is created, from the File menu
select Print... to open the Print dialog box.
13 Click the Properties button to open the printer driver
Chapter 7
Troubleshooting
Chapter 6
Operating the
Function Menu
dialog box.
Contents
3- 36
Index
‹ Printing from Windows
TOP
14 Select the Main sheet and do the settings for a long print.
Chapter 1
Basic Use
1 From the Print Preferences list, select Long Format (Banner).
Chapter 2
Using Various Media
2 From the Media Type list, select the paper type.
Chapter 3
Printing by Objective
Chapter 4
Maintenance
15 Select the Page Setup sheet and do the settings for a long print.
1 From the Page Size list, select the name of the paper
saved in the customized settings.
2 Select the Enlarged/Reduced Printing checkbox, and
then select Fit Roll Paper Width.
Chapter 5
Using the Printer
in a Network
Environment
Chapter 7
Troubleshooting
Chapter 6
Operating the
Function Menu
Contents
3 Select Roll Paper in Media Source, and select 24-in Roll
(609.6mm) in Roll Paper Width.
3- 37
Index
‹ Printing from Windows
z If the Enlarged/Reduced Printing checkbox is not
displayed, clear the Borderless Printing checkbox. The
Enlarged/Reduced Printing checkbox will be
displayed.
z If the Fit Roll Paper Width checkbox is selected in
Enlarged/Reduced Printing, the following dialog box
will be displayed. Select the width of the roll media
loaded to the printer, and then press the OK button.
16 Check the content of the settings preview, and then
click the OK button.
Note
z To obtain the correct print results, it is recommended to
check the print preview screen before printing. For the
print preview screen display, refer to “Confirming the
Print Image (Print Preview)” in “Before You Begin”.
(→ P.3-5)
TOP
17 Click the Print button in the Print dialog box.
The print job starts.
Note
z If printing cannot be performed correctly using any of
the following OS: Windows Server 2003, Windows XP,
Windows 2000, Windows Me, or Windows 98, press
the Special Settings... button in the Layout sheet. The
Special Settings dialog box will be displayed. Click the
FineZoom Settings list, and then select Yes to enable
printing.
z If you cannot do the print job with Windows NT 4.0,
you may be able to enable printing by selecting
Standard or Draft under Print Quality on the Main
sheet.
Chapter 1
Basic Use
Chapter 2
Using Various Media
Chapter 3
Printing by Objective
Chapter 4
Maintenance
Chapter 5
Using the Printer
in a Network
Environment
Chapter 7
Troubleshooting
Chapter 6
Operating the
Function Menu
Contents
3- 38
Index
‹ Printing from Windows
Printing without Top and Bottom Margins (Conserve Paper)
If there are blank areas at the top and bottom of the print
data, delete the blank areas before printing. Paper will not
feed for the blank areas, to conserve paper. This function
can be used only if “Roll Media” is selected as the paper
feed.
TOP
1
Open the printer driver dialog box from the Print
dialog box of the application.
Note
z For more details about how to open the printer driver
dialog box, please refer to “Basic Use” in Chapter 1
“Basic Use”. (→ P.1-1)
2
Select the Layout sheet.
Chapter 1
Basic Use
Chapter 2
Using Various Media
Chapter 3
Printing by Objective
Chapter 4
Maintenance
Note
z You use this method during borderless printing as
shown in the illustration below.
Chapter 5
Using the Printer
in a Network
Environment
Chapter 7
Troubleshooting
Chapter 6
Operating the
Function Menu
3- 39
Important
z This function cannot be used when Cut Sheet is
selected as the Media Source.
z With this feature cannot be selected with Poster (2 x 2)
set for the page layout.
Contents
Index
‹ Printing from Windows
3
Select No Spaces at Top or Bottom (Conserve
Paper).
TOP
Custom Print Quality
„ Customizing Print Quality
To set the print quality and print sit combinations, select
Custom Settings in Print Quality to set the print quality
and resolution according to the application, using the
Custom Settings dialog box. For example, if printing
mixed data such as text, photos, and graphics, etc., the
character resolution can be raised, and the photo and
graphics resolution can be lowered for printing.
1
4
Check the content of the settings preview, and then
click the OK button.
Note
z To obtain the correct print results, it is recommended to
check the print preview screen before printing. For the
print preview screen display, refer to “Confirming the
Print Image (Print Preview)” in “Before You Begin”.
(→ P.3-5)
5
Note
z For more details about how to open the printer driver
dialog box, please refer to “Basic Use” in Chapter 1
“Basic Use”. (→ P.1-1)
Chapter 2
Using Various Media
Chapter 3
Printing by Objective
Chapter 4
Maintenance
Chapter 5
Using the Printer
in a Network
Environment
Chapter 7
Troubleshooting
Chapter 6
Operating the
Function Menu
Click the Print button in the Print dialog box.
The print job starts.
3- 40
Open the printer driver dialog box from the Print
dialog box of the application.
Chapter 1
Basic Use
Contents
Index
‹ Printing from Windows
2
Confirm that the Main sheet is displayed.
TOP
3
From the Print Quality list, select Custom Settings.
Chapter 1
Basic Use
Chapter 2
Using Various Media
Chapter 3
Printing by Objective
Chapter 4
Maintenance
4
A Settings... button appears in the lower left corner
of the Print Quality group.
Click the Setting... button in the Print Quality group
to open the Custom Settings dialog box.
Chapter 5
Using the Printer
in a Network
Environment
Chapter 7
Troubleshooting
Chapter 6
Operating the
Function Menu
Contents
3- 41
Index
‹ Printing from Windows
5
From the Print Quality list, select the quality settings.
TOP
6
Confirm the resolution.
Chapter 1
Basic Use
Chapter 2
Using Various Media
Note
z The print quality settings that you can select for the
custom settings are described below.
Print Quality
Highest
High
Standard
Draft
Content
Prioritizes attaining the highest image
quality for printing.
Prioritizes attaining high image quality for
printing.
Attains a stable image at an average
printing speed.
Prioritizes high printing speed but you
should check layout and other aspects of
the image after printing.
z If one of the types of media below is selected, Draft
cannot be selected under Print Quality.
Glossy Photo Paper, Semi-Glossy Photo Paper
Important
z As described below, the resolution will be set
automatically according to the printer quality selected.
To change the resolution, change the print quality
settings.
Print Quality Resolution
Highest,
High,
Standard
Fine
(600 dpi)
Standard,
Draft
Quick
(300 dpi)
Content
The higher the resolution,
the slower the print speed.
Optimum print results can
be obtained, but the print
time will be considerable,
and large memory space is
required.
The lower the resolution, the
faster the print speed. The
print time will be reduced,
and the memory required
will be small.
z If the Print Quality is set to Standard, selecting the
following paper using Media Type will set the
Resolution to “Fine (600 dpi)”. In any other paper is
selected, the Resolution will be set to “Quick (300
dpi)”.
CAD Plain Paper, CAD Tracing Paper
3- 42
Chapter 3
Printing by Objective
Chapter 4
Maintenance
Chapter 5
Using the Printer
in a Network
Environment
Chapter 7
Troubleshooting
Chapter 6
Operating the
Function Menu
Contents
Index
‹ Printing from Windows
7
Click the OK button to close the Custom Settings
dialog box.
Note
z If you select Enhance Text with Photos in the Custom
Settings dialog box then when you have text mixed
with photos or graphic data, the resolution of the text
will be raised and the resolution of the photos or
graphics will be lowered.
z Error Diffusion only can be set in Halftones user
settings. The margin of error scatter distributes pixels
randomly and is expressed in halftones. This is ideal
for printing photos and graphics for which detailed
gradation is required.
TOP
Fine Adjusting Color for Printing
„ Adjusting Color
Basically the color settings of the software application
have priority, but if the results of a print job are not want
you want you can also adjust color in the printer driver.
You can also take color photos captured with a scanner
or a digital camera, or any other color image, and print
them in monochrome.
Now will we describe the color adjustments.
1
Open the printer driver dialog box from the Print
dialog box of the application.
Note
z For more details about how to open the printer driver
dialog box, please refer to “Basic Use” in Chapter 1
“Basic Use”. (→ P.1-1)
Chapter 1
Basic Use
Chapter 2
Using Various Media
Chapter 3
Printing by Objective
Chapter 4
Maintenance
Chapter 5
Using the Printer
in a Network
Environment
Chapter 7
Troubleshooting
Chapter 6
Operating the
Function Menu
Contents
3- 43
Index
‹ Printing from Windows
2
TOP
Confirm that the Main sheet is displayed.
Note
z Color Mode presents these following items for
selection.
Color Mode
Color
Prints in color.
Monochrome
Prints in monochrome.
Solid Color
Black Only
3
4
On the Main sheet select Color Mode then Color.
Content
Printing is limited to colors only. Use
to print sharply thinly-colored fine
lines.
All colors other than white are
printed black.
Select Manual Color Settings then click the Color
Settings button.
Chapter 1
Basic Use
Chapter 2
Using Various Media
Chapter 3
Printing by Objective
Chapter 4
Maintenance
Chapter 5
Using the Printer
in a Network
Environment
Chapter 7
Troubleshooting
Chapter 6
Operating the
Function Menu
Contents
3- 44
Index
‹ Printing from Windows
TOP
6
Note
z The Manual Color Settings item is available only when
Color or Monochrome is selected for Color Mode.
The Color Settings dialog box opens.
Select the item that you want to adjust: Image,
Graphics, or Text.
Chapter 1
Basic Use
Chapter 2
Using Various Media
Chapter 3
Printing by Objective
Note
z Note that for this printer driver all the items (Image,
Graphics, Text) are selected as the default settings.
7
5
Click the OK button to close the Object Adjustment
dialog box.
Chapter 4
Maintenance
Chapter 5
Using the Printer
in a Network
Environment
Chapter 7
Troubleshooting
Confirm that the Color Adjustment sheet is
displayed, then click the Object Adjustmen... button.
The Object Adjustment dialog box opens.
Chapter 6
Operating the
Function Menu
Contents
3- 45
Index
‹ Printing from Windows
8
Drag the slide bar for the custom settings to the left
or right to perform adjustment. Alternatively, click the
arrow buttons in the field for entering values, or enter
the value directly, to perform adjustments.
TOP
Note
z Color Adjustment presents the following items for
selection.
Color Adjustment
Content
Cyan
You can calibrate the hues for Cyan,
Magenta
Magenta, Yellow.
Yellow
Adjusts brightness from the darkest
Brightness
to brightest colors so none are lost in
the brightness of the printed image.
Contrast
Adjusts the relative contrast from
brightest to darkest colors.
Saturation
Adjusts the vividness of colors from
dull to extremely vivid.
Gray Tone
Adjustment
Adjusts grayscale from cool colors
(blue tones) to warm colors (red
tones).
Important
z As you change each item, the image of the Preview on
the left changes to reflect the adjustment. The Original
shows the appearance of the initial settings, and the
Preview reflects the current settings.
z Even after the settings have been changed using the
Color Adjustment sheet, if the Manual Color Settings
checkbox is not selected, the Color Adjustment sheet
settings will be disabled. If you do not want to adjust
the colors, uncheck the checkbox.
3- 46
Chapter 1
Basic Use
Chapter 2
Using Various Media
Chapter 3
Printing by Objective
Chapter 4
Maintenance
Chapter 5
Using the Printer
in a Network
Environment
Chapter 7
Troubleshooting
Chapter 6
Operating the
Function Menu
Contents
Index
‹ Printing from Windows
9
Click the OK button to close the Color Settings
dialog box.
TOP
2
Confirm that the Main sheet is displayed.
Chapter 1
Basic Use
„ Color Matching
When you print an image captured with a scanner or a
digital camera, sometimes the appearance of the printout
does not match what you see on the screen.
This is because the colors displayed on-screen and the
printed colors are different. Using the Matching sheet in
the Color Settings dialog box, set the ICC (International
Color Consortium) or ICM (Image Color Management)
color profile to matching mode, enter profile, or printer
profile to more closely match the colors displayed onscreen to the printer colors.
1
Open the printer driver dialog box from the Print
dialog box of the application.
Note
z For more details about how to open the printer driver
dialog box, please refer to “Basic Use” in Chapter 1
“Basic Use”. (→P.1-1)
Chapter 2
Using Various Media
Chapter 3
Printing by Objective
Chapter 4
Maintenance
3
On the Main sheet select Color Mode then Color.
Chapter 5
Using the Printer
in a Network
Environment
Chapter 7
Troubleshooting
Chapter 6
Operating the
Function Menu
Contents
3- 47
Index
‹ Printing from Windows
TOP
Note
z Color Mode presents these following items for
selection.
Color Mode
Color
Monochrome
Solid Color
Black Only
4
Content
Prints in color.
Prints in monochrome.
Printing is limited to colors only. Use to
print sharply thinly-colored fine lines.
All colors other than white are
printed black.
Select Manual Color Settings then click the Color
Settings... button.
Note
z The Manual Color Settings item is available only when
Color or Monochrome is selected for Color Mode.
The Color Settings dialog box opens.
Chapter 1
Basic Use
Chapter 2
Using Various Media
Chapter 3
Printing by Objective
Chapter 4
Maintenance
Chapter 5
Using the Printer
in a Network
Environment
Chapter 7
Troubleshooting
Chapter 6
Operating the
Function Menu
Contents
3- 48
Index
‹ Printing from Windows
5
In the Color Settings dialog box, select the Matching
sheet.
TOP
6
From the Matching Mode list, select the matching
mode.
Chapter 1
Basic Use
Chapter 2
Using Various Media
Chapter 3
Printing by Objective
Chapter 4
Maintenance
Note
z Here is a list of the available matching modes.
Matching Mode
3- 49
Chapter 5
Using the Printer
in a Network
Environment
Chapter 7
Troubleshooting
Content
Driver
Matching
Mode
Calibrates color using the original
color profile of the printer driver.
ICC Matching
Mode
Calibrates the color in the printer
driver using the standards of ICC
color profiles.
Chapter 6
Operating the
Function Menu
Contents
Index
‹ Printing from Windows
Matching Mode
Driver ICM
Mode
Host ICM
Mode
Off
Content
Calibrates color in the printer driver
using the Windows ICM function for
color calibration.
*This mode is displayed only for
Windows Server 2003, Windows XP,
and Windows 2000.
Calibrates color in the printer driver
using the Windows ICM function for
color calibration at the host
computer.
Note: This mode is displayed only
for Windows Server 2003, Windows
XP, and Windows 2000.
Color matching not performed. The
color matching is done in the
software application or performed by
and independent color profile; select
when you want the color matching of
the printer driver is ignored.
TOP
z If Driver ICM Mode and Host ICM Mode are selected,
the following error message will be displayed. To
disable color adjustment settings, click the No button.
If the No button is clicked, Driver ICM Mode and Host
ICM Mode cannot be selected.
Chapter 1
Basic Use
Chapter 2
Using Various Media
7
When ICC Matching Mode is selected for the
Matching Mode, at Image under Input Profile
Settings select a profile from the Input Profile list.
Chapter 3
Printing by Objective
Chapter 4
Maintenance
Chapter 5
Using the Printer
in a Network
Environment
Chapter 7
Troubleshooting
Important
z The mode you select for the Matching Mode affects
what items are available for selection.
Chapter 6
Operating the
Function Menu
Contents
3- 50
Index
‹ Printing from Windows
Note
z If you want to do different settings for Graphics and
Text, then you must cancel the selection of Use the
Same Profile for All Objects.
8
TOP
Note
z Matching Method presents the following items for
selection.
Matching Method
Click Matching Method in the input profiles, and
select a matching method.
Content
Makes the best selections for the
Image, Graphics, and Text items.
Auto
*This item is available only when
Driver Matching Mode is selected.
This mode is ideal for photos.
Perceptual
Results close to the colors displayed
(Photographic) on the monitor, and smooth
gradations, can be obtained.
Colorimetric
The entered data is reproduced
faithfully. To compensate for white, if
white data is output, no color is added.
Colorimetric
(No Wht-Pnt
Corr)
The entered data is reproduced
faithfully. White compensation is
not performed.
Saturation
This mode is ideal for graphics.
Achieves the best results with
priority on color saturation.
Chapter 1
Basic Use
Chapter 2
Using Various Media
Chapter 3
Printing by Objective
Chapter 4
Maintenance
Chapter 5
Using the Printer
in a Network
Environment
Chapter 7
Troubleshooting
Chapter 6
Operating the
Function Menu
Contents
3- 51
Index
‹ Printing from Windows
9
From the Printer Profile Settings list, select a printer
profile.
TOP
Chapter 1
Basic Use
Chapter 2
Using Various Media
Chapter 3
Printing by Objective
Chapter 4
Maintenance
Chapter 5
Using the Printer
in a Network
Environment
Note
z A print profile can be selected only when ICC Matching
Mode is selected under the Matching Mode.
10 Click the OK button to close the Color Settings
dialog box.
Chapter 7
Troubleshooting
Chapter 6
Operating the
Function Menu
Contents
3- 52
Index
‹ Printing from Windows
TOP
About Size Options
„ Creating Custom Sizes
Click the Size Options... in the Page Setup sheet on the printer driver. The Media Size Options dialog box will be
displayed. Use this dialog box to create and save unique customized paper. The customized paper sizes can be selected
from the same list as standard paper sizes.
1
Open the printer driver dialog box from the Print dialog box of the application.
Note
z For more details about how to open the printer driver dialog box, please refer to “Basic Use” in Chapter 1 “Basic Use”.
(→ P.1-1)
Chapter 1
Basic Use
Chapter 2
Using Various Media
Chapter 3
Printing by Objective
Chapter 4
Maintenance
Chapter 5
Using the Printer
in a Network
Environment
Chapter 7
Troubleshooting
Chapter 6
Operating the
Function Menu
Contents
3- 53
Index
‹ Printing from Windows
2
TOP
Select the Page Setup sheet.
Chapter 1
Basic Use
Chapter 2
Using Various Media
Chapter 3
Printing by Objective
Chapter 4
Maintenance
3
Click the Size Options... button to open the Media
Size Options dialog box.
Chapter 5
Using the Printer
in a Network
Environment
Chapter 7
Troubleshooting
Chapter 6
Operating the
Function Menu
Contents
3- 54
Index
‹ Printing from Windows
4
TOP
Define the size in the Media Size Options dialog box.
1 Enter a name for the paper size created in the Custom
Chapter 1
Basic Use
Media Size Name field.
2 Selects size unit.
Chapter 2
Using Various Media
3 Enter the values to be defined in Width and Height in
Media Size.
Chapter 3
Printing by Objective
4 Click the Add button.
Chapter 4
Maintenance
After you click the Add button, the user-defined
media name registered in the Media Size List of the
Medial Size Options dialog box and the media size
are displayed.
Chapter 5
Using the Printer
in a Network
Environment
Chapter 7
Troubleshooting
Chapter 6
Operating the
Function Menu
Contents
3- 55
Index
‹ Printing from Windows
TOP
5
Note
z As soon as you select the name of a media size from
the Media Size List, the Width and Height settings of
the selected size are automatically entered.
z Select the Borderless Printing Size checkbox to
change the width display to the list of roll media lists
compatible with borderless printing. Select the
customized roll width using Width, and enter the
customized Height value.
z To fix the height/width ratio, select the Fix the Ratio of
the Width to Height checkbox. If the Height is changed,
the Width will change automatically according to the
previous height/width ratio. Similarly, if the Width is
changed, the Height will change automatically.
Important
z The Fix the Ratio of the Width to Height is not available
when Borderless Printing Size is selected.
Click the OK button to close the dialog box.
Note
z You can define up to 50 custom sizes for media.
z The settings in the Media Size Options dialog box
remain in effect even after the software application is
closed.
z To delete a registered custom size, from the Media
Size List select the name of the custom size to delete,
then click the Delete button.
z To edit a registered custom size, from the Media Size
List, select the name of the custom size, then change
the Width and Height settings, then click the Add
button.
z The standard sizes (marked with a red dot “
” on the
left), or sizes that you defined with another printer
driver (marked with a white dot “ ” on the left), can
be neither edited nor deleted.
Chapter 1
Basic Use
Chapter 2
Using Various Media
Chapter 3
Printing by Objective
Chapter 4
Maintenance
Chapter 5
Using the Printer
in a Network
Environment
Chapter 7
Troubleshooting
Chapter 6
Operating the
Function Menu
Contents
3- 56
Index
‹ Printing from Windows
„ Selecting a Media Display Series
You can select a size series for Display Series that will
display for the Page Size and Media Size on the Page
Setup sheet in the Media Size Options dialog box.
To select the size series displayed in the Page Size or
Media Size fields in the Page Setup sheet, select the
Display Series checkbox displayed in Media Size
Options. Further, to stop displaying the size system
selected, deselect the Display Series checkboxs.
TOP
Note
z If oversize is selected in Display Series, Oversize will
be displayed in front of the paper name, as described
below. For example, for ISO A4 Paper Size, Oversize
ISO A4 will be displayed.
Chapter 1
Basic Use
Chapter 2
Using Various Media
Chapter 3
Printing by Objective
Chapter 4
Maintenance
z If a paper size to which Oversize has been added to
the paper name is selected, full-size documents and
images can be printed, as described below. If printing
using this function, however, load larger paper than
paper size + margin to the printer. Oversize printing
cannot be performed using larger paper than can be
fed into the printer, paper sizes for borderless printing,
or custom-sized paper.
Original Data
to Print
Original Size
Data
3- 57
Print Results
Size of Media to
Load in the Printer
Original Size
+
Size
of Margins
Original
Size
Chapter 5
Using the Printer
in a Network
Environment
Chapter 7
Troubleshooting
Chapter 6
Operating the
Function Menu
Contents
Index
‹ Printing from Windows
When the Printout Quality Is Not Clean
„ How to Set the Media Type
Paper settings such as ink drying time, etc., can be
made using the panel on the printer. Some of these
settings can be changed using the Media Detailed
Settings dialog box in the printer driver. If clean printing
cannot be performed, make printing adjustment using
this dialog box.
To open the Media Detailed Settings dialog box, in the
printer driver open the Main sheet and then in the lower
right corner of the Media Type group box click the
Settings... button.
For more details about the Media Detailed Settings
dialog box, please refer to the online Help.
TOP
Software Provided for Windows
The following software applications are provided for use
with Windows.
The function of each software application is described
below.
„ Basic Software for Printing
Océ imagePROGRAF Printer Driver 2005
This software is required to print using this printer.
Make sure it is installed on the PC to be used with the
printer. Many functions can be used in addition to the
basic print operations, such as enlargement and
reduction, borderless printing, color adjustment, and
multiple page printing, etc. Can be used with Windows
Server 2003/Windows XP/Windows 2000/Windows
NT 4.0/Windows Me/Windows 98.
The printer driver is on the enclosed Océ CS2044
User Software CD-ROM. (→ Quick Start Guide)
„ Displaying the Printer Status
GARO Status Monitor
This is a utility software for Windows that can display
details of printer errors on the computer screen. Can
be used with Windows Server 2003/Windows XP/
Windows 2000/Windows NT 4.0/Windows Me/
Windows 98.
The software is on the enclosed Océ CS2044 User
Software CD-ROM. Installation is recommended. (→
Quick Start Guide)
Chapter 1
Basic Use
Chapter 2
Using Various Media
Chapter 3
Printing by Objective
Chapter 4
Maintenance
Chapter 5
Using the Printer
in a Network
Environment
Chapter 7
Troubleshooting
Chapter 6
Operating the
Function Menu
Contents
3- 58
Index
‹ Printing from Windows
„ Using the Printer on a Network
LPR Port
If printing using a TCP/IP network from a Windows Me or Windows 98 PC, make sure this software is installed.
The software is installed if dynamic installation in the Setup Menu on the enclosed User Software CD-ROM is used for
the printer on the network.
GARO Device Setup Utility
This Windows software is used to set the printer network information from the computer.
(→ Chapter 5 “Using the Printer in a Network Environment”)
Remote UI
This function displays the printer status using a web browser on a PC on the network, and can set printers and delete
jobs. It is built into the printer network interface.
(→ Chapter 5 “Using the Printer in a Network Environment”)
NetSpot Console
This is server software for Windows Server 2003/Windows XP/Windows 2000/Windows NT 4.0/Windows Me/Windows
98 that displays the printer status using a web browser on a PC on the network, and can set printers and networks. The
NetSpot Console can be downloaded free of charge from the Océ homepage (http://www.oce.com). Install on the
server computer as required.
TOP
Chapter 1
Basic Use
Chapter 2
Using Various Media
Chapter 3
Printing by Objective
Chapter 4
Maintenance
Chapter 5
Using the Printer
in a Network
Environment
Chapter 7
Troubleshooting
Chapter 6
Operating the
Function Menu
Contents
3- 59
Index
‹ Printing from Windows
Device Status Extension
If sharing the printer using Windows XP or Windows 2000 on which IIS has been installed, shared printer information
and print job control can be displayed using a web browser. By installing Device Status Extension on Windows Server
2003/Windows XP/Windows 2000, you can switch from the window displaying the information for the printer
corresponding to the Device Status Extension to the window supplied by Océ. Further, if using NetSpot Console, the
printer settings can be made by starting NetSpot Console from the Device Status Extension window. This software is
on the enclosed Océ CS2044 User Software CD-ROM. For the installation method, refer to the Readme file in the DSE
folder.
„ Creating Posters Easily
PosterArtist
This software can be used to create and print posters easily merely by using the wizard. Posters can be created easily
without effort, using printer driver settings and creating draft posters using this application. Further, borderless and
long-size posters can also be created using simple operations. Posters created using PosterArtist can be printed using
this printer only.
TOP
Chapter 1
Basic Use
Chapter 2
Using Various Media
Chapter 3
Printing by Objective
Chapter 4
Maintenance
Chapter 5
Using the Printer
in a Network
Environment
Chapter 7
Troubleshooting
Chapter 6
Operating the
Function Menu
Contents
3- 60
Index
‹ Printing from Windows
„ Printing Photos Cleanly
Digital Photo Print Pro
This software can perform large-size borderless printing of images taken using a digital camera easily. Images can also
be edited easily if the object photographed is dark due to backlight, or red eye and moire occur, and the color
brightness and contrast can be adjusted. Further, original calendars, image tables, and other character strings can also
be printed easily using the pre-prepared templates. This software is compatible with Windows XP and Windows 2000.
„ Printing Images Created with CAD Systems
Océ imagePROGRAF HDI Driver
The Océ imagePROGRAF HDI driver is a dedicated driver for clearly and accurately printing diagrams created using
AutoCAD, which is CAD software. In normal printing, picture accuracy may be lost if printing using a Windows printer
driver, but if using the Océ imagePROGRAF HDI driver, commands are processed directly and internally between
computer and driver, so excellent print results that assure image quality can be obtained.
(→ HDI Driver Guide)
TOP
Chapter 1
Basic Use
Chapter 2
Using Various Media
Chapter 3
Printing by Objective
Chapter 4
Maintenance
Chapter 5
Using the Printer
in a Network
Environment
Chapter 7
Troubleshooting
Chapter 6
Operating the
Function Menu
Contents
3- 61
Index
‹ Printing from Windows
„ Select the Media Type
Océ imagePROGRAF Media Configuration Tool
Media Configuration Tool is software to save media information if media supported by the printer (i.e., paper type) has
been added. Supplies functions for users who are familiar with media and printing.
Media information such as paper name, paper thickness, head height, absorption fan strength, default margin, etc.,
can be downloaded to the printer, and uploaded from the printer. Also supplies functions that can update the latest
media information easily.
(→ Media Configuration Tool Guide)
TOP
Chapter 1
Basic Use
Chapter 2
Using Various Media
Chapter 3
Printing by Objective
Chapter 4
Maintenance
Chapter 5
Using the Printer
in a Network
Environment
Chapter 7
Troubleshooting
Chapter 6
Operating the
Function Menu
Contents
3- 62
Index
TOP
Chapter 4
Maintenance
You can print the items that have been checked.
Replacing Ink Tanks ......................................................................................4-3
How to Confirm Ink Levels ........................................................................................ 4-3
When to Replace an Ink Tank .................................................................................... 4-4
Ink Tank Handling Precautions .................................................................................. 4-5
Replacing an Ink Tank .............................................................................................. 4-6
Cautions About Using Refilled Ink Tanks for This Printer ................................4-10
Switching Off Ink Level Detection ............................................................................. 4-10
Executing a Print Job .............................................................................................. 4-11
Cleaning the Printer ....................................................................................4-12
Cleaning the Exterior Covers ................................................................................... 4-12
Cleaning Inside the Top Cover ................................................................................ 4-13
Replacing the Maintenance Cartridge ...........................................................4-16
Checking Spacing Remaining in the Maintenance Cartridge ....................................... 4-16
When to Replace the Maintenance Cartridge ............................................................ 4-17
Maintenance Cartridge Handling Precautions ............................................................ 4-18
Maintenance Cartridge Replacement Procedure ....................................................... 4-18
Replacing the Printhead ..............................................................................4-23
Printhead Handling Precautions ............................................................................... 4-23
How to Replace the Printhead ................................................................................. 4-24
Replacing the Cutter Blade ..........................................................................4-29
Replacing Standard Cutter Blades
(Flat Cutters) .......................................................................................................... 4-29
Replacing Optional Cutter Blades (Round Cutters) .................................................... 4-32
4- 1
How to Use the Chapter
Contents Pages
Moving the Printer .......................................................................................4-35
Confirming the Print Condition .....................................................................4-39
Cleaning the Printhead ................................................................................4-41
Types of Printhead Cleaning ................................................................................... 4-41
Printhead Cleaning Procedure ................................................................................. 4-41
Aligning the Printhead .................................................................................4-43
Aligning Printhead Procedure .................................................................................. 4-43
Manual Printhead Adjustment Procedure .................................................................. 4-44
Adjusting the Amount of Media Feed ............................................................4-46
Media Feed Adjustment Procedure ......................................................................... 4-46
Adjusting Media Feed Manually .............................................................................. 4-47
Reducing the Amount of Cutting Dust ...........................................................4-49
→ Before clicking the Start Print button
Chapter 1
Basic Use
Chapter 2
Using Various Media
Chapter 3
Printing by Objective
Chapter 4
Maintenance
Chapter 5
Using the Printer
in a Network
Environment
Chapter 7
Troubleshooting
Chapter 6
Operating the
Function Menu
Contents
Index
‹ Replacing Ink Tanks
TOP
Chapter 1
Basic Use
Replacing Ink Tanks
When the supply of ink in an ink tank runs low, a message
appears on the operation panel display or on the printer
driver screen to tell you that it is time to replace the ink tank.
You can separately replace any of the seven ink tanks as
they run out of ink: Yellow (Y), Magenta (M), Photo Magenta
(PM), Cyan (C), Photo Cyan (PC), and Black (BK).
How to Confirm Ink Levels
You can confirm the ink level at any time by checking the
printer operation panel display. You should always check
the ink levels in the ink tanks and replace any ink tank that
is low before starting a long print job or any other job that
will consume a large amount of ink.
„ Online Status Display
z Yellow Ink
z Magenta Ink
z Photo Magenta Ink
z Cyan Ink
z Photo Cyan Ink
z Photo Black Ink
IJC244Y
IJC244M
IJC244PM
IJC244C
IJC244PC
IJC244BK
Chapter 2
Using Various Media
Chapter 3
Printing by Objective
Chapter 4
Maintenance
Online
K PC C PM M Y
The ink levels are displayed in the bottom line of the
display from left to right in the following order: Black (K),
Photo Cyan (PC), Cyan (C), Photo Magenta (PM),
Magenta (M), Yellow (Y).
Chapter 5
Using the Printer
in a Network
Environment
Chapter 7
Troubleshooting
Chapter 6
Operating the
Function Menu
Contents
4- 2
Index
‹ Replacing Ink Tanks
TOP
„ Information Button Display
Information Power
When to Replace an Ink Tank
You should take the following points into consideration
when installing new ink tanks.
Chapter 1
Basic Use
Ink
Cleaning
You can check the ink level at any time (during a print job
or while an error is displayed) by pressing the
Information button. The ink levels are displayed from left
to right in the following order: Black (K), Photo Cyan
(PC), Cyan (C), Photo Magenta (PM), Magenta (M),
Yellow (Y).
„ How to Read the Ink Level Display
The height of a small graphic n indicates the ink level in
each tank.
100%
80%
60%
40%
(100~90%) (90~70%) (70~50%) (50~30%)
20%
0%
(30~6.9%) (6.9~0%)
Important
z During printing, the right back cover is locked and the
ink tanks cannot be replaced.
z If you pause the printer during printing to replace an
ink tank, image misalignment may occur.
z Never open the right back cover or operate the release
lever while the Initializing message is displayed. This
could damage the printer.
„ When the Check Ink Level is Displayed
The Check Ink Level is displayed on the printer display
when the ink level in a tank becomes low. Although the
printer continues to print, this message is displayed to
inform you that an ink tank is about to run out of ink.
Check the amount of ink remaining in the tanks in the
Status Monitor (Windows) or on the printer operation
panel, and make sure that you have replacement ink
tanks for the colors that are running low.
Note
z When the level of ink in a tank runs low, the printer
may not have sufficient ink to complete Cleaning B or
other maintenance operations that consume a large
amount of ink. If this happens, replace the ink tank
before cleaning the printhead.
„ When the Rep. Ink Tank (Replace Ink Tank) Message Is
Displayed
When the ink in a tank runs out, the Rep. Ink Tank
message is displayed and the printer stops printing.
4- 3
Replace the ink tank as soon as this message appears.
When you open the right back cover, you will see the
amount of ink remaining for each color along with its
notation (Y= Yellow, M= Magenta, PM= Photo Magenta,
Chapter 2
Using Various Media
Chapter 3
Printing by Objective
Chapter 4
Maintenance
Chapter 5
Using the Printer
in a Network
Environment
Chapter 7
Troubleshooting
Chapter 6
Operating the
Function Menu
Contents
Index
‹ Replacing Ink Tanks
C=Cyan, PC= Photo Cyan, Bk= Black). A flashing color
display means the ink tank of that color should be
replaced.
Note
z If ink has run out in more than one ink tank at the same
time, a message is displayed for each color that is out
of ink. Replace the ink tanks for all of the colors
displayed to resume printing.
TOP
Ink Tank Handling Precautions
Follow the precautions below when handling ink tanks.
Caution
z Always store ink tanks in a safe location where they
are out of the reach of small children. If a child licks or
ingests ink accidentally, seek medical assistance
immediately.
Important
z Before installing an ink tank, slowly rotate it from side
to side 7 or 8 times before breaking the seal. If you do
not shake the ink tank, the ink may sediment, causing
reduced printing quality.
z After breaking the seal on an ink tank, avoid dropping
or shaking it. Spilled ink can stain the surrounding
area.
z The ink supply ports of empty ink tanks may be
covered with ink. Always handle ink tanks carefully.
The ink could spill on your clothing and make stains
that cannot be removed.
z It is recommended that ink tanks be fully used within
six months after opening the seal. Using an ink tank for
longer than this could cause the quality of printing to
deteriorate.
z Never leave the printer for long periods of time (one
month or more) with an ink tank removed. The ink
remaining in the printer may clog up the printer and
lead to poor print quality.
4- 4
Chapter 1
Basic Use
Chapter 2
Using Various Media
Chapter 3
Printing by Objective
Chapter 4
Maintenance
Chapter 5
Using the Printer
in a Network
Environment
Chapter 7
Troubleshooting
Chapter 6
Operating the
Function Menu
Contents
Index
‹ Replacing Ink Tanks
TOP
Replacing an Ink Tank
Follow the procedure below to replace an ink tank. You can
follow this same procedure to replace any ink tank.
1
2
Open the back right back cover.
Chapter 1
Basic Use
Look at the printer display and make sure that the
printer is not operating.
You can replace an ink tank while the display shows
any of the following: Online, Offline, Check Ink Level,
or Rep. Ink Tank.
Information Power
Data
Message
Error!
E02818
Rep. Ink Tank
Cleaning
(3 sec.)
Stop/Eject
(1 sec.)
Chapter 2
Using Various Media
The ink level is shown in the display; a flashing color
means that the ink tank of that color must be
replaced.
Chapter 4
Maintenance
Online
Offline
Menu
Ink
Cleaning
(3 sec.)
Stop/Eject
(1 sec.)
Chapter 3
Printing by Objective
Online
Important
z The right back cover cannot be opened while the
printer is initializing immediately after the printer is
turned ON, during printhead cleaning, or during a print
job. Please wait until processing is completed.
Chapter 5
Using the Printer
in a Network
Environment
Chapter 7
Troubleshooting
Chapter 6
Operating the
Function Menu
Contents
4- 5
Index
‹ Replacing Ink Tanks
3
Press the ink tank lever of the color to replace, then
open the ink tank cover.
TOP
Important
z If there is ink remaining in the removed ink tank, store
the ink tank with the ink supply port (a) pointing up. If
you store the tank with the ink supply port (a) facing
down, ink may leak out.
Chapter 1
Basic Use
Chapter 2
Using Various Media
a
4
Hold the empty ink tank by the grips on the left and
right side of the ink tank, then remove it.
Chapter 3
Printing by Objective
5
Gently shake the new ink tank 7 or 8 times while it is
still in the package, then remove it from the package.
Chapter 4
Maintenance
Chapter 5
Using the Printer
in a Network
Environment
Place the ink tank that you removed in a plastic bag
and seal it.
Chapter 7
Troubleshooting
Important
z Always hold an ink tank by its left and right grips (b)
while you are handling it.
b
Chapter 6
Operating the
Function Menu
Contents
4- 6
Index
‹ Replacing Ink Tanks
TOP
z Never touch the ink supply port (a) or the electrical
contacts (c). This could damage the ink tank, cause
poor print quality, or stain the work area.
a
7
Close the ink tank cover until you hear it click.
Chapter 1
Basic Use
c
Chapter 2
Using Various Media
6
Insert the ink tank into the holder with the ink supply
port facing down and the color label facing the rear.
Bk
Bk
8
9
To replace another ink tank color, repeat Step 3 to
7.
When the ink tank has been replaced, press the
center of the right back cover until it locks into place,
and then close the right back cover.
Chapter 3
Printing by Objective
Chapter 4
Maintenance
Chapter 5
Using the Printer
in a Network
Environment
Important
z The ink tanks are shaped so that the cover will not
close if you install the wrong color ink tank. If the ink
tank cover does not close, confirm that the color label
on the holder matches the color of the ink tank.
Chapter 7
Troubleshooting
The printer returns to Online or Offline mode.
Printing restarts if the Rep. Ink Tank message was
displayed in the middle of a print job.
Important
z If an ink tank has not been installed, EXXXX (error
code) will be displayed on the top line of the display,
and No X Ink Tank will be displayed on the bottom line.
Go to Step 2 to correct this problem and make sure
that all the color ink tanks are installed.
4- 7
Chapter 6
Operating the
Function Menu
Contents
Index
‹ Replacing Ink Tanks
z If the right back cover cannot be completely closed,
one of the ink tank covers may not be completely
closed. Check that all the ink tank covers were
completely closed during Step 7.
TOP
Chapter 1
Basic Use
Chapter 2
Using Various Media
Chapter 3
Printing by Objective
Chapter 4
Maintenance
Chapter 5
Using the Printer
in a Network
Environment
Chapter 7
Troubleshooting
Chapter 6
Operating the
Function Menu
Contents
4- 8
Index
‹ Cautions About Using Refilled Ink Tanks for This Printer
TOP
Cautions About Using Refilled Ink Tanks for This Printer
The ink tanks designed for this printer have an ink level
detection function to prevent damage to the printhead when
the ink runs our during printing.
If you use a refilled ink tank, the ink level detection function
will no longer function correctly. The printer will detect ink
out and print operation will halt. Before you can use tanks
like this, you must switch off the ink level detection function.
If you print with the ink level detection switched off, the
printer (especially the printhead) may be damaged or other
problems may arise. Océ, Inc. will assume no responsibility
for damages caused by using ink tanks not designed for
use with the printer.
Caution
z Once the ink level detection function has been
switched off, the ink level detection function cannot be
restored for the ink tanks in the printer. To restore the
ink level display, the ink tanks must be replaced with
new ink tanks designed for use with the printer.
z If the same ink tank is repeatedly removed and
reinserted, this could damage the connection points
between the ink tank and the printer, leading to ink
leakage which could damage the printer.
Switching Off Ink Level Detection
1
2
3
4
Press the Online button to display MAIN MENU.
Press the [3] or [4] button to select System Setup
then press [6].
Press [3] or [4] to select Stop Ink Check, then press
[6].
Press [3] or [4] to select Bk Ink Tank, then press the
OK button.
Note
z Press the Online button to cancel these procedures.
5
Chapter 1
Basic Use
When Stop Function? appears press [3] or [4] to
select Yes, then press OK button.
An equals sign (=) appears as a prefix to the setting
and the remaining ink detection function of the
selected ink tank is switched off.
Chapter 2
Using Various Media
Chapter 3
Printing by Objective
Chapter 4
Maintenance
Chapter 5
Using the Printer
in a Network
Environment
Chapter 7
Troubleshooting
Chapter 6
Operating the
Function Menu
Contents
4- 9
Index
‹ Cautions About Using Refilled Ink Tanks for This Printer
Executing a Print Job
After the ink level detection function is switched off, the Ink
level? message appears on the printer operation panel
display and the printer goes offline every time you execute
a print job from the computer. To continue with the print job,
press the Online button on the printer operation panel.
TOP
Chapter 1
Basic Use
Chapter 2
Using Various Media
Chapter 3
Printing by Objective
Chapter 4
Maintenance
Chapter 5
Using the Printer
in a Network
Environment
Chapter 7
Troubleshooting
Chapter 6
Operating the
Function Menu
Contents
4- 10
Index
‹ Cleaning the Printer
TOP
Cleaning the Printer
Clean the printer periodically to maintain high print quality
and to avoid problems.
Always follow the safety guidelines below when cleaning
the printer.
Caution
z When you clean the printer, always turn the printer off
and unplug the power cord from the power supply. If
the printer is accidentally switched on while you are
cleaning it, moving parts inside the printer may come
into contact with you and cause personal injuries.
z Never use flammable liquids such as thinners,
benzene, alcohol, etc. to clean the printer. If these
liquids come into contact with electrical components
inside the printer, this could cause a fire or electrical
shock.
z When cleaning the printer, never touch the power
supply cable with wet hands. Doing so may cause
electric shock.
Cleaning the Exterior Covers
During normal use the printer surfaces require cleaning at
least once a month.
1
Press and hold down the Power button until you see
Shut Down.. in the printer operation panel display
then release the button.
Message
Shut Down..
Please Wait..
Cleaning
(3 sec.)
Stop/Eject
(1 sec.)
Online
Offline
Menu
2
Disconnect the power cord from the outlet. The
shape of the power cable varies from country to
country.
Chapter 4
Maintenance
Chapter 5
Using the Printer
in a Network
Environment
Chapter 7
Troubleshooting
Caution
z Check that the printer power supply has been turned
OFF, and then disconnect the power supply cable.
Failure to do so may cause personal injury.
4- 11
Chapter 2
Using Various Media
Chapter 3
Printing by Objective
Information Power
Data
Chapter 1
Basic Use
Chapter 6
Operating the
Function Menu
Contents
Index
‹ Cleaning the Printer
3
Dampen a clean cloth, wring it out completely, and
then use it to clean the printer exterior surfaces,
paper feed slot (a), and power cord plug. After
cleaning, make sure that everything is free of dirt
and paper dust, then use a clean, dry cloth to wipe
dry the cleaned surfaces.
a
4
Insert the power plug into the outlet. The shape of
the power cable varies from country to country.
TOP
Cleaning Inside the Top Cover
To get the best results out of your printer, clean the printer
when the printed surface or the back of the paper becomes
dirty, or when you replace the roll media, or approximately
once a month.
Important
z After printing onto paper with lots of paper dust,
borderless printing, or printing onto small-size paper,
the printed surface or the back of the paper may
become dirty, and you will need to thoroughly clean the
platen.
1
Press and hold down the Power button until you see
Shut Down.. in the printer operation panel display
then release the button. Turn OFF the printer.
Information Power
Data
Message
Shut Down..
Please Wait..
Cleaning
(3 sec.)
Stop/Eject
(1 sec.)
Online
Offline
Menu
Chapter 1
Basic Use
Chapter 2
Using Various Media
Chapter 3
Printing by Objective
Chapter 4
Maintenance
Chapter 5
Using the Printer
in a Network
Environment
Chapter 7
Troubleshooting
Chapter 6
Operating the
Function Menu
Contents
4- 12
Index
‹ Cleaning the Printer
2
Disconnect the power cord from the outlet. The
shape of the power cable varies from country to
country.
TOP
4
If paper dust has collected in the suction ports on the
platen (b) or the borderless printing ink groove (c),
use the provided cleaning brush to remove the dust
and dirt from the ports and groove.
b
3
Chapter 1
Basic Use
Chapter 2
Using Various Media
Chapter 3
Printing by Objective
Open the top cover.
c
Note
z If the cleaner brush is dirty, wash it in water.
Chapter 4
Maintenance
Chapter 5
Using the Printer
in a Network
Environment
Chapter 7
Troubleshooting
Important
z Do not touch any areas other than as directed. Doing
so may stain your hands or cause the printer to
malfunction.
Chapter 6
Operating the
Function Menu
Contents
4- 13
Index
‹ Cleaning the Printer
5
TOP
Use a damp cloth (well wrung out) to clean the top
cover handle, top cover roller (d), carriage shaft (e),
entire platen area (f), paperweight (g), borderless
printing ink grooves (c), standard cutter unit (h), and
ejection guide (i).
6
Close the top cover.
Chapter 1
Basic Use
Chapter 2
Using Various Media
d
e f
g
7
i
h
Insert the power plug into the outlet. The shape of
the power cable varies from country to country.
Chapter 3
Printing by Objective
Chapter 4
Maintenance
c
Important
z Never wipe the areas inside the top cover with a dry
cloth. This could create static electricity that attracts
dust and dirt and that can lower print quality.
Chapter 5
Using the Printer
in a Network
Environment
Chapter 7
Troubleshooting
Chapter 6
Operating the
Function Menu
Contents
4- 14
Index
‹ Replacing the Maintenance Cartridge
TOP
Replacing the Maintenance Cartridge
The maintenance cartridge vacuums excess ink that
accumulates as a result of borderless printing, printhead
cleaning, etc. When you see the message prompt that tells
you to replace the maintenance cartridge, replace the
cartridge.
z Maintenance Cartridge
Shaft cleaner (a) is enclosed in the box of maintenance
cartridge.
Checking Spacing Remaining in the Maintenance Cartridge
You can confirm the amount of space remaining in the
maintenance cartridge at any time by checking the printer
operation panel display. Check the amount of space
remaining in the maintenance cartridge before running
Heading Cleaning B, moving the printer, or performing an
operation that that uses a large amount of ink. Replace the
maintenance cartridge as soon as possible if the remaining
space is low.
„ Displaying Using the Information Button
a
Information Power
Ink
Cleaning
You can check the amount of space remaining in the
maintenance cartridge during a print job or when an error
is displayed by pressing the Information button. The
amount of space remaining in the maintenance cartridge
is displayed at the right end of the display.
„ Reading the Maintenance Cartridge Display
The height of the bar represents the amount of space
remaining, which indicates how much more ink the
maintenance cartridge can hold.
~700ml ~600ml ~500ml ~400ml ~300ml ~200ml 200ml~0ml
(7dot) (6dot) (5dot) (4dot) (3dot) (2dot) (1dot)
4- 15
Chapter 1
Basic Use
Chapter 2
Using Various Media
Chapter 3
Printing by Objective
Chapter 4
Maintenance
Chapter 5
Using the Printer
in a Network
Environment
Chapter 7
Troubleshooting
Chapter 6
Operating the
Function Menu
Contents
Index
‹ Replacing the Maintenance Cartridge
When to Replace the Maintenance Cartridge
When the maintenance cartridge becomes full of ink, a
message is displayed in the printer driver and on the printer
display to notify you that the maintenance cartridge needs
to be replaced.
„ When You See the MTCart Full Soon Message
The MTCart Full Soon message is displayed when the
maintenance cartridge is nearly full. Although the printer
continues to operate normally, this message indicates
that the maintenance cartridge will soon be full. Obtain a
new maintenance cartridge.
Online
MTCart Full Soon
Note
z You cannot access the menus for changing ink or
moving the printer while this message is displayed.
First replace the maintenance cartridge.
TOP
„ When You See the Replace MT-Cart. Message
When the maintenance cartridge becomes full, the
Replace MT-Cart. message is displayed, and if printing is
in progress, the current print job is paused. If this
message is displayed, press the Information button to
continue printing. Replace the maintenance cartridge as
soon as printing is finished.
ERROR
Replace MT-Cart.
Chapter 1
Basic Use
Chapter 2
Using Various Media
E02818
Note
z You cannot access the menus for changing ink,
replacing the printhead or moving the printer while this
message is displayed. First replace the maintenance
cartridge.
Chapter 3
Printing by Objective
Chapter 4
Maintenance
Chapter 5
Using the Printer
in a Network
Environment
Chapter 7
Troubleshooting
Chapter 6
Operating the
Function Menu
Contents
4- 16
Index
‹ Replacing the Maintenance Cartridge
Maintenance Cartridge Handling Precautions
Follow the guidelines below when you handle the
maintenance cartridge.
Important
z Do not remove the maintenance cartridge until you are
ready to replace it.
z To avoid ink spills from a maintenance cartridge that is
full of ink, never drop it and always lay it flat (never at
an angle). Spilled ink can stain the surrounding area.
z Ink adheres to the top of the maintenance cartridge
once it has been used. Handle the maintenance
cartridge carefully. Ink may spill on your clothing and
make stains that cannot be removed.
z Once a maintenance cartridge has been installed in
one printer, it cannot be installed in another printer.
TOP
Maintenance Cartridge Replacement Procedure
When you replace the maintenance cartridge, also replace
the shaft cleaner which is included with the maintenance
cartridge. Use the following procedure.
z Replacing the maintenance cartridge (→ P.4-17)
z Replacing the shaft cleaner (→ P.4-20)
Chapter 1
Basic Use
Chapter 2
Using Various Media
„ Replacing the Maintenance Cartridge
1
Look at the printer display and make sure that the
printer is not operating.
Chapter 4
Maintenance
Information Power
Data
Message
ERROR
E02818
Replace MT-Cart.
Cleaning
(3 sec.)
Stop/Eject
(1 sec.)
Chapter 3
Printing by Objective
Online
Offline
Menu
2
Open the maintenance cartridge cover.
Chapter 5
Using the Printer
in a Network
Environment
Chapter 7
Troubleshooting
Chapter 6
Operating the
Function Menu
Contents
4- 17
Index
‹ Replacing the Maintenance Cartridge
3
Holds the grips (a) of the used maintenance
cartridge with one hand and pull out the cartridge,
then grasp the base of the maintenance cartridge
firmly with your other hand and remove the
maintenance cartridge while keeping it level.
TOP
4
While holding the used maintenance cartridge level,
slip it into the plastic bag included with the new
cartridge, press down on the bag to expel excess air,
then close the zipper completely.
Chapter 1
Basic Use
Chapter 2
Using Various Media
a
5
Check that the maintenance cartridge you placed in
the plastic bag is the right way up, then place it in the
packing box and store it flat in a safe location.
Chapter 4
Maintenance
Caution
z Always store used maintenance cartridges in a safe
location out of the reach of children. If a child licks or
ingests ink accidentally, seek medical assistance
immediately.
Important
z Used maintenance cartridges are heavy. Make sure to
grasp the base of the cartridge firmly and keep the
maintenance cartridge horizontal during removal and
storage. If you drop a maintenance cartridge or lay it
down at an angle, this could cause ink to leak and
stain the surrounding area.
z The amount of free space in the maintenance cartridge
is stored within the printer, and so you cannot install a
used maintenance cartridge in another printer.
4- 18
Chapter 3
Printing by Objective
Chapter 5
Using the Printer
in a Network
Environment
Chapter 7
Troubleshooting
Important
z Be sure to store the removed maintenance cartridge in
the packing box and store it on a flat surface. Ink leaks
will stain the surrounding area.
z Before you place the plastic bag into the packing box,
make sure that the zipper is closed completely.
z Dispose of the used maintenance cartridge according
to local laws.
Chapter 6
Operating the
Function Menu
Contents
Index
‹ Replacing the Maintenance Cartridge
6
Place the new maintenance cartridge into the
maintenance cartridge cover and make sure that it is
inserted completely.
TOP
8
Press the Information button.
Chapter 1
Basic Use
The initialization of the new maintenance cartridge
finishes after about 5 seconds, and then the printer
enters the Online mode.
Important
z Never touch the electrical contacts (b). Touching the
electrical contacts on the back of the maintenance
cartridge may damage the cartridge.
b
7
Close the maintenance cartridge cover.
Important
z Do not attempt to remove the maintenance cartridge
within 5 seconds after the printer enters online mode.
Touching the electrical contacts on the back of the
maintenance cartridge may damage the cartridge.
Note
z The maintenance cartridge can also be replaced when
the printer is switched off. In this case, do not attempt
to remove the maintenance cartridge for at least 5
seconds after you switch the printer on again.
Chapter 2
Using Various Media
Chapter 3
Printing by Objective
Chapter 4
Maintenance
Chapter 5
Using the Printer
in a Network
Environment
Chapter 7
Troubleshooting
Chapter 6
Operating the
Function Menu
Contents
4- 19
Index
‹ Replacing the Maintenance Cartridge
TOP
„ Replacing the Shaft Cleaner
1
Press the Online button to display Offline.
Information Power
Data
Offline
Message
2
Feed Paper
Cleaning
(3 sec.)
Stop/Eject
(1 sec.)
Important
z Do not touch any areas other than as directed. Doing
so may stain your hands or cause the printer to
malfunction.
4
Online
Hold down the [3] button for more than 1 second.
Push the front and back levers on the top-right of the
shaft cleaner together while you pull the shaft
cleaner out to the right.
Chapter 1
Basic Use
Chapter 2
Using Various Media
Chapter 3
Printing by Objective
Information Power
Data
Message
Offline
Feed Paper
Cleaning
(3 sec.)
Stop/Eject
(1 sec.)
Online
Offline
Menu
3
The carriage moves to the center and the Open
UpperCover message appears on the printer
display.
Open the top cover.
Chapter 4
Maintenance
Chapter 5
Using the Printer
in a Network
Environment
Chapter 7
Troubleshooting
Chapter 6
Operating the
Function Menu
Contents
4- 20
Index
‹ Replacing the Maintenance Cartridge
5
Install the new shaft cleaner into the carriage by
holding the tab on the new shaft cleaner.
Push in the shaft cleaner until you hear it click.
TOP
Chapter 1
Basic Use
Chapter 2
Using Various Media
Chapter 3
Printing by Objective
Note
z Mount the cap that has just been removed from the
new shaft cleaner to the used shaft cleaner, place the
used shaft cleaner in a small container, and pack with
the used maintenance cartridge for disposal.
6
Close the top cover.
Chapter 4
Maintenance
Chapter 5
Using the Printer
in a Network
Environment
Chapter 7
Troubleshooting
Chapter 6
Operating the
Function Menu
The carriage returns to the home position and the
printer enters Online mode.
4- 21
Contents
Index
‹ Replacing the Printhead
TOP
Replacing the Printhead
Replace the printhead if running Head Cleaning B twice
does not restore acceptable print quality, or if a customer
service center instructs you to replace the printhead. You
can easily stain your hands during printhead replacement,
so wear the plastic gloves provided in the box with the new
printhead.
z Printhead BC-1300
Note
z If the ink level is low, procure a new ink tank for
replacement as soon as possible.
Printhead Handling Precautions
Always follow these precautions when handling the
printhead.
4- 22
Caution
z Always store the printhead in a safe location where it is
out of the reach of small children. If a child licks or
ingests ink accidentally, seek medical assistance
immediately.
z Never touch the printhead immediately after printing
has stopped. The printhead becomes extremely hot
during printing and can cause minor burns.
Important
z Try to avoid dropping or shaking the printhead. Spilled
ink can stain the surrounding area.
z The ink supply port of a removed printhead may be
covered with ink. Always handle the printhead
carefully. The ink could spill on your clothing and make
stains that cannot be removed.
z Never break the seal on the printhead package until
immediately before you install the printhead. Always
handle the printhead carefully after breaking the seal.
If the printhead is stored after the seal has been
broken, the nozzles may dry out and lead to poor print
quality.
z If you need to store a printhead temporarily, place it
with the nozzles (a) and electrical contacts (b) facing
down. Damage to the nozzles or electrical contacts
can lead to poor print quality.
Chapter 1
Basic Use
Chapter 2
Using Various Media
Chapter 3
Printing by Objective
Chapter 4
Maintenance
Chapter 5
Using the Printer
in a Network
Environment
Chapter 7
Troubleshooting
a
b
z Never attempt to disassemble or alter a printhead.
Doing so may damage the printer.
z Never touch the nozzles or the electrical contacts on
the printhead. Doing so may cause printing problems.
Chapter 6
Operating the
Function Menu
Contents
Index
‹ Replacing the Printhead
TOP
How to Replace the Printhead
To replace the printhead, execute Replace P.head on the
Maintenance menu then follow the directions given by the
messages on the printer display. Load a roll or cut sheets of
A3 size or larger paper into the printer for the printhead
adjustment that runs after the printhead is replaced.
Remove printed media and cut sheets from the
printer.
2
Press the Online button to display MAIN MENU.
MAIN MENU
Head Cleaning
3
Execute Replace P.head
Cleaning
(3 sec.)
Stop/Eject
(1 sec.)
Chapter 1
Basic Use
Online
Chapter 2
Using Various Media
Press [3] or [4] to select Maintenance, then press [6].
MAIN MENU
Maintenance
↓
Chapter 3
Printing by Objective
Clean the intake ducts inside the top cover
Remove the printhead, and install the new printhead
Important
z Always follow the prescribed procedure to replace the
printhead. If you do not adhere to the replacement
procedure, the printhead may leak ink that will stain
the printer and the surrounding area.
1
If the printer power is off, press the Power button to
switch the printer on.
Data
Cleaning
(3 sec.)
Stop/Eject
(1 sec.)
Online
Offline
Menu
After a few moments, Online appears in the display.
4- 23
Select Replace P.head then press [6].
Maintenance
Replace P.head
5
↓
Press [3] or [4] to select Yes, then press OK button.
Replace P.head
Yes
The message Please Wait.. is displayed and the
printer begins the printhead replacement operation.
This operation requires about 3 minutes to complete.
Information Power
Message
4
The maintenance functions are displayed.
Open UpperCover is displayed when the printer is
ready.
Chapter 4
Maintenance
Chapter 5
Using the Printer
in a Network
Environment
Chapter 7
Troubleshooting
Chapter 6
Operating the
Function Menu
Contents
Index
‹ Replacing the Printhead
6
TOP
8
Open the top cover.
If the printhead adjustment lever (d) is in the high or
low position, return it to the middle (standard)
position.
d
Rep. P.head OK is displayed on the printer operation
panel.
9
Wet and wring out a cloth, and then use the cloth to
wipe dirt from the intake ducts (c).
Clean the areas that are obscured by the intake duct
carriage by moving the carriage by hand.
Chapter 2
Using Various Media
Chapter 3
Printing by Objective
Pull the printhead fixer lever completely forward to
open it.
Important
z Do not touch any areas other than as directed. Doing
so may stain your hands or cause the printer to
malfunction.
z Before you start the procedure, wring out a damp cloth
and clean the carriage cover, printhead fixer cover,
and printhead fixer lever if they are dirty.
7
Chapter 1
Basic Use
Chapter 4
Maintenance
Chapter 5
Using the Printer
in a Network
Environment
10 Raise the printhead fixer cover completely to open it.
Chapter 7
Troubleshooting
Chapter 6
Operating the
Function Menu
c
Contents
4- 24
Index
‹ Replacing the Printhead
11 Remove the old printhead.
TOP
12 Grasp the new printhead knob (e) and remove the
printhead from the case, and then remove the
orange safety cap 1 (f).
Chapter 1
Basic Use
Chapter 2
Using Various Media
f
e
Chapter 3
Printing by Objective
13 Press and hold down the knobs (h) on both sides of
Caution
z If you are going to replace the printhead immediately
after printing, wait a few minutes before starting the
work. The metal parts of the printhead may be hot
immediately after printing, and touching these parts
could cause a minor burn.
Important
z Never touch the electrical contacts on the carriage.
Doing so may damage the printer.
4- 25
the safety cap 2 (g) on the new printhead, and then
pull the cap down to remove it.
Chapter 4
Maintenance
Chapter 5
Using the Printer
in a Network
Environment
Chapter 7
Troubleshooting
g
h
Important
z The inside surface protective cap 2 (g) is covered with
ink to protect the nozzles. Do not touch this area of the
cap or drop it. Doing so may stain the surrounding
area.
Chapter 6
Operating the
Function Menu
Contents
Index
‹ Replacing the Printhead
TOP
z When handling the printhead, always hold it by the
grips (e) on the left and right sides.
z Never touch the nozzles (a) or the electrical contacts
(b). Doing so may damage the printhead, or cause
printing problems.
14 With the nozzles pointing down and the electrical
contacts facing the printer, insert the new printhead
into the carriage.
Handle the printhead carefully so that the nozzles do
not touch the carriage, then push the printhead
firmly into the carriage.
a
Chapter 1
Basic Use
Chapter 2
Using Various Media
b
Chapter 3
Printing by Objective
z Never try to re-attach the protective cap or packing
material removed from the printhead.
Chapter 4
Maintenance
15 Pull the printhead fixer cover toward you and down
to lock the printhead in place.
Chapter 5
Using the Printer
in a Network
Environment
Chapter 7
Troubleshooting
Chapter 6
Operating the
Function Menu
Contents
4- 26
Index
‹ Replacing the Printhead
TOP
16 Push the printhead fixer lever toward the back of the
printer until you hear it click.
17 Close the top cover.
Important
z Printhead Adjustment does not execute if the Auto
Print feature on the Main menu is set to Off. After
replacing the printhead, do Advanced Adj. / Printhead
Adj. on the printer operation panel to adjust the
printhead automatically. (→ P.4-42)
z The printhead adjustment cannot proceed if the loaded
roll paper or cut sheets are not at least A3 size or
larger. Printhead adjustment continues as soon as the
media is loaded.
z Never attempt to remove an ink tank when the ink
tanks are filling during the installation procedure,
immediately after replacing the printhead, or during the
printer cleaning operation.
Chapter 1
Basic Use
Chapter 2
Using Various Media
Chapter 3
Printing by Objective
Chapter 4
Maintenance
Chapter 5
Using the Printer
in a Network
Environment
As soon as you close the top cover of the printer,
Please Wait.. is displayed in the bottom line of the
display and processing begins. The processing
requires about 10 minutes to complete. As soon as
processing is finished, Advanced Adj. is displayed
and the printhead is automatically adjusted.
(→ P.4-42)
Chapter 7
Troubleshooting
Chapter 6
Operating the
Function Menu
Contents
4- 27
Index
‹ Replacing the Cutter Blade
Replacing the Cutter Blade
Follow the procedure below to replace the cutter blade
when it no longer cuts cleanly.
TOP
2
z Replacing Standard Cutter Blades (Flat Cutters) (→ P.428)
z Replacing Optional Cutter Blades (Round Cutters) (→
P.4-31)
Replacing Standard Cutter Blades
(Flat Cutters)
Change the cutting position of a blade when the blade no
longer cuts cleanly. The cutting position can be changed
twice for each blade. Once the cutting position adjustment
dial is set to 3, replace the blade with a new one.
Press the Online button to display MAIN MENU.
MAIN MENU
Head Cleaning
3
Online
Press [3] or [4] to display System Setup then press
[6].
MAIN MENU
System Setup
4
Cleaning
(3 sec.)
Stop/Eject
(1 sec.)
↓
Press [3] or [4] to select Change Cutter, then press
[6].
z Cutter Blade CT-02
System Setup
Change Cutter
5
1
If the printer power is off, press the Power button to
switch the printer on.
Information Power
Data
Message
Cleaning
(3 sec.)
Stop/Eject
(1 sec.)
↓
Press [3] or [4] to select Yes, then press OK button.
Chapter 1
Basic Use
Chapter 2
Using Various Media
Chapter 3
Printing by Objective
Chapter 4
Maintenance
Chapter 5
Using the Printer
in a Network
Environment
Chapter 7
Troubleshooting
Change Cutter
Yes
Carriage Moving appears in the bottom line of the
display and the carriage moves to the center of the
platen. Open UpperCover is then displayed.
Chapter 6
Operating the
Function Menu
Online
Offline
Menu
Contents
After a few moments, Online appears in the display.
4- 28
Index
‹ Replacing the Cutter Blade
TOP
7
Note
z If no further actions are performed within two minutes
after executing the Change Cutter function, the cutter
replacement procedure will be cancelled, and the
printer will automatically return online. If this happens,
start again from step 2.
6
Grasp the cutter blade (a) by the grips then remove
it from the carriage.
Chapter 1
Basic Use
Chapter 2
Using Various Media
a
Open the top cover.
Chapter 3
Printing by Objective
Important
z After removing the cutter blade, never touch the
cutting edge (b). This could cause personal injury.
Chapter 4
Maintenance
Chapter 5
Using the Printer
in a Network
Environment
Important
z Do not touch any areas other than as directed. Doing
so may stain your hands or cause the printer to
malfunction.
z If the cutter blade or the carriage is dirty, wring out a
damp, clean cloth and use it to clean the cutter blade
and the carriage before you begin the procedure to
adjust the operation of the cutter blade.
Chapter 7
Troubleshooting
b
Chapter 6
Operating the
Function Menu
Contents
4- 29
Index
‹ Replacing the Cutter Blade
8
Rotate the cutter position adjustment dial 1 notch in
the direction shown.
If the dial is already at notch “3” replace the cutter
blade with a new one.
TOP
Note
z To remove the protective cap from a new cutter blade,
turn the cap in the direction of the arrow. Attach the
removed cap to the used cutter blade then discard the
cutter blade in accordance with the local laws and
regulations regarding the disposal of such items.
Chapter 1
Basic Use
Chapter 2
Using Various Media
Chapter 3
Printing by Objective
Note
z The position adjustment dial has 3 positions that can
be adjusted; the blade cab be used at three steps (1,
2, 3). If the dial is returned to a position, the blade can
no longer be used.
z Once you have set the cutter blade dial to position 3,
procure a new cutter blade for future replacement.
9
10 Close the top cover.
Chapter 4
Maintenance
Chapter 5
Using the Printer
in a Network
Environment
Chapter 7
Troubleshooting
Install the cutter blade back into the carriage.
Please Wait.. appears in the bottom line of the
display and the carriage moves, then the Reset Cut
Count message is displayed.
11 IftheyouStop/Eject
have set the cutter position dial to 2 or 3, press
button, or if you have replaced the
cutter blade with a new one, press the OK button.
Chapter 6
Operating the
Function Menu
Contents
Reset Cut Count
Press OK/Stop
4- 30
The printer returns to online mode.
Index
‹ Replacing the Cutter Blade
Replacing Optional Cutter Blades (Round Cutters)
Follow the procedure below to replace a cutter blade that
no longer cuts cleanly.
z Cutter Blade CT-04
TOP
4
Press [3] or [4] to select Change Cutter, then press
[6].
System Setup
Change Cutter
5
Chapter 1
Basic Use
↓
Press [3] or [4] to select Yes, then press OK button.
Chapter 2
Using Various Media
Change Cutter
Yes
1
Carriage Moving appears in the bottom line of the
display and the carriage moves to the center of the
platen, then Open UpperCover is displayed.
If the printer power is off, press the Power button to
switch the printer on.
Information Power
Data
Message
Cleaning
(3 sec.)
Stop/Eject
(1 sec.)
Online
Offline
Menu
2
After a few moments, Online appears in the display.
Press the Online button to display MAIN MENU.
MAIN MENU
Head Cleaning
3
Online
Press [3] or [4] to display System Setup then press
[6].
MAIN MENU
System Setup
4- 31
Cleaning
(3 sec.)
Stop/Eject
(1 sec.)
Note
z If no further actions are performed within two minutes
after executing the Change Cutter function, the cutter
replacement procedure will be cancelled, and the
printer will automatically return online. If this happens,
start again from step 2.
6
Open the top cover.
Chapter 3
Printing by Objective
Chapter 4
Maintenance
Chapter 5
Using the Printer
in a Network
Environment
Chapter 7
Troubleshooting
Chapter 6
Operating the
Function Menu
Contents
↓
Index
‹ Replacing the Cutter Blade
TOP
8
Important
z Do not touch any areas other than as directed. Your
hands could get dirty or this could damage the printer.
z If the cutter unit is dirty, wring out a damp, clean cloth
and use it to clean the cutter unit before replacing the
cutter blade.
7
Insert the new cutter blade such that the [5] symbol
on the new cutter blade is aligned with the l symbol
on the cutter unit, and rotate it to the right to lock.
Chapter 2
Using Various Media
Rotate the cutter blade knob (a) to the left, and
remove the cutter blade from the cutter unit.
Chapter 3
Printing by Objective
Note
z Dispose of the used cutter blade according to local
laws.
a
9
Close the top cover.
Chapter 5
Using the Printer
in a Network
Environment
Chapter 6
Operating the
Function Menu
Please Wait.. appears in the bottom line of the
display. After the carriage has moved, the Reset Cut
Count message is displayed.
10 Press the OK button.
4- 32
Chapter 4
Maintenance
Chapter 7
Troubleshooting
Important
z After removing the cutter blade, never touch the
cutting edge (b). This could cause personal injury.
b
Chapter 1
Basic Use
Reset Cut Count
Press OK/Stop
Contents
Index
‹ Replacing the Cutter Blade
TOP
The printer returns to online mode.
Note
z Refer to the “Round Blade Cutter Unit Setup Guide”
binding to the Round Blade Cutter Unit for the
installation.
z Refer to the “Using Various Media” (→ P.2-1) for the
available paper type with the Round Blade Cutter Unit.
Chapter 1
Basic Use
Chapter 2
Using Various Media
Chapter 3
Printing by Objective
Chapter 4
Maintenance
Chapter 5
Using the Printer
in a Network
Environment
Chapter 7
Troubleshooting
Chapter 6
Operating the
Function Menu
Contents
4- 33
Index
‹ Moving the Printer
Moving the Printer
Follow this procedure before moving the printer to protect
the internal parts during moving or shipping. To pack the
printer for transport, refer to the Quick Start Guide and
follow the installation procedure in reverse order. (→ Quick
Start Guide)
TOP
1
If the printer power is off, press the Power button to
switch the printer on.
Chapter 1
Basic Use
Information Power
Data
Message
Cleaning
(3 sec.)
Stop/Eject
(1 sec.)
Chapter 2
Using Various Media
Online
Offline
Menu
Important
z If you cannot avoid tilting or standing the printer on end
when you are moving it, please contact the dealer
where you purchased the printer or the nearest service
center.
z Before you move the printer, always execute the Move
Printer menu function and follow the directions given
by the messages on the display. The printer may be
damaged if you attempt to move it after disconnecting
the power cord before switching off the printer. If you
accidentally disconnect the power cord before
switching the printer off, reattach the power cord,
reinstall the ink tanks, then start the procedure again
from Step 1. (→ Quick Start Guide)
z You cannot execute Move Printer once the MTCart Full
Soon or Replace MT-Cart. appears. Replace the
maintenance cartridge before executing Move Printer.
z Never tilt the printer while you are moving it.
2
After a few moments, Online appears in the display.
Press the Online button to display MAIN MENU.
MAIN MENU
Head Cleaning
3
Cleaning
(3 sec.)
Stop/Eject
(1 sec.)
Online
↓
Press [3] or [4] to select Move Printer then press [6].
Maintenance
Move Printer
5
Chapter 4
Maintenance
Press [3] or [4] to select Maintenance, then press [6].
MAIN MENU
Maintenance
4
↓
Chapter 5
Using the Printer
in a Network
Environment
Chapter 7
Troubleshooting
Chapter 6
Operating the
Function Menu
Press [3] or [4] to select Yes, then press OK button.
Move Printer
Yes
Open RightCover is displayed.
4- 34
Chapter 3
Printing by Objective
Contents
Index
‹ Moving the Printer
6
TOP
Open the right back cover.
8
Lock all of the ink tank covers, and press the pocket
of the right back cover upper face. Then close the
right back cover.
Chapter 1
Basic Use
Chapter 2
Using Various Media
7
Remove Ink Tank is displayed on the operation
panel.
Open the ink tank cover, then remove all the ink
tanks.
Chapter 3
Printing by Objective
Please Wait.. appears followed by Ink Draining..
while the ink is sucked from inside the tubes. This
process requires about 4 minutes to complete.
The printer switches off automatically once the
process is complete.
9 Disconnect the power cord and interface cable.
10 Open the top cover, and then open the ejection
guide.
Place each ink tank in a plastic bag and seal the
bag.
Note
z Store the removed tanks with the ink supply ports
facing up (a). If the ink tanks are stored with the ink
supply ports (a) facing down, ink may leak out.
a
4- 35
Chapter 4
Maintenance
Chapter 5
Using the Printer
in a Network
Environment
Chapter 7
Troubleshooting
Chapter 6
Operating the
Function Menu
Contents
Index
‹ Moving the Printer
TOP
13 Clamp the belt with the belt stopper then use the hex
Important
z Do not touch any areas other than as indicated. Doing
so may damage the printer.
screws to fasten the belt stopper.
11 Rewind the roll media back onto the roll and remove
Chapter 1
Basic Use
Chapter 2
Using Various Media
the roll holder and the four spool prevention stays,
and then remove the ejection guide.
Chapter 3
Printing by Objective
Chapter 4
Maintenance
Note
z Attach the belt stopper that you removed and stored
during the initial installation.
12 Lower the holder stopper lever, remove the stopper,
remove the roll from the roll holder, then store the
roll holder and the holder stopper.
a
14 Close the top cover.
Chapter 5
Using the Printer
in a Network
Environment
Chapter 7
Troubleshooting
Chapter 6
Operating the
Function Menu
Contents
4- 36
Index
‹ Moving the Printer
15 Remove the accessory pocket.
TOP
Perform the procedures for attaching the power supply
cable and ink tanks starting from Step 1. (→ Quick
Start Guide)
Chapter 1
Basic Use
Chapter 2
Using Various Media
16 Tape each printer cover in the reverse order of tape
removal during setup.
17 To remove the output stacker, apply the attachment
procedure in reverse.
18 Apply the printer mounting procedure in reverse to
Chapter 3
Printing by Objective
Chapter 4
Maintenance
unmount the printer.
19 Apply the stand assembly procedure in reverse to
disassemble and pack the stand.
20 Reattach the tapes and shipping materials to the roll
holder and printer, then pack them in the original
shipping box.
This completes the preparation for moving the printer.
Important
z To reassemble the printer after moving, perform
installation according to the “Quick Start Guide”.
z Executing the Move Printer menu and removing the
power supply cable before turning the printer off to
move the printer may cause damage to the printer.
4- 37
Chapter 5
Using the Printer
in a Network
Environment
Chapter 7
Troubleshooting
Chapter 6
Operating the
Function Menu
Contents
Index
‹ Confirming the Print Condition
Confirming the Print Condition
When you see that the printouts are faded and uneven, or
streaked with white lines, print a Nozzle Check to determine
whether the nozzles are blocked. Before you print a Nozzle
Check, make sure roll media or cut sheets of A3 size or
wider are loaded in the printer.
Note
z If you are using cut sheets, make sure at least one
sheet of unused A3 paper (not the blank side of used
paper) or larger are loaded in the printer.
1
If the printer power is off, press the Power button to
turn the printer on.
Information Power
Cleaning
(3 sec.)
Stop/Eject
(1 sec.)
2
Press the Online button to display MAIN MENU.
MAIN MENU
Head Cleaning
3
MAIN MENU
Test Print
4
Cleaning
(3 sec.)
Stop/Eject
(1 sec.)
Online
Press [3] or [4] to select Test Print then press [6].
↓
Online
Offline
Menu
Within a short time, Online or Offline is displayed.
Chapter 1
Basic Use
Chapter 2
Using Various Media
Chapter 3
Printing by Objective
↓
Press [3] or [4] to select Nozzle Check, then press
OK button.
Test Print
Nozzle Check
Data
Message
TOP
The nozzle check pattern prints. The printer returns
to the online mode and displays Online in the display
as soon as printing completes.
Chapter 4
Maintenance
Chapter 5
Using the Printer
in a Network
Environment
Chapter 7
Troubleshooting
Chapter 6
Operating the
Function Menu
Contents
4- 38
Index
‹ Confirming the Print Condition
If there are no breaks in the horizontal lines of each
color, the nozzle check pattern is normal.
• Sample: Printhead Normal
TOP
Chapter 1
Basic Use
Chapter 2
Using Various Media
Chapter 3
Printing by Objective
• Sample: Printhead Abnormal
Chapter 4
Maintenance
Chapter 5
Using the Printer
in a Network
Environment
If any of the lines are broken, perform the following
procedure:
1. Execute printhead cleaning. (→ P.4-40)
2. Print the Nozzle Check Pattern again.
3. If the Nozzle Check patterns are still broken
after repeating this procedure several times,
call the dealer where you purchased the
printer or call the nearest service center.
Chapter 7
Troubleshooting
Chapter 6
Operating the
Function Menu
Contents
4- 39
Index
‹ Cleaning the Printhead
TOP
Cleaning the Printhead
When the ink nozzles of the printhead become clogged,
you can restore normal operation by cleaning the printhead.
Printhead Cleaning Procedure
Follow this procedure to clean the printhead. The procedure
is almost the same for each method.
Note
z If you activate the Nozzle Check setting, the printer
checks the nozzles and executes automatic recovery
each time the specified number of pages are printed.
The default setting is 10 Pages.
If printing does not improve after executing Head Cleaning
A once, execute Head Cleaning B. If Head Cleaning B does
not correct the problem, repeat Head Cleaning B two or
three times. If the printer operation does not recover after
running Cleaning B, the printhead may have reached the
end of its service life. Call for service or contact the dealer
where you purchased the printer.
Types of Printhead Cleaning
There are two methods for printhead cleaning.
„ Head Cleaning A:
Execute Head Cleaning A when printing appears
uneven, or when the printhead is dirty. This cleaning
method consumes the least amount of ink. Head
Cleaning A requires approximately 90 seconds.
„ Head Cleaning B:
Execute Head Cleaning B if no ink is coming out of the
printhead or if Head Cleaning A did not correct the
problem. Head Cleaning B requires approximately 3
mins. 30 seconds.
Note
z You can execute Head Cleaning A by holding down
the Information button for more than three seconds.
1
If the printer power is off, press the Power button to
switch the printer on.
Information Power
Chapter 1
Basic Use
Chapter 2
Using Various Media
Chapter 3
Printing by Objective
Chapter 4
Maintenance
Chapter 5
Using the Printer
in a Network
Environment
Chapter 7
Troubleshooting
Data
Message
Cleaning
(3 sec.)
Stop/Eject
(1 sec.)
Online
Offline
Menu
Within a short time, Online or Offline is displayed.
Chapter 6
Operating the
Function Menu
Contents
4- 40
Index
‹ Cleaning the Printhead
2
Press the Online button to display MAIN MENU.
MAIN MENU
Head Cleaning
3
Cleaning
(3 sec.)
Stop/Eject
(1 sec.)
Chapter 1
Basic Use
Online
Chapter 2
Using Various Media
Select Head Cleaning then press [6].
MAIN MENU
Head Cleaning
4
↓
Press [3] or [4] to select the printhead cleaning
method then press OK button.
Head Cleaning
Head Cleaning A
5
TOP
Chapter 3
Printing by Objective
Chapter 4
Maintenance
Printhead cleaning starts. When printhead cleaning
is finished, the printer returns Online.
Chapter 5
Using the Printer
in a Network
Environment
Print the nozzle check pattern to check if the printing
has improved. (→ P.4-38)
Chapter 7
Troubleshooting
Chapter 6
Operating the
Function Menu
Contents
4- 41
Index
‹ Aligning the Printhead
TOP
Aligning the Printhead
Chapter 1
Basic Use
Aligning Printhead Procedure
1
If the printer power is off, press the Power button to
turn the printer on.
Information Power
Chapter 2
Using Various Media
Data
Message
If printed vertical lines are bent, or if colors are faded and
uneven, adjust the printhead position. The printer will print
the printhead adjustment pattern and read the pattern as it
prints it to adjust the position of the printhead automatically.
Before you adjust the position of the printhead, make sure
roll media or cut sheets of A3 size or wider are loaded in the
printer.
Cleaning
(3 sec.)
Stop/Eject
(1 sec.)
Offline
Menu
2
Press the Online button to display MAIN MENU.
MAIN MENU
Head Cleaning
3
4- 42
Online
↓
Press [3] or [4] to select Auto Head Adj., then press
[6].
Adjust Printer
Auto Head Adj.
5
Cleaning
(3 sec.)
Stop/Eject
(1 sec.)
Press [3] or [4] to select Adjust Printer then press [6].
MAIN MENU
Adjust Printer
4
Chapter 3
Printing by Objective
Within a short time, Online or Offline is displayed.
Follow this procedure to adjust the printhead.
Note
z When you adjust the printhead, you should use the
type of media (other than film) that you use most
frequently.
z If you are using cut sheets, make sure you load at
least one sheet of unused A3 paper (not the blank side
of used paper).
Online
↓
Chapter 4
Maintenance
Chapter 5
Using the Printer
in a Network
Environment
Chapter 7
Troubleshooting
Chapter 6
Operating the
Function Menu
Contents
Press [3] or [4] to select Advanced Adj. or Standard
Adj., then press [6].
Index
‹ Aligning the Printhead
Advanced Adj. adjusts the gaps between the even
and odd numbered nozzles, the color boundaries,
and print direction boundaries.
Standard Adj. adjusts only the print direction
boundaries.
Auto Head Adj.
Advanced Adj.
6
↓
TOP
Manual Printhead Adjustment Procedure
When you see uneven lines or broken colors, you can
manually change the value to fine adjust the position of the
printhead. Perform the procedure below to adjust manually.
1
If the printer power is off, press the Power button to
turn the printer on.
Information Power
Press [3] or [4] to select Advanced Adj., then press
OK button.
Cleaning
(3 sec.)
Stop/Eject
(1 sec.)
Online
Offline
Menu
Advanced Adj.
Yes
The printer will adjust the position of the printhead
automatically as it reads the pattern used to adjust
the position of the printhead.
Chapter 2
Using Various Media
Chapter 3
Printing by Objective
Data
Message
Chapter 1
Basic Use
2
As soon as adjustment is completed, the Online
message is displayed.
Within a short time, Online or Offline is displayed.
Press the Online button to display MAIN MENU.
MAIN MENU
Head Cleaning
3
Chapter 4
Maintenance
Cleaning
(3 sec.)
Stop/Eject
(1 sec.)
Online
Chapter 5
Using the Printer
in a Network
Environment
Chapter 7
Troubleshooting
Press [3] or [4] to select Adjust Printer then press [6].
MAIN MENU
Adjust Printer
↓
Chapter 6
Operating the
Function Menu
Contents
4- 43
Index
‹ Aligning the Printhead
4
TOP
Press [3] or [4] to select Manual Head Adj, then
press [6].
The selection is prefixed with an equals sign (=) to
denote the current value of “A1”.
Adjust Printer
Manual Head Adj ↓
5
Sample:
Inconspicuous Vertical Line
Sample:
Conspicuous Vertical Line
Press [3] or [4] to select Detailed Pttrn, or Standard
Pttrn, then press [6].
Chapter 2
Using Various Media
Detailed Pttrn adjusts the gaps between the even
and odd numbered nozzles, the color boundaries,
and print direction boundaries.
Chapter 3
Printing by Objective
Standard Pttrn adjusts only the print direction
boundaries.
Manual Head Adj
Detailed Pttrn
6
↓
Press [3] or [4] to select Yes then press OK button.
Detailed Pttrn
Yes
Detailed Pttrn is printed.
7
After the pattern has printed, Adj.Setting A1 is
displayed.
Look at Detailed Pttrn and determine the number of
the vertical white line that is least conspicuous.
Press [3] or [4] display that number then press the
OK button.
Adj.Setting A1
= 10
4- 44
Chapter 1
Basic Use
Chapter 4
Maintenance
Note
z If it is difficult to determine which pattern has the least
conspicuous vertical white lines, set the adjustment to
the middle value.
(ex.) Set the value to 11 if the patterns of the values 10
and 12 are difficult to judge.
8
Repeat Step 7 for Pattern A2 to A6, B2 to B6, C1 to
C6, D1 to D6, E2 to E6, and F1 to F6 adjustments.
Note
z If you cannot judge the yellow pattern, set the setting
to “10".
When you are finished with making settings, the
printer returns online.
Chapter 5
Using the Printer
in a Network
Environment
Chapter 7
Troubleshooting
Chapter 6
Operating the
Function Menu
Contents
Index
‹ Adjusting the Amount of Media Feed
TOP
Adjusting the Amount of Media Feed
z There is no automatic adjustment for highly
transparent film. Execute Fine Tuning to perform the
adjustment with manual entry.
Media Feed Adjustment Procedure
1
Use the following procedure to run the Adjust Band function
to adjust the amount of media feed if you see white lines or
dark color lines in your printed images. The printer prints
the band adjustment pattern and reads the resulting
printout as it prints it to automatically adjust the setting for
the amount of media feed for the media currently loaded in
the printer. The amount of media feed can be set for
different types of media. Before executing the adjust band
function, make sure roll media or cut sheets of A3 size or
wider are loaded in the printer.
Important
z Before you adjust the amount of feed, you must use
the operation panel to select the media type of the
paper loaded in the printer. If the value of the media
type selection does not match the paper loaded in the
printer, you will not achieve good print results and the
quality of the printing will be poor.
z To perform Adjust Band, select Band Joint in Feed
Priority.
Note
z If you are using cut sheets, make sure you load at
least one sheet of unused A3 paper or larger (not the
blank side of used paper).
4- 45
If the printer power is off, press the Power button to
turn the printer on.
Chapter 1
Basic Use
Chapter 2
Using Various Media
Chapter 3
Printing by Objective
Information Power
Data
Message
Cleaning
(3 sec.)
Stop/Eject
(1 sec.)
Online
Offline
Menu
2
Within a short time, Online or Offline is displayed.
Press the Online button to display MAIN MENU.
MAIN MENU
Head Cleaning
3
Chapter 4
Maintenance
Cleaning
(3 sec.)
Stop/Eject
(1 sec.)
Online
Press [3] or [4] to select Adjust Printer then press [6].
MAIN MENU
Adjust Printer
Chapter 5
Using the Printer
in a Network
Environment
Chapter 7
Troubleshooting
Chapter 6
Operating the
Function Menu
↓
Contents
Index
‹ Adjusting the Amount of Media Feed
4
Press [3] or [4] to select Adjust Band, then press [6].
Adjust Printer
Adjust Band
5
Press [3] or [4] to select Standard Adj. or Advanced
Adj., then press [6].
Adjust Band
Standard Adj.
6
↓
TOP
Adjusting Media Feed Manually
If horizontal lines or bands appear in printouts, the amount
of media feed can be manually fine tuned to be either
greater or smaller. Follow the procedure below to make the
adjustment manually.
1
Press the Online button to display MAIN MENU.
Chapter 2
Using Various Media
↓
MAIN MENU
Head Cleaning
Press [3] or [4] to select Yes, then press OK button.
Standard Adj.
Yes
The printer prints band adjustment pattern B and
reads the results of the print as it prints to
automatically adjusts the settings for the amount of
media feed for the currently loaded media.
When settings are finished, the printer returns
Online.
2
MAIN MENU
Adjust Printer
3
4
Chapter 3
Printing by Objective
Online
↓
Press [3] or [4] to select Adjust Band, then press [6].
↓
Press [3] or [4] to select Fine Tuning, then press [6].
Adjust Band
Fine Tuning
5
Cleaning
(3 sec.)
Stop/Eject
(1 sec.)
Press [3] or [4] to select Adjust Printer then press [6].
Adjust Printer
Adjust Band
↓
Chapter 4
Maintenance
Chapter 5
Using the Printer
in a Network
Environment
Chapter 7
Troubleshooting
Chapter 6
Operating the
Function Menu
Displays the current value of the setting.
Press the [3] or [4] button to select the desired
setting value then press the OK button.
If you want to increase the gap between the bands,
enter a number from 1 to 3.
4- 46
Chapter 1
Basic Use
Contents
Index
‹ Adjusting the Amount of Media Feed
If you want to reduce the gap between the bands,
enter a number from -1 to -3.
Fine Tuning
=0
6
The selected setting is prefixed with a (=) mark to
denote the current value.
Press the Online button.
Data
Online
Bk
Cleaning
(3 sec.)
Stop/Eject
(1 sec.)
Online
Offline
Menu
The Online lamp lights and the printer is ready to
print.
Note
z The paper feed adjustment value can be entered even
while printing is being performed. If the paper feed
adjustment value is changed while printing is being
performed, however, the print result may be
misaligned by approx. 3 cm immediately after the
change is made.
z If there are conspicuous white lines in the printed
matter, adjust towards “+”, and if there are
conspicuous black lines in the printed matter, adjust
towards “-”.
4- 47
Chapter 1
Basic Use
Chapter 2
Using Various Media
Chapter 3
Printing by Objective
Information Power
Message
TOP
Chapter 4
Maintenance
Chapter 5
Using the Printer
in a Network
Environment
Chapter 7
Troubleshooting
Chapter 6
Operating the
Function Menu
Contents
Index
‹ Reducing the Amount of Cutting Dust
Reducing the Amount of Cutting Dust
When using media that easily creates cutting dust you can
perform the setting to reduce the amount of cutter waste
that can cause a deterioration in the quality of printing or
damage the printhead. The cutter dust reduction function
can be set for each media type. (→ P.1-22)
If you activate the cutter dust reduction function, black lines
are printed at the leading edge and trailing edge of each
printed sheet.
The cutter
dust reduction
lines that will
be printed.
TOP
1
Chapter 1
Basic Use
Information Power
Data
Message
Cleaning
(3 sec.)
Stop/Eject
(1 sec.)
Chapter 2
Using Various Media
Online
Offline
Menu
2
Within a short time, Online or Offline is displayed.
3
Cleaning
(3 sec.)
Stop/Eject
(1 sec.)
Chapter 4
Maintenance
Online
Press [3] or [4] to select Med.Detail Set., then press
[6].
MAIN MENU
Med. Detail Set.
4
Chapter 3
Printing by Objective
Press the Online button to display MAIN MENU.
MAIN MENU
Head Cleaning
The position
that will be cut.
Important
z Do not use this function for plain paper, thin paper, or
any other media that buckles easily. These types of
media may not cut properly and can cause paper jams.
z Borderless printing cannot be performed when the
cutter dust reduction function is active. In order to
perform borderless printing, you must switch the cutter
dust reduction function off.
If the printer power is off, press the Power button to
switch the printer on.
Chapter 5
Using the Printer
in a Network
Environment
Chapter 7
Troubleshooting
↓
Press [3] or [4] to select the name of the media type
then press [6].
Chapter 6
Operating the
Function Menu
Contents
4- 48
Index
‹ Reducing the Amount of Cutting Dust
5
6
Press [3] or [4] to display CutDustReduct. then press
[6].
Press [3] or [4] to select a value for the setting, and
then press the OK button.
Select On to activate the cutter dust reduction
function for the selected media type, or select Off to
deactivate the function for the media type.
CutDustReduct.
On
The selection is prefixed with an equals sign (=) to
denote that the cut waste reduction function is
selected.
TOP
Chapter 1
Basic Use
Chapter 2
Using Various Media
Chapter 3
Printing by Objective
Chapter 4
Maintenance
Chapter 5
Using the Printer
in a Network
Environment
Chapter 7
Troubleshooting
Chapter 6
Operating the
Function Menu
Contents
4- 49
Index
TOP
Chapter 5 Using the Printer in a Network Environment
You can print the items that have been checked.
Chapter 1
Basic Use
Before Using the Printer .............................................................................5-2
System Requirements ........................................................................................... 5-2
The Network Environment ..................................................................................... 5-3
TCP/IP Network Settings (Windows, UNIX) ...............................................5-4
Procedures Required for a TCP/IP Network .......................................................... 5-4
Connecting the LAN Cable .................................................................................... 5-4
Setting the Printer IP Address ............................................................................... 5-6
Configuring TCP/IP Protocol Settings ................................................................. 5-14
Configuring the Printer for Sharing ...................................................................... 5-17
.................................................................................................................5-18
NetWare Settings (Windows) ...................................................................5-19
Procedures Required for a NetWare Network ..................................................... 5-19
Setting the Printer Frame Type ........................................................................... 5-20
Setting Up a NetWare Print Service .................................................................... 5-22
Setting NetWare Protocol .................................................................................... 5-26
Configuring the Computer for NetWare ............................................................... 5-30
Printing with UNIX ....................................................................................5-31
Using LPD to Print ............................................................................................... 5-31
Using FTP to Print ............................................................................................... 5-32
Initializing the Network Settings ...............................................................5-33
List of Network Settings ............................................................................5-34
General Settings .................................................................................................. 5-34
Chapter 2
Using Various Media
Chapter 3
Printing by Objective
Chapter 4
Maintenance
Chapter 5
Using the Printer
in a Network
Environment
Chapter 7
Troubleshooting
Software Applications Used to Configure Network Settings .....................5-37
Chapter 6
Operating the
Function Menu
Contents
5- 1
How to Use the Chapter
Contents Pages
→ Before clicking the Start Print button
Index
‹ Before Using the Printer
TOP
トップ
Before Using the Printer
This section describes information you need to know before
using the optional network interface board, such as the
supported network environments and how to check the
network environment you are using. It is recommended that
the network settings are made by the network administrator.
System Requirements
This section describes the system environments that are
compatible with the printer network interface. The following
system environment is required depending on the network
to be used.
„ Using a TCP/IP Network for Printing
z Compatible Operating Systems
• Windows Server 2003
• Windows XP
• Windows 2000
• Windows NT 4.0
• Windows Me, Windows 98
• Solaris Version 9
• Red Hat Linux 9
z Compatible Computers
• IBM PC or IBM compatible PC
• Sun Microsystems SPARC platform computer
Note
z If you are using Windows NT 4.0, install Service Pack
6 or later.
5- 2
„ Using a NetWare Network for Printing
z Compatible Servers
• Novell NetWare Version 4.2/5.1/6.0
z Compatible Clients
• Windows XP Professional
• Windows 2000 Server
• Windows 2000 Professional
• Windows NT Server 4.0
• Windows NT Workstation 4.0
• Windows Me, Windows 98
z Compatible Computers
• IBM PC or IBM compatible PC
Note
z NetWare Version 6.0 iPrint is not supported.
Chapter 1
Basic Use
Chapter 2
Using Various Media
Chapter 3
Printing by Objective
Chapter 4
Maintenance
Chapter 5
Using the Printer
in a Network
Environment
Chapter 7
Troubleshooting
Chapter 6
Operating the
Function Menu
Contents
Index
‹ Before Using the Printer
The Network Environment
Use the following diagrams as a reference to determine the
type of network environment that the printer will connect to,
and then follow the required procedure.
z Windows Network Examples
If you are using Windows network, you can use TCP/IP
as the protocol. (→ P.5-4)
Windows 98
Windows Me
TOP
トップ
z NetWare Network Examples
If you are using a network environment as described in
the following diagram, perform printing using the
NetWare protocol. The NetWare client software must be
installed on each server and client computer. (→ P.5-19)
Windows 98
Windows Me
Windows 2000
Chapter 1
Basic Use
Chapter 2
Using Various Media
Chapter 3
Printing by Objective
Windows XP
NetWare
Chapter 4
Maintenance
TCP/IP
NetWare
Windows 2000 Server
Océ CS2044
Note
z If the Windows computers are setup to use a TCP/IP
network, each computer can send print jobs directly to
the printer over the network for printing. Furthermore, if
a Windows Server 2003/ Windows XP/ Windows 2000/
Windows NT computer on the network is setup as a
print server, higher printing efficiency can be obtained
by sending the print jobs from each computer to the
print server and allowing the print server to manage
the print jobs and sends the print jobs to the network
printer. For details on the procedures to setup a print
server, refer to “Configuring the Printer for Sharing”.
(→ P.5-17)
5- 3
Server
Océ CS2044
Note
z In a network environment that has a NetWare server,
the TCP/IP can be used concurrently. In this case,
setup the protocol you want to use.
Chapter 5
Using the Printer
in a Network
Environment
Chapter 7
Troubleshooting
Chapter 6
Operating the
Function Menu
Contents
Index
‹ TCP/IP Network Settings (Windows, UNIX)
TOP
トップ
TCP/IP Network Settings (Windows, UNIX)
This chapter describes the configuration procedures for
connecting the printer to a TCP/IP network.
Procedures Required for a TCP/IP Network
The following is a summary of the procedures required to
set the printer for use on a TCP/IP network.
The following work should be performed by the network
system administrator.
1
2
→ Quick Start
Guide
First, install the optional network interface board.
5
Configuring TCP/IP Protocol Settings → P.5-14
Configure the TCP/IP protocol settings as required.
You can use a Web Browser to configure these
settings from your computer.
Installing the network interface board
Connecting the LAN Cable
→ P.5-4
Connect the printer LAN board to the HUB using a
network cable.
3
4
→ Quick Start
Installing the Printer Driver
Guide
You can use the Océ IMAGEPROGRAF printer driver
for Windows. Install the printer driver by following the
procedure in the quick start guide. There is no printer
driver for UNIX.
Setting the Printer IP Address
→ P.5-6
Set the printer IP address so that the printer can
communicate with the computer you are using.
Settings can be made using one of the following.
• GARO Device Setup Utility (Océ software
application provided with the printer.)
• ARP/PING command
• Printer Operation Panel
Connecting the LAN Cable
1
Use a LAN cable to connect the printer LAN port to a
port on the hub.
a
Chapter 1
Basic Use
Chapter 2
Using Various Media
Chapter 3
Printing by Objective
Chapter 4
Maintenance
Chapter 5
Using the Printer
in a Network
Environment
Chapter 7
Troubleshooting
Chapter 6
Operating the
Function Menu
Contents
5- 4
Index
‹ TCP/IP Network Settings (Windows, UNIX)
2
Use a LAN cable to connect the computer LAN port
to a port on the hub.
Note
z If you are using the printer connected to a network,
check that the LINK lamp (a) lights up after you turn
the printer on. If you are using a 100 Base-TX
connection, the lamp will turn green, and if you are
using a 10 Base-T connection, the lamp will turn
yellow.
z If the LINK lamp does not turn on, check the following
points:
• Is the hub turned on?
(If the hub is off, turn the hub on.)
• Is the LAN cable connector connected correctly?
(Push in the connector until it locks with a click.)
• Is the LAN cable defective?
(Replace the LAN cable with another cable, and then
check the lamp.)
• Is the hub communication format compatible?
(If the communication format (mode and speed) of
the printer and hub do not match when network auto
negotiation is used, follow the procedure below to
manually configure the connection settings.)
1. Press the Online button twice to display MAIN
MENU.
2. Press the [3] or [4] buttons to select Interface
Setup, and then press the [6] button.
3. Press the [3] or [4] buttons to select Ethernet
Driver, and then press the [6] button.
5- 5
TOP
トップ
4. Press the [3] or [4] buttons to select Auto Detect,
and then press the [6] button.
5. Press the [3] or [4] buttons to select Off, and then
press the OK button.
6. Press the [3] or [4] buttons to select Comm.Mode,
and then press the [6] button.
7. Press [3] or [4] to select Half Duplex or Full
Duplex then press OK button.
8. Press the [3] or [4] buttons to select Ethernet
Type, and then press the [6] button.
9. Press [3] or [4] to select 10 Base-T or 100 BaseTX then press OK button.
10. Press the [3] or [4] buttons to select Spanning
Tree, and then press the [6] button.
11. Press [3] or [4] to select Use or Not Use then
press OK button.
12. Press the Online button.
13. If Store Setting OK? is displayed, press the OK
button.
Chapter 1
Basic Use
Chapter 2
Using Various Media
Chapter 3
Printing by Objective
Chapter 4
Maintenance
Chapter 5
Using the Printer
in a Network
Environment
Chapter 7
Troubleshooting
Chapter 6
Operating the
Function Menu
Contents
Index
‹ TCP/IP Network Settings (Windows, UNIX)
Setting the Printer IP Address
The printer IP address needs to be configured so that the
computer you are using can communicate with the printer
before you can setup the printer protocol settings. Make the
settings in one of the following ways. Use the method that is
easiest for you.
z GARO Device Setup Utility (→ P.5-6)
If you are using a Windows computer, make the settings
using the utility software.
z ARP/PING command (→ P.5-9)
The printer IP address can be set using the command
screen. Set the subnet mask and default gateway using
the remote UI.
TOP
トップ
„ Configuring the Printer Using the GARO Device Setup
Utility
If you are using Windows, use the “GARO Device Setup
Utility” (a software utility provided with the printer) to
perform the printer network settings.
Chapter 1
Basic Use
z Installing the GARO Device Setup Utility
Chapter 2
Using Various Media
Important
z If you are using Windows Server 2003, Windows XP,
Windows 2000, or Windows NT 4.0, you must log in as
a member of the Administrators group.
1
Insert the provided “User Software” CD-ROM into
the computer CD-ROM drive.
Chapter 3
Printing by Objective
Chapter 4
Maintenance
The Setup Menu window is displayed.
Important
z Before setting the IP address, confirm that the printer
is switched on and connected to the network.
Note
z If the AutoPlay function is switched off, double-click the
My Computer icon on the desktop, click the CD-ROM
drive icon, and then from the File menu select
AutoPlay.
Chapter 5
Using the Printer
in a Network
Environment
Chapter 7
Troubleshooting
Chapter 6
Operating the
Function Menu
Contents
5- 6
Index
‹ TCP/IP Network Settings (Windows, UNIX)
2
Click the Install Individual Software button.
4
TOP
トップ
Follow the instructions on the screen.
This completes the installation of the GARO Device
Setup Utility.
Chapter 1
Basic Use
z Setting Network Information
1
Select Programs / GARO Device Setup Utility /
GARO Device Setup Utility from the Start menu.
Chapter 2
Using Various Media
Chapter 3
Printing by Objective
3
Chapter 4
Maintenance
Click the Install button in the GARO Device Setup
Utility.
2
Select the name of the printer you want to setup
from the list of printer names, then select Protocol
Settings from the Printer menu.
Chapter 5
Using the Printer
in a Network
Environment
Chapter 7
Troubleshooting
Chapter 6
Operating the
Function Menu
Contents
5- 7
Index
‹ TCP/IP Network Settings (Windows, UNIX)
3
Enter the IP Address, Subnet Mask, and Gateway
Address assigned to the printer and click the Set
button.
To configure the IP address automatically, select
Auto from Setting IP Address, and then place a
checkmark next to method to use (choose between
DHCP, BOOTP, or RARP). To configure a static IP
address, select Manual from Setting IP Adress.
4
5
TOP
トップ
Click the OK button when the confirmation message
is displayed.
When you have finished configuring the settings,
select Exit from the Printer menu.
Chapter 1
Basic Use
Chapter 2
Using Various Media
Chapter 3
Printing by Objective
Chapter 4
Maintenance
Chapter 5
Using the Printer
in a Network
Environment
To use NetWare for printing, set NetWare Frame
Type to the frame type you are using.
Chapter 7
Troubleshooting
Chapter 6
Operating the
Function Menu
Contents
5- 8
Index
‹ TCP/IP Network Settings (Windows, UNIX)
„ Configuring the Printer Using the ARP/PING Command
The printer MAC address is required to configure the
printer using the ARP/PING command. The MAC
address can be determined by a status print, from the
sticker on the internal printer network card, or from the
Information menu on the operation panel.
z Checking the Printer MAC Address
To find the MAC address using the Status Print, use the
following procedure to print the status print. Load roll
media of A3 size or greater before printing.
Note
z The MAC address can be found on the sticker on the
internal print network card, or by pressing the Online
button in the printer operation panel and selecting
MAIN MENU, Information, and then MAC Address.
1
If the printer power is off, press the Power button to
switch the printer on.
Data
Cleaning
(3 sec.)
Stop/Eject
(1 sec.)
After a few moments, Online appears in the display.
4
↓
Press [3] or [4] to select Status Print, then press OK
button.
Chapter 1
Basic Use
Chapter 2
Using Various Media
Test Print
Status Print
The printer settings information will be printed. When
printing has finished, Online is displayed and the
printer is ready to print.
Chapter 3
Printing by Objective
Chapter 4
Maintenance
Chapter 5
Using the Printer
in a Network
Environment
Chapter 6
Operating the
Function Menu
Press the Online button to display MAIN MENU.
MAIN MENU
Head Cleaning
5- 9
MAIN MENU
Test Print
Online
Offline
Menu
2
Press [3] or [4] to select Test Print then press [6].
Chapter 7
Troubleshooting
Information Power
Message
3
TOP
トップ
Contents
Cleaning
(3 sec.)
Stop/Eject
(1 sec.)
Online
Index
‹ TCP/IP Network Settings (Windows, UNIX)
The MAC address is printed in the Status Print at the
location indicated in the sample below.
TOP
トップ
z Setting the IP Address
1
2
If you are using a Windows computer, open an MSDOS prompt or a command prompt.
If you are using UNIX or Linux, open the console
screen.
Execute the following commands to add static
entries to the arp table.
arp -s <IP Address> <MAC Address>
IP address:
Enter the IP address assigned to the printer. Enter
four numbers (0 to 255 in decimal) separated by full
stops. Have the network administrator check the
assigned address.
MAC Address:
Enter the dedicated MAC address of the printer.
Separate each set of two digits with a hyphen.
Entry Sample:
arp -s XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX 00-00-85-XX-XX-XX
Chapter 1
Basic Use
Chapter 2
Using Various Media
Chapter 3
Printing by Objective
Chapter 4
Maintenance
Chapter 5
Using the Printer
in a Network
Environment
Chapter 7
Troubleshooting
Chapter 6
Operating the
Function Menu
Contents
5- 10
Index
‹ TCP/IP Network Settings (Windows, UNIX)
3
Execute the following commands to configure the IP
address of the printer.
ping <IP Address> -1 479
IP address:
Enter the same IP address as used in Step 2.
TOP
トップ
„ Configuring the Printer Using the Printer Operation Panel
Network information can be configuring using the printer
operation panel. You can set the IP address, subnet
mask, and default gateway.
1
Press the Online button to display MAIN MENU.
Entry Sample:
ping XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX -l 479
MAIN MENU
Head Cleaning
(For Windows)
Cleaning
(3 sec.)
Stop/Eject
(1 sec.)
Online
ping –s 479 XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX
(For Red Hat Linux)
ping –s XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX 479
2
(For Solaris)
Note
z The “l” of the “-l” entry is an alphabetic lower case “l”
(el).
z The subnet mask and gateway address are set to
“0.0.0.0”.
Once you have finished configuring the settings, use
Remote UI or the printer operation panel to change the
subnet mask and gateway address to the printer to
match the settings of the network you are using.
(→ P.5-11, P.5-14)
This completes the preparation for configuring the printer
protocol settings.
Press [3] or [4] to select Interface Setup then press
[6].
MAIN MENU
Interface Setup
3
Press [3] or [4] to select TCP/IP, then press [6] .
Interface Setu
TCP/IP
4
Chapter 3
Printing by Objective
Chapter 4
Maintenance
Chapter 5
Using the Printer
in a Network
Environment
Chapter 7
Troubleshooting
↓
Chapter 6
Operating the
Function Menu
Press the [3] or [4] buttons to select IP Address, and
then press the [6] button.
IP Setting
IP Address
5- 11
↓
Chapter 2
Using Various Media
Press [3] or [4] to select IP Setting, then press [6] .
TCP/IP
IP Setting
5
↓
Chapter 1
Basic Use
Contents
↓
Index
‹ TCP/IP Network Settings (Windows, UNIX)
6
7
Press the [3] or [4] buttons to select the number
within the IP address to change, and then press OK
button.
IP Address
=0.0.0.0
Press [3] or [4] to change the number to the IP
address assigned to the printer, then press [6] or OK
button.
Each time you press the [4] button the number
increases by 1. The next number after 255 is 0.
Each time you press the [6] button the number
decreases by 1. The next number after 0 is 255.
IP Address
=XXX.0.0.0
Note
z If you press and hold the [3] or [4] button, the value
increases or decreases in steps of 10.
8
Repeat Step 6 to 7 to enter the IP address
assigned to the printer.
IP Address
=XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX
Enter the subnet mask.
9
TOP
トップ
Press the [5] button once, and then press the [3] or
[4] buttons to select Subnet Mask, and then press
the [6] button.
IP Setting
Subnet Mask
Chapter 1
Basic Use
↓
10 Press [3] or [4] to select the number within the
Chapter 2
Using Various Media
subnet mask to change, then press OK button.
Subnet Mask
=0.0.0.0
11 Press [3] or [4] to change the value of the number to
the subnet mask for the network you are using, then
press OK button.
Chapter 3
Printing by Objective
Chapter 4
Maintenance
Each time you press the [4] button the number
increases by 1. The next number after 255 is 0.
Each time you press the [3] button the number
decreases by 1. The next number after 0 is 255.
Subnet Mask
=XXX.0.0.0
12 Repeat Step 10 to 11 to enter the subnet mask that
the network is using.
Subnet Mask
=255.255.255.0
Chapter 5
Using the Printer
in a Network
Environment
Chapter 7
Troubleshooting
Chapter 6
Operating the
Function Menu
Enter the default gateway.
Contents
5- 12
Index
‹ TCP/IP Network Settings (Windows, UNIX)
13 Press the [5] button once, and then press the [3] or
[4] button to select Default G/W, and then press the
[6] button.
IP Setting
Default G/W
↓
14 Press [3] or [4] to select the number within default
gateway to change, then press OK button.
Default G/W
=0.0.0.0
15 Press [3] or [4] to change the number to the IP
address of the default gateway, then press OK
button.
Each time you press the [4] button the number
increases by 1. The next number after 255 is 0.
Each time you press the [3] button the number
decreases by 1. The next number after 0 is 255.
Default G/W
=XXX.0.0.0
16 Repeat Step 14 and 15 to enter the IP address of
the default gateway.
Finally, you need to save the IP address, subnet
mask, and default gateway settings.
17 Press the Online button.
Default G/W
=XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX
18 Press the OK button.
If you want to abort the settings, press Stop/Eject
button.
Store Setting
Ok?
The message Storing appears on the display and
then the printer is restarted.
When finished, the printer returns Online.
If an error message is displayed, review the values
of each of the settings, and correct the settings.
Important
z If you change the IP address, subnet mask, or default
gateway, make sure you save the settings using Step
18. If the settings are not saved, the entered values
will not be enabled.
TOP
トップ
Chapter 1
Basic Use
Chapter 2
Using Various Media
Chapter 3
Printing by Objective
Chapter 4
Maintenance
Chapter 5
Using the Printer
in a Network
Environment
Chapter 7
Troubleshooting
Chapter 6
Operating the
Function Menu
Contents
Store Setting is displayed.
5- 13
Index
‹ TCP/IP Network Settings (Windows, UNIX)
Configuring TCP/IP Protocol Settings
“Remote UI”, the software application built into the network
interface of this printer, allows you to use a Web browser on
your computer to monitor the status of the printer and
perform the network information settings for the printer.
„ Setting the Protocol with Web Browser (Remote UI)
The procedure below describes how to use Remote UI to
perform the network information settings.
Important
z You can use Netscape Navigator/Communicator 6.0 or
later, or Internet Explorer 5.01 or later for the web
browser. The Macintosh Safari web browser is not
supported.
z You cannot connect to the printer via a proxy server. In
an environment that uses a proxy server, add the
printer IP address to Exceptions (addresses that do
not use a proxy) in the web browser proxy server
settings. (These settings vary depending on the
network environment.)
z Configure the web browser to enable JavaScript and
Cookies.
z If multiple Remote UIs are run at the same time, the
last setting made will be used. It is recommended that
only one Remote UI be started at a time.
TOP
トップ
Note
z When Remote UI is started using the printer name,
make sure that the DNS settings in the DNS
environment and on the network board have been set
up correctly.
1
Start the Web Browser and enter the following URL
in the Location or Address box, then press the Enter
key.
http:// <Printer IP Address or name> /
Sample: http://XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX/
Chapter 1
Basic Use
Chapter 2
Using Various Media
Chapter 3
Printing by Objective
Chapter 4
Maintenance
Chapter 5
Using the Printer
in a Network
Environment
Chapter 7
Troubleshooting
Chapter 6
Operating the
Function Menu
Contents
5- 14
Index
‹ TCP/IP Network Settings (Windows, UNIX)
2
Select Administrator Mode and then click the Logon
button.
3
TOP
トップ
Select Network from the Device Manager menu on
the left.
Chapter 1
Basic Use
Chapter 2
Using Various Media
Chapter 3
Printing by Objective
Chapter 4
Maintenance
Remote UI starts.
Note
z If a password has been setup on the printer, enter the
password and then press the Logon button. If a
password has not been setup, you do not need to
enter a password.
4
The Network page appears.
Click the Edit button to the right of TCP/IP protocol.
Chapter 5
Using the Printer
in a Network
Environment
Chapter 7
Troubleshooting
Chapter 6
Operating the
Function Menu
The Edit TCP/IP Protocol Settings page opens.
Contents
5- 15
Index
‹ TCP/IP Network Settings (Windows, UNIX)
5
Configure each of the settings.
To dynamically obtain an IP address, check the
checkbox for the method to use: Use DHCP, Use
BOOTP, or Use RARP. If the IP address is static,
clear all three check boxes.
5- 16
TOP
トップ
Note
z If the printer IP address is configured to use DHCP,
BOOTP, and RARP, a check is performed to see which
of DHCP, BOOTP, and RARP is available when the
printer is turned on or reset, and the IP address is
allocated using first available method. If you clear the
checkmark from Use DHCP, Use BOOTP, or Use
RARP, that particular method will not be checked.
If none of the address allocation methods are
available, the printer is assigned the IP address that
was configured in the IP Address field.
z The check to determine whether DHCP, BOOTP, or
RARP are available requires approximately 1 to 2
minutes to execute. It is therefore recommended that
you clear the checkboxes for the methods that are not
available.
z When DHCP, BOOTP, or RARP is used to assign the
IP address, the server for that protocol in the network
must be running.
z If you are using a DNS server, tick the Enable DNS
Dynamic Update checkbox, and then enter the Primary
DNS Server Address, Secondary DNS Server
Address, DNS Host Name, and DNS Domain Name.
z Enter the DNS Host Name using English letters,
numbers, and hyphens to a maximum of 63
characters. Numbers and hyphens cannot be used as
the first character, and hyphens cannot be used as the
last character.
z Enter the DNS Domain Name using English letters,
numbers, hyphens and periods to a maximum of 64
characters. Numbers, hyphens, and periods cannot be
used as the first character, and hyphens and periods
cannot be used as the last character.
Chapter 1
Basic Use
Chapter 2
Using Various Media
Chapter 3
Printing by Objective
Chapter 4
Maintenance
Chapter 5
Using the Printer
in a Network
Environment
Chapter 7
Troubleshooting
Chapter 6
Operating the
Function Menu
Contents
Index
‹ TCP/IP Network Settings (Windows, UNIX)
6
7
Click the OK button.
When you return to Network under Device Manager,
press the Reset button.
TOP
トップ
Configuring the Printer for Sharing
The network printer can be managed efficiently by setting
up a Windows Server 2003, Windows XP, Windows 2000,
or Windows NT 4.0 computer on the network as a print
server using the following procedure. If you setup a printer
server, print jobs are managed by the print server. Further, if
an alternative driver has already been installed on the
server, each computer on the network can install the printer
driver via the network.
Important
z The shared printer settings should be made by the
network system administrator.
The printer network interface restarts and the
settings are enabled.
1
Open the Sharing sheet of the Printer Properties
dialog box.
Select Settings / Printers from the Start menu.
Select the icon of the printer to use, then select
Sharing... from the File menu.
Chapter 1
Basic Use
Chapter 2
Using Various Media
Chapter 3
Printing by Objective
Chapter 4
Maintenance
Chapter 5
Using the Printer
in a Network
Environment
Chapter 7
Troubleshooting
Chapter 6
Operating the
Function Menu
Contents
5- 17
Index
‹ TCP/IP Network Settings (Windows, UNIX)
2
Configuring the Printer for Sharing.
Select Shared as then enter the desired share
name of the printer.
Click the Additional Drivers... button (click the
Alternative Drivers button in Windows NT 4.0)
and select the printer driver to install.
Press the OK button. If you are installing
additional (alternative) drivers, a screen
appears for you to enter the location of the
printer driver files. Insert the User Software
CD-ROM provided with the printer into the CDROM drive and select the folder that contains
the drivers.
TOP
トップ
This completes the printer sharing settings.
To install the printer drivers on other computers, select
Network Printer in the connection type screen in Printer
Wizard and select the shared printer from the print server
that you setup.
Note
z If the printer is shared from a Windows Server 2003,
Windows XP, or Windows 2000 computer with IIS
installed, you can install the “DSE (Device Status
Extension)” contained on the included User Software
CD-ROM, which allows you to view printer information
and manage print jobs using a web browser from client
computers. For the “DSE” installation method, refer to
the Readme file in the “DSE” folder on the User
Software CD-ROM.
Chapter 1
Basic Use
Chapter 2
Using Various Media
Chapter 3
Printing by Objective
Chapter 4
Maintenance
Chapter 5
Using the Printer
in a Network
Environment
Chapter 7
Troubleshooting
Chapter 6
Operating the
Function Menu
Important
z If you are using Windows NT 4.0, Service Pack 6 or
later will need to be installed on the computer in order
to use the alternative drivers function.
5- 18
Contents
Index
‹ NetWare Settings (Windows)
TOP
トップ
NetWare Settings (Windows)
The chapter describes the configuration procedures for
using a printer connected to a NetWare network.
4
1
Installing the network interface board
2
Connecting the LAN Cable
→ P.5-4
Connect the LAN port of the printer to the hub using a
network cable.
3
Setting the Printer Frame Type
5
→ Quick Start
Guide
First, install the optional network interface board.
→ P.5-20
Set the printer frame type. Use the following software
to configure the printer so that it can communicate
with the computer you are using.
• GARO Device Setup Utility (Océ software
application provided with the printer.)
• Printer Operation Panel
→ P.5-22
Configure the NetWare print service. You can
configure the settings from a computer using the
following software.
• NWADMIN or PCONSOLE (Novell software
applications provided with NetWare)
Procedures Required for a NetWare Network
The following is a summary of the procedures required to
setup the printer for use on a NetWare network.
The following procedure should be performed by the
network system administrator.
Setting Up a NetWare Print Service
6
Setting NetWare Protocol
→ P.5-26
Setup the printer protocols. Setup the printer
protocols using a web browser on a computer on the
network.
• Web Browser (Remote UI)
Configuring the Computer for
→ P.5-30
NetWare
Perform these settings on every computer that will
use the printer.
Chapter 1
Basic Use
Chapter 2
Using Various Media
Chapter 3
Printing by Objective
Chapter 4
Maintenance
Chapter 5
Using the Printer
in a Network
Environment
Chapter 7
Troubleshooting
Chapter 6
Operating the
Function Menu
Contents
5- 19
Index
‹ NetWare Settings (Windows)
Setting the Printer Frame Type
The printer frame type must be setup so that the computer
you are using and the printer can communicate before you
can setup the printer protocol. Configure the settings using
the following software.
z GARO Device Setup Utility (→ P.5-20)
TOP
トップ
„ Setting the frame type with GARO Device Setup Utility
If you are using a Windows computer, use the “GARO
Device Setup Utility” (the software utility provided with
the printer) to configure the printer network settings.
1
Select Programs / GARO Device Setup Utility /
GARO Device Setup Utility from the Start menu.
Chapter 1
Basic Use
Chapter 2
Using Various Media
z Printer Operation Panel (→ P.5-21)
Important
z To use the GARO Device Setup Utility, the GARO
Device Setup Utility needs to be installed on the
computer you are using. Install the GARO Device
Setup Utility for the administrator on the computer you
are using. (→ P.5-20)
z Before setting the printer frame type, confirm that the
printer is switched on and connected to the network.
Chapter 3
Printing by Objective
Chapter 4
Maintenance
2
Select from the name of the printer you want to
setup from the list, then select Protocol Settings
from the Printer menu.
Chapter 5
Using the Printer
in a Network
Environment
Chapter 7
Troubleshooting
Chapter 6
Operating the
Function Menu
Contents
5- 20
Index
‹ NetWare Settings (Windows)
3
Set NetWare Frame Type to the frame type you are
using, set TCP/IP Frame Type to ETHERNET II,
enter the IP Address assigned to the printer, the
Subnet Mask and Gateway Address, then click the
Set button.
5
TOP
トップ
When you have finished configuring the settings,
select Exit from the Printer menu.
Chapter 1
Basic Use
Chapter 2
Using Various Media
„ Configuring the Printer Using the Printer Operation Panel
The NetWare network information can be configured
using the printer operation panel.
1
Press the Online button to display MAIN MENU.
MAIN MENU
Head Cleaning
Note
z The IP address needs to be configured here so that
you can configure the printer protocol settings using a
web browser (Remote UI).
2
Click the OK button when the confirmation message
is displayed.
3
4
Online
Press [3] or [4] to select Interface Setup then press
[6].
Chapter 4
Maintenance
Chapter 5
Using the Printer
in a Network
Environment
Chapter 7
Troubleshooting
MAIN MENU
Interface Setup
Press [3] or [4] to select NetWare, then press [6].
Interface Setup
NetWare
4
Chapter 6
Operating the
Function Menu
↓
Press [3] or [4] to select Netware, then press [6].
NetWare
NetWare
5- 21
Cleaning
(3 sec.)
Stop/Eject
(1 sec.)
Chapter 3
Printing by Objective
Contents
↓
Index
‹ NetWare Settings (Windows)
5
Press [3] or [4] to select On, then press OK.
After the equals mark (=) appears, the display
returns to the NetWare menu.
Press [3] or [4] to select Frame Type, then press [6].
NetWare
Frame Type
7
↓
Press [3] or [4] to select the frame type you are
using, then press OK button.
The available frame type selections are Auto Detect,
Ethernet 2, Ethernet 802.2, Ethernet 802.3 and
Ethernet SNAP.
Frame Type
Ethernet 802.3
8
After the equals mark (=) appears, the display
returns to the NetWare menu.
Press [3] or [4] to select Print Service, then press [6].
NetWare
Print Service
9
↓
Press [3] or [4] to select the print service then press
[6].
The available selections for Print Service are
BindaryPserver, Rprinter, NDSPserver, and Nprinter.
5- 22
Print Service
RPrinter
After the equals mark (=) appears, the display
returns to the NetWare menu.
10 Press the Online button.
NetWare
On
6
TOP
トップ
NetWare
Print Service
↓
11 Press the OK button.
If you want to abort the setting, press Stop/Eject
button for one second or more.
Store Setting
Ok?
After Storing appears on the display, the printer is
restarted.
When completed, the printer returns to Online or
Offline mode.
Setting Up a NetWare Print Service
To print using a NetWare network, print services such as
print servers, queues, etc., need to be setup. The print
service settings can be made from the computer you are
using with the following software. Use the software that is
easiest for you.
z NWADMIN or PCONSOLE (Novell software applications
provided with NetWare)
Important
z If you configure the print service settings using
NWADMIN, Novell Client (the Novell NetWare client)
must be installed as the client software application.
Chapter 1
Basic Use
Chapter 2
Using Various Media
Chapter 3
Printing by Objective
Chapter 4
Maintenance
Chapter 5
Using the Printer
in a Network
Environment
Chapter 7
Troubleshooting
Chapter 6
Operating the
Function Menu
Contents
Index
‹ NetWare Settings (Windows)
z This section describes an example of the configuration
procedure using NetWare print service. The
configuration procedure may change depending on the
environment you are using.
„ Types of Print Services
Before performing the print service settings, be sure to
read the description below then select the printer service
type.
Note
z With NetWare 5.1J/6.0, NDPS can also be used as the
print service. If using NDPS, use the Novell printer
gateway, which is bundled with NetWare. This manual
does not explain how to setup NDPS, so refer to the
NetWare manual.
TOP
トップ
z NDS (Novell Directory Service) and Bindery
Both NDS and bindery are supported. Select
whichever mode is compatible with your network
environment.
z Queue Server Mode and Remote Printer Mode
Both Queue Server Mode and Remote Printer Mode
are supported.
z Queue Server Mode
If you are using queue server mode, all print server
functions are supported, so there is no need for
additional print server hardware or software. In NDS
queue server mode (NDS PServer), printing is
performed using the NDS print server. In bindery
queue server mode (Binery PServer), printing is
performed using the bindery print server.
Further, in queue server mode, a NetWare user license
is required for each network interface used.
z Remote Printer Mode
If using remote printer mode, the printer is controlled
by the NetWare print server. Consequently, a NetWare
print server is required. In NDS remote printer mode
(NPrinter), printing is performed using the NDS print
server, and in bindery remote printer mode (RPrinter),
printing is performed using the bindery print server.
Chapter 1
Basic Use
Chapter 2
Using Various Media
Chapter 3
Printing by Objective
Chapter 4
Maintenance
Chapter 5
Using the Printer
in a Network
Environment
Chapter 7
Troubleshooting
Chapter 6
Operating the
Function Menu
Contents
5- 23
Index
‹ NetWare Settings (Windows)
„ Setting Up the Print Server With NWADMIN,
PCONSOLE
z If You Are Using NDS Queue Server Mode or Remote
Printer Mode
1
2
Log into NetWare as the System Administrator, or as
a user with equivalent access rights, then start
NWADMIN.
Execute the Quick Setup.
Select Print Services Quick Setup from the
Tools menu.
TOP
トップ
Note
z The name of the print server is required when
configuring the printer protocol settings so be sure to
note down the printer name.
z If you are performing a quick setup, the printer is
allocated printer number 0. If you are using queue
server mode, do not change the printer number from 0.
3
Click the Change Password button to open the
password entry screen, then enter the desired
password.
Enter the desired name in printer Name.
For the print queue Name enter the desired
name.
Enter the volume object (i.e., the object that
represents the physical volume on the
network) in which to create the queue in
Volume. Press the button on the right to select
from a list.
Perform any other settings as required, and
then click the OK button.
5- 24
Chapter 2
Using Various Media
Chapter 3
Printing by Objective
Select the print server created in Step 2, then
right-click Details.
For the Print Server Name, enter the desired
name. If you are using an existing name, press
the button on the right and select from the list.
If you are using queue server mode, select
Other/Unknown in Type. If you are using
remote printer mode, Select Parallel in Type,
press the Communications... button, and then
set the Ports to LPT1, and set Manual Load to
Connection Type.
Set the password.
Chapter 1
Basic Use
Click the OK button to close the password
entry screen.
4
Click the OK or Cancel button to close the
Details screen.
Follow the procedure below to start the print server if
you are using Remote Printer Mode.
To use the NetWare file server as the print
server, enter “LOAD PSERVER.NLM” on the
file server then press the Enter key.
Chapter 4
Maintenance
Chapter 5
Using the Printer
in a Network
Environment
Chapter 7
Troubleshooting
Chapter 6
Operating the
Function Menu
Contents
Index
‹ NetWare Settings (Windows)
4
1
2
3
Log into NetWare as the Supervisor, then start
PCONSOLE.
Press the ESC key.
5
From Available Options select Quick Setup
then press the Enter key.
Note
z The name of the print server is needed when you
configure the printer protocol settings, so be sure to
note down the printer name.
Set the password.
Select the print server created in Step 2, and
then press the Enter key.
If the print server has not been created, use the
following procedure to create the print server.
6
Chapter 1
Basic Use
Chapter 2
Using Various Media
When the confirmation message appears,
select Yes then press the Enter key.
From Available Options select Print Servers,
and then press the Enter key.
Switch to the Bindery Mode.
Enter the name of the print server to create,
the name of the new printer, and name of the
queue.
Set the printer type.
If using queue server mode, select Other/
Unknown in Type. If you are using remote
printer mode, set Printer Type to Parallel, and
then set Position to Manual Load.
Note
z The step to use the NetWare file server as the print
server is not required if you intend to use Queue
Server Mode.
This completes the NetWare print service settings. Next,
setup the printer protocols. (→ P.5-26)
z If You Are Using the Bindery Queue Server Mode or
Remote Printer Mode
TOP
トップ
Select Password, and then press the Enter
key. When the password entry screen opens,
enter the desired password, and then press
the Enter key.
Press ESC several times to display the confirmation
to close PCONSOLE, then select Yes to close
PCONSOLE.
This completes the NetWare print service settings. Next,
configure the printer protocols. (→ P.5-26)
Chapter 3
Printing by Objective
Chapter 4
Maintenance
Chapter 5
Using the Printer
in a Network
Environment
Chapter 7
Troubleshooting
Chapter 6
Operating the
Function Menu
Contents
5- 25
Index
‹ NetWare Settings (Windows)
Setting NetWare Protocol
The printer protocol settings can be configured from a
computer using a web browser (Remote UI). First set the
printer IP address. (→ P.5-6)
TOP
トップ
displayed as “RPRINTER/NPRINTER”.
1
„ Configuring the Protocol Using a Web Browser (Remote
UI)
Important
z You can use Netscape Navigator/Communicator 6.0 or
later, or Internet Explorer 5.01 or later for the web
browser.
z You cannot connect to the printer via a proxy server. In
an environment that uses a proxy server, add the
printer IP address to Exceptions (addresses that do
not use a proxy) in the web browser proxy server
settings. (These settings vary depending on the
network environment.)
z Enable the JavaScript and Cookies settings in the web
browser.
z If multiple remote UIs are run at the same time, the last
setting to be made will be used. It is recommended
that you only run one remote UI at a time.
Note
z When the Remote UI is started using the printer name,
make sure that the DNS settings for the DNS
environment and board have been set up correctly.
z If Remote UI is started and the print history is
displayed as RPrinter/NPrinter, the document name
and user information cannot be obtained.
Consequently, the document name will only be
displayed as “unknown”, and the user will only be
5- 26
2
Start the Web Browser and enter the following URL
in the Location or Address box, then press the Enter
key.
Chapter 1
Basic Use
http:// <Printer IP Address or name> /
Chapter 2
Using Various Media
Sample: http://XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX/
Select Administrator Mode and then click the Logon
button.
Chapter 3
Printing by Objective
Chapter 4
Maintenance
Chapter 5
Using the Printer
in a Network
Environment
Chapter 7
Troubleshooting
Remote UI starts.
Note
z If a password has been setup on the printer, enter the
password and then press the Logon button. If a
password has not been setup, you do not need to
enter a password.
Chapter 6
Operating the
Function Menu
Contents
Index
‹ NetWare Settings (Windows)
3
Select Network from the Device Manager menu on
the left.
5
TOP
トップ
Check the Frame Type box and make sure the
setting is correct for your NetWare network.
Chapter 1
Basic Use
Chapter 2
Using Various Media
Chapter 3
Printing by Objective
Chapter 4
Maintenance
4
The Network page appears.
Click the Edit button to the right of NetWare.
6
If you intend to use burst mode, set NCP Burst Mode
to On.
Note
z Burst mode is used in queue server mode to transfer
data rapidly at very high speed during printing.
z Normally, leave this setting on.
Chapter 5
Using the Printer
in a Network
Environment
Chapter 7
Troubleshooting
Chapter 6
Operating the
Function Menu
Contents
The Edit NetWare Protocol Settings page appears.
5- 27
Index
‹ NetWare Settings (Windows)
7
Set Print Application to the service to use.
Note
z Only one of the services selected here will be enabled.
Multiple services cannot be enabled at the same time.
8
When using packet signing, set Packet Signature to
If Requested by Server.
9
TOP
トップ
Perform the following settings as required for the
selected service.
z Bindery PServer Selected: Queue Server Mode
(Using a Bindery Print Server)
Enter the file server name into File Server
Name.
For Print Server Name, enter the name of the
print server created in “Setting Up a NetWare
Print Service”. (→ P.5-22)
For Print Server Password, enter the print
server password created in “Setting Up a
NetWare Print Service”. (→ P.5-22)
Set the Polling Interval. Set the interval at
which to check the printer NetWare print
queue.
z RPrinter Selected:Remote Printer Mode (using a
Bindery Print Server)
For Print Server Name, enter the advertised
name of the print server created in “Setting Up
a NetWare Print Service”. (→ P.5-22)
For Printer Number, enter the same printer
number that you entered in “Setting Up a
NetWare Print Service”. (→ P.5-22)
Chapter 1
Basic Use
Chapter 2
Using Various Media
Chapter 3
Printing by Objective
Chapter 4
Maintenance
Chapter 5
Using the Printer
in a Network
Environment
Chapter 7
Troubleshooting
Chapter 6
Operating the
Function Menu
Contents
5- 28
Index
‹ NetWare Settings (Windows)
z NDS PServer Selected:Queue Server Mode
(Using an NDS Print Server)
11 When you return to Network under Device Manager,
press the Reset button.
Enter the Tree Name and Context Name for
the tree and context name of the print server.
Enter a context name of up to 255 characters.
TOP
トップ
Chapter 1
Basic Use
Chapter 2
Using Various Media
For Print Server Name, enter the name of the
print server created in “Setting Up a NetWare
Print Service”. (→ P.5-22)
For Print Server Password, enter the print
server password created in “Setting Up a
NetWare Print Service”. (→ P.5-22)
Chapter 3
Printing by Objective
Set the Polling Interval. Set the interval at
which to check the printer NetWare print
queue.
Chapter 4
Maintenance
z NPrinter Selected: Remote Printer Mode (using an
NDS Print Server)
For Print Server Name, enter the advertised
name of the print server created in “Setting Up
a NetWare Print Service” (→ P.5-22). The
advertised name is set to the same name as
the normal printer server name.
For Printer Number, enter the same printer
number that you entered in “Setting Up a
NetWare Print Service”. (→ P.5-22)
10 Click the OK button.
The printer network interface restarts and the
settings are enabled.
This completes the NetWare protocol settings.
Chapter 5
Using the Printer
in a Network
Environment
Chapter 7
Troubleshooting
Chapter 6
Operating the
Function Menu
Contents
5- 29
Index
‹ NetWare Settings (Windows)
Configuring the Computer for NetWare
Perform these settings on each computer after you have
selected the NetWare print service and protocol.
„ Connecting to a NetWare Network
Install the NetWare client software on all computers that
will perform printing, and the log onto either the NetWare
server or the tree. Refer to the NetWare manual or the
OS manual for the connection methods.
„ Installing the Printer Driver
To perform printing, the printer driver must be installed.
Install the driver according to directions from your
network administrator.
When you install the printer driver, be sure to select
Network printer and select the print queue that you
created with the NetWare print service settings.
„ Setting the Printer Port
Select Settings and then Printers from the Start menu,
and then select the printer icon. Next, select Properties
from the File menu. Select the Advanced sheet or the
Ports sheet, and then set the print queue that created the
print destination port using the NetWare print service
settings. (→ P.5-22)
Note
z This procedure is not required if you set the connection
destination of the printer during the installation of the
printer driver.
5- 30
TOP
トップ
Chapter 1
Basic Use
Chapter 2
Using Various Media
Chapter 3
Printing by Objective
Chapter 4
Maintenance
Chapter 5
Using the Printer
in a Network
Environment
Chapter 7
Troubleshooting
Chapter 6
Operating the
Function Menu
Contents
Index
‹ Printing with UNIX
TOP
トップ
Printing with UNIX
Using LPD to Print
This section describes printing with LPD.
1
2
Log on to a workstation as root.
Set up the spooling system.
z Settings Example Using Solaris 9:
Start the admintool utility.
Select Browse / Printers.
Select Edit / Add / Access to Printer.
Enter the Printer Name and Print Server name
according to the naming conventions.
Press the OK button.
z Setting Example Using Red Hat Linux:
Start the Printer Configuration utility on the
control panel.
If you are using a filter, select the filter.
If there is no filter for the printer, you can temporarily
select any filter, shut down the Printer Configuration
Utility, and then change the postscript.cfg file in the
spool directory so it matches your printer. For
details, refer to the Ghostscript manual.
Note
z The admintool utility is bundled with the OS. For
details of use, refer to the relevant OS manual.
z The above configuration procedures were examples.
The actual configuration procedure may vary
depending on your environment.
z This completes the printing settings.
Chapter 1
Basic Use
Chapter 2
Using Various Media
Chapter 3
Printing by Objective
Chapter 4
Maintenance
Chapter 5
Using the Printer
in a Network
Environment
Chapter 7
Troubleshooting
Select Add / Other UNIX (lpd) queue / OK.
Enter the desired printer name, printer IP
address or name, and “lp” in Printer Name,
Remote Host, and Remote Queue.
Chapter 6
Operating the
Function Menu
Contents
5- 31
Index
‹ Printing with UNIX
TOP
トップ
Using FTP to Print
1
2
3
Start the MS-DOS prompt or command prompt.
Chapter 1
Basic Use
If you are using UNIX, open the console screen.
Execute the following commands.
ftp <Printer IP Address>
Enter any user name.
Just press the Enter key without entering a
password.
You can now perform the following procedure.
To print a file:
Chapter 2
Using Various Media
Chapter 3
Printing by Objective
Chapter 4
Maintenance
put <filename to print>
Note
z Print the file in binary mode.
Chapter 5
Using the Printer
in a Network
Environment
Chapter 7
Troubleshooting
Chapter 6
Operating the
Function Menu
Contents
5- 32
Index
‹ Initializing the Network Settings
TOP
トップ
Initializing the Network Settings
Follow the procedure below to use the Web browser
(Remote UI) to restore all the network settings to the factory
default settings.
Note
z In addition to using the Web browser to restore the
default settings, you can also use GARO Device Setup
Utility or the printer operation panel to restore the
default network settings.
1
Start the Web Browser and enter the following URL
in the Location or Address box, then press the Enter
key.
http:// <Printer IP Address or name> /
2
Sample: http://XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX/
Select Administrator Mode and then click the Logon
button.
When Remote UI is started with the network card set
to the factory default settings, the English screen will
be displayed. Set Language to Japanese, select
Administrator Mode, and then press the Logon
button.
Chapter 1
Basic Use
Note
z If a password has been setup on the printer, enter the
password and then press the OK button. If a password
has not been setup, you do not need to enter a
password.
3
4
5
From the Device Manager menu on the left,
select Network.
Click the Reset to Default Settings button.
Verify the message then click the OK button.
All network information is restored to the default
settings.
Note
z When you initialize the network settings, the printer IP
address setting is changed to the factory default value
of (0.0.0.0), so the remote UI screen is not displayed
again in the browser. Set it through GARO Device
Setup Utility or printer operation panel if you set the
network settings.
Chapter 2
Using Various Media
Chapter 3
Printing by Objective
Chapter 4
Maintenance
Chapter 5
Using the Printer
in a Network
Environment
Chapter 7
Troubleshooting
Chapter 6
Operating the
Function Menu
Remote UI starts.
Contents
5- 33
Index
‹ List of Network Settings
TOP
トップ
List of Network Settings
If you are using a web browser (Remote UI), you can
change the network interface settings. The settings that can
be changed are described below.
„ General Settings
Item
Device Name
Location
Administrator
Phone
Comment
(E-mail)
Administrator
Password
Content
Device Name
(Range: 0 to 32 chars.)
Device location
(Range: 0 to 32 chars.)
Name of Administrator for
the device
(Range: 0 to 32 chars.)
Telephone number of the
Administrator
(Range: 0 to 32 chars.)
Administrator Comments
(Range: 0 to 32 chars.)
Device password
(Range: 0 to 15 chars.)
Initial Value
Blank
Blank
Chapter 1
Basic Use
Chapter 2
Using Various Media
Chapter 3
Printing by Objective
Chapter 4
Maintenance
Blank
Blank
Blank
Chapter 5
Using the Printer
in a Network
Environment
Chapter 7
Troubleshooting
Blank
Chapter 6
Operating the
Function Menu
Contents
5- 34
Index
‹ List of Network Settings
TOP
トップ
„ TCP/IP Settings
Item
Set the Address
Using DHCP
Set the Address
Using BOOTP
Set the Address
Using RARP
RAW Mode Bidirectional
Communication
Function
Performs
Dynamic Update
of DNS
Using the
Zeroconf
Function
IP Address
Subnet Mask
Gateway
Address
Primary DNS
Server Address
Secondary DNS
Server Address
DNS Host Name
5- 35
Content
Initial Value
Determines whether DHCP
is used to configure the IP
Off
address
Determines whether
BOOTP is used to configure
the IP address
Determines whether RARP
is used to configure the IP
address
Determines whether bidirectional communication
is used for RAW mode.
Item
DNS Domain
Name
Multicast DNS
Service Name
Content
Printer Domain Name
(Range: 0 to 64 chars.)
Printer Multicast DNS
Server Name
(Range: 1 to 63 chars.)
Initial Value
Blank
Océ
CS2044(x
xxxxx)
Chapter 1
Basic Use
Chapter 2
Using Various Media
Off
Off
Off
Chapter 3
Printing by Objective
Chapter 4
Maintenance
Determines Whether DNS
Server Registration Update
is Automatic.
Off
Chapter 5
Using the Printer
in a Network
Environment
Determines whether
Zeroconf is used.
On
Chapter 7
Troubleshooting
The IP address of the printer
The subnet mask of the printer
The gateway address of the
printer.
IP address of the primary
DNS server
IP address of the secondary
DNS server.
Printer Host Name
(Range: 1 to 63 chars.)
0.0.0.0
0.0.0.0
0.0.0.0
Chapter 6
Operating the
Function Menu
0.0.0.0
0.0.0.0
Contents
NB-15FB
xxxxxxxxx
xxx
Index
‹ List of Network Settings
TOP
トップ
„ NetWare Settings
Item
Frame Type
Content
The frame type used by
NetWare.
Initial Value
Off
Determines whether NCP
NCP Burst Mode burst mode is used. (Normally,
On
leave this setting on.)
The print service to use.
NDS
Print Service
(Only one print service can
PServer
be selected and enabled.)
Determines whether or not
If
Packet
to use packet signatures
Requested
Signature
(Normally leave set to If
by Server
Requested by Server)
Bindery PServer
Name of the NetWare file
File Server
server of the NetWare print
Blank
Name
server. (Range: 0 to 47 chars.)
The name of the NetWare
Print Server
print server in use.
Blank
Name
(Range: 0 to 47 chars.)
The password required by
Print Server
the print server setting.
Blank
Password
(0 to 20 chars.)
The time interval between
Polling Interval
job confirmations.
5
(Range: 1 to 15 sec.)
Item
RPrinter
Print Server
Name
Printer Number
The name of the NetWare
print server in use.
(Range: 0 to 47 chars.)
The number used for the printer
connection to the NetWare print
server. (Range: 0 to 15)
Initial Value
Chapter 1
Basic Use
Blank
0
NDS PServer
Tree Name
Context Name
Print Server
Name
Print Server
Password
Polling Interval
The name of the NDS tree
of the NetWare print server.
(Range: 0 to 32 chars.)
The name of the context of
the NetWare Print server.
(Range: 0 to 255 chars.)
The name of the NetWare
print server in use. (Range:
0 to 64 chars.)
The password required by
the print server setting. (0 to
20 chars.)
The time interval between
job confirmations. (Range:
1 to 255 sec.)
Print Server
Name
The name of the NetWare
print server in use. (Range:
0 to 64 chars.)
The number used for the
printer connection to the
NetWare print server.
(Range: 0 to 254)
Chapter 2
Using Various Media
Chapter 3
Printing by Objective
Blank
Blank
Blank
Blank
Chapter 4
Maintenance
Chapter 5
Using the Printer
in a Network
Environment
Chapter 7
Troubleshooting
5
Chapter 6
Operating the
Function Menu
NPrinter
Printer Number
5- 36
Content
Blank
Contents
0
Index
‹ Software Applications Used to Configure Network Settings
TOP
トップ
Software Applications Used to Configure Network Settings
Use the following listed software to perform the network settings.
Type of Setting
GARO Device
Setup Utility
Web Browser
(Remote UI)
ARP/PING
command
Printer
Operation Panel
Setting the Printer IP Address
(→ P.5-6)
Configuring the TCP/IP Protocol
Settings (→ P.5-14)
Chapter 2
Using Various Media
Chapter 3
Printing by Objective
*1
*1
Chapter 4
Maintenance
Setting Up NetWare Print Service
(→ P.5-22)
Setting NetWare Protocol
(→ P.5-26)
Chapter 1
Basic Use
*2
*3
*1. Only the following can be set: 1 IP address, subnet mask, default gateway, DHCP, BOOTP, and RARP.
*2. Only the following can be set: frame type.
Chapter 5
Using the Printer
in a Network
Environment
Chapter 7
Troubleshooting
Chapter 6
Operating the
Function Menu
Contents
5- 37
Index
TOP
Chapter 6
Operating the Function Menu
You can print the items that have been checked.
Checking the Printer Function Menu ..........................................................7-2
Cutter Functions .........................................................................................7-3
When You Need to Cut Media ............................................................................... 7-3
Replacing the Cutter .............................................................................................. 7-3
Chapter 1
Basic Use
Chapter 2
Using Various Media
Media Functions .........................................................................................7-4
Changing the Media Type Settings ....................................................................... 7-4
Printing Cleanly to the Manuscript Edges .............................................................. 7-5
Ink Functions ..............................................................................................7-6
Replacing an Ink Tank During a Print Job ............................................................. 7-6
Chapter 3
Printing by Objective
Print Quality Functions ...............................................................................7-7
Determining if the Printhead is Blocked ................................................................. 7-7
When the Printhead Nozzles Are Clogged ............................................................ 7-7
Correcting Image Offset ........................................................................................ 7-8
Correcting Horizontal Banding in Images .............................................................. 7-8
Printing to an Accurate Length .............................................................................. 7-9
Printer Information Functions ...................................................................7-10
Checking the Print Job History ............................................................................ 7-10
Checking the Printer Settings Information ........................................................... 7-10
Checking the Media Type Settings Information ................................................... 7-11
Checking the Printer Functions Menu ................................................................. 7-11
Chapter 4
Maintenance
Chapter 5
Using the Printer
in a Network
Environment
Chapter 7
Troubleshooting
Chapter 6
Operating the
Function Menu
Contents
6- 1
How to Use the Chapter
Contents Pages
→ Before clicking the Start Print button
Index
‹ Checking the Printer Function Menu
TOP
Checking the Printer Function Menu
This chapter explains the operation method and the example of the message of the printer display about the function often
used on the printer menu according to the purpose. The message for the required operations and displayed on the printer
display is shown in figure.
Online
Online
Online
Offline
a
Online
MAIN MENU
b
System Setup
Change Cutter
c
Yes
OK
f
No
This described the operation that selects the
menu with pressing [ ] or [ ] button.
OK
g
Open UpperCover
This described the advanced operation to the
following menu with pressing [ ] button once.
If you want to return to the main menu, you
can use [ ] button.
This described the operation that executes
displayed set value/item with pressing OK
button.
Opening the Top Cover and Replacing the Cutter
h
Closing the Top Cover
d
a
e
Reset Cut Count
This describes the operation that pushes an
Online button once. If you press the Online
button while operating the menu, the
proceeding operation, which is not set due to
not pressing the OK button, will be canceled
and returned to Online mode (or Offline for
loading the media).
Stop/Eject
OK
Online
Resetting
Online
Stop/Eject
This describes the operation that cancels
execution with pressing Stop/Eject button.
This described setting value of the menu item.
This describes the indicated message which is
shown through the operation.
This described the procedure that should be
done excluding the menu operation not using
operation panel.
6- 2
Chapter 1
Basic Use
Chapter 2
Using Various Media
Chapter 3
Printing by Objective
Chapter 4
Maintenance
Chapter 5
Using the Printer
in a Network
Environment
Chapter 7
Troubleshooting
Chapter 6
Operating the
Function Menu
Contents
Index
‹ Cutter Functions
TOP
Cutter Functions
Chapter 1
Basic Use
The following cutter operations are provided in the printer function menus.
When You Need to Cut Media
Execute Force Cutting on the operation panel when you
need to use the printer cutter to cut the media cleanly.
Replacing the Cutter
Execute Change Cutter on the operation panel when you
need to replace the cutter. The count for the number of
sheets cut is reset after the cutter has been replaced.
Chapter 2
Using Various Media
Online
Chapter 3
Printing by Objective
Online
Online
Offline
Online
Online
Offline
MAIN MENU
Online
Chapter 4
Maintenance
MAIN MENU
Force Cutting
System Setup
Yes
No
OK
Chapter 5
Using the Printer
in a Network
Environment
Change Cutter
OK
Online
Cutting..
Yes
No
OK
Online
OK
Open UpperCover
Chapter 7
Troubleshooting
Opening the Top Cover and Replacing the Cutter
Closing the Top Cover
Reset Cut Count
Stop/Eject
Chapter 6
Operating the
Function Menu
OK
Online
Resetting
Online
6- 3
Contents
Index
‹ Media Functions
TOP
Media Functions
Chapter 1
Basic Use
The following media settings are provided in the printer function menus.
Changing the Media Type Settings
You can change the settings for each media type to match
the print results and finish that you want.
Chapter 2
Using Various Media
Online
Online
Offline
Note
z You can return to the previous menu with pressing OK
button.
z Online is displayed if you press the OK button.
Online
MAIN MENU
Med.Detail Set.
(Media Type)
Plain Paper, Plain Paper
(High Quality), Recycled
Coated Paper, Coated
Paper, Heavyweight Coated
Paper, Extra Heavyweight
Coated Paper, Glossy Photo
Paper, Semi-Glossy Photo
Paper, Proofing Paper, CAD
Plain Paper, CAD Tracing
Paper, Special 1 to 5
Drying_Time
[Setting Values]
OK
Scan Wait Time
[Setting Values]
OK
Off, 30sec., 1min.,
3min., 5min., 10min.,
30min., 60min.
Off, 1sec., 3sec.,
5sec., 7sec.,
9sec.
NearEnd RllMrgn
[Setting Values]
20mm,5mm
OK
Far End RllMrgn
[Setting Values]
Online
OK
Online
Chapter 3
Printing by Objective
Chapter 4
Maintenance
Chapter 5
Using the Printer
in a Network
Environment
Chapter 7
Troubleshooting
Chapter 6
Operating the
Function Menu
10mm,5mm
Contents
Continued Next Page
6- 4
Index
‹ Media Functions
TOP
Start Here
Media Thickness
[Setting Values]
OK
Thick, Standard, Thin
VacuumStrngth
[Setting Values]
Weak, Standard,
Strong, Strongest
OK
Online
Standard Cutter
[Setting Values]
OK
Printing Cleanly to the Manuscript Edges
When printing on standard sizes, the images at the top,
bottom, left, and right margins may occasionally be cut, but
if Keep Media Size is turned on, then the image will be
printed within the recommended area, with a 5-mm border
at all edges. However, the length of the printout will
increase by size of the top and bottom margins.
Offline
Online
MAIN MENU
Cut Speed
[Setting Values]
Keep Media Size
CutDustReduct.
Off, On
Online
OK
Online
Correct Smear
[Setting Values]
Chapter 4
Maintenance
System Setup
Standard, Fast
OK
[Setting Values]
Off, On
Chapter 2
Using Various Media
Chapter 3
Printing by Objective
Online
Disable,
Enable
Chapter 1
Basic Use
Off
* Printing Without Cutting Off
OK
the Top, Bottom Margins
On
* Printing on Standard
Media Sizes
Chapter 5
Using the Printer
in a Network
Environment
Chapter 7
Troubleshooting
OK
Skew Check Lv.
[Setting Values]
OK
OK
Standard,
Loose,Off
Chapter 6
Operating the
Function Menu
Width Detection
[Setting Values]
OK
Online
Return Defaults
[Setting Values]
Online
6- 5
On, Off,
Media Size?
OK
Contents
No, Yes
Index
‹ Ink Functions
TOP
Ink Functions
The following ink operations are provided in the printer function menus.
Replacing an Ink Tank During a Print Job
Execute Rep. Ink Tank on the operation panel when you need to replace an ink tank during a print job.
Chapter 1
Basic Use
Chapter 2
Using Various Media
Printing
Online
Chapter 3
Printing by Objective
Pause
Online
MAIN MENU
Rep. Ink Tank
Yes
Chapter 4
Maintenance
No
OK
OK
Open RightCover
Open the right back cover and replace the ink tank.
Close the right back cover.
Chapter 5
Using the Printer
in a Network
Environment
Chapter 7
Troubleshooting
Online
Printing
Chapter 6
Operating the
Function Menu
Contents
6- 6
Index
‹ Print Quality Functions
TOP
Print Quality Functions
You can use the printer function menus to confirm the print quality settings and change the settings to recover poor printing
results.
Chapter 1
Basic Use
Determining if the Printhead is Blocked
You can print a Nozzle Check to check the condition of the
printheads.
Chapter 2
Using Various Media
Online
Online
Offline
Online
MAIN MENU
Test Print
When the Printhead Nozzles Are Clogged
If the Nozzle Check reveals that the printheads are blocked,
you can execute Head Cleaning to clear the blockage and
recover operation of the printer. Head Cleaning A is for
normal, everyday printhead cleaning and Head Cleaning B
is used for thorough head cleaning. Head Cleaning B
consumes a large amount of ink, so use Head Cleaning A
unless Head Cleaning B is required.
Chapter 3
Printing by Objective
Chapter 4
Maintenance
Online
Online
Offline
Nozzle Check
Chapter 5
Using the Printer
in a Network
Environment
Online
MAIN MENU
OK
Online
Printing
Head Cleaning
Online
Chapter 7
Troubleshooting
Head Cleaning A
Head Cleaning B
OK
Online
Cleaning..
Chapter 6
Operating the
Function Menu
Online
Contents
6- 7
Index
‹ Print Quality Functions
TOP
Correcting Image Offset
If vertical lines are bent, or when colors are faded and
uneven, execute Auto Head Adj. to correct the position of
the printhead. The printer prints a printhead adjustment
pattern and read the pattern as it prints to correct the
position of the printhead automatically.
Correcting Horizontal Banding in Images
Execute Adjust Band to adjust the amount of media feed
and correct undesirable horizontal banding in printouts. The
printer prints a media feed adjustment pattern and scans it
as it prints to correct the amount of media feed
automatically.
Online
Execute Adjust Band, after Feed Priority is set to Band
Joint, if you want to adjust the amount of media feed.
Online
Offline
Online
Online
MAIN MENU
Chapter 3
Printing by Objective
Offline
Chapter 4
Maintenance
Online
MAIN MENU
Adjust Printer
Auto Head Adj.
Advanced Adj.
Standard Adj.
* Adjusting Gaps Between
Odd/Even Nozzles, Printing Direction, Color Gaps
* Adjusting Print Direction
Yes
Feed Priority
Chapter 5
Using the Printer
in a Network
Environment
Band Joint
OK
Adjust Band
No
OK
OK
Standard Adj.
* Standard Feed Adjustment
Yes
Printing
OK
Online
Note
z If the image appears broken even after performing
Auto Head Adj., perform printhead position adjustment
manually to fine adjust the value for printhead
adjustment.
6- 8
Chapter 2
Using Various Media
Online
Adjust Printer
Online
Chapter 1
Basic Use
Online
Printing
Advanced Adj.
Chapter 7
Troubleshooting
* High-Precision Feed Adjustment
No
OK
Chapter 6
Operating the
Function Menu
Online
Contents
Index
‹ Print Quality Functions
TOP
Printing to an Accurate Length
Execute Feed Priority → Print Length to set the print job
priority to length when the length of the printout is
important. This setting, however, may cause horizontal
banding to appear in the prints. To set the priority to print
quality, set the Band Joint.
Chapter 1
Basic Use
Chapter 2
Using Various Media
Online
Chapter 3
Printing by Objective
Online
Offline
Online
MAIN MENU
Chapter 4
Maintenance
Adjust Printer
Feed Priority
Online
Online
Print Length
* Prints on the selected
media size
Band Joint
OK
* Gives quality priority in printing
Chapter 5
Using the Printer
in a Network
Environment
Chapter 7
Troubleshooting
Chapter 6
Operating the
Function Menu
Contents
6- 9
Index
‹ Printer Information Functions
TOP
Printer Information Functions
You can use the printer function menus to print information about print jobs and printer settings for verification.
Chapter 1
Basic Use
Checking the Print Job History
Execute Print Job Log to print information about print jobs
so you can confirm how much ink was used for the jobs and
other important information.
Chapter 2
Using Various Media
Checking the Printer Settings Information
Execute Status Print to print basic information about the
printer and the settings of each function for verification.
Online
Online
Chapter 3
Printing by Objective
Online
Offline
Online
Offline
Online
MAIN MENU
Online
MAIN MENU
Test Print
Chapter 4
Maintenance
Test Print
Status Print
Print Job Log
OK
OK
Online
Printing
Online
Printing
Online
Online
Chapter 5
Using the Printer
in a Network
Environment
Chapter 7
Troubleshooting
Chapter 6
Operating the
Function Menu
Contents
6- 10
Index
‹ Printer Information Functions
TOP
Checking the Media Type Settings Information
Execute Media Details to print the settings for each media
type for verification.
Checking the Printer Functions Menu
Execute Menu Map to view the menu items and structure of
the printer function menus.
Online
Online
Online
Chapter 2
Using Various Media
Online
Offline
Offline
Online
Chapter 1
Basic Use
Online
MAIN MENU
MAIN MENU
Test Print
Test Print
Media Details
Menu Map
OK
Online
OK
Online
Printing
Online
Chapter 3
Printing by Objective
Chapter 4
Maintenance
Printing
Online
Chapter 5
Using the Printer
in a Network
Environment
Chapter 7
Troubleshooting
Chapter 6
Operating the
Function Menu
Contents
6- 11
Index
TOP
Chapter 7 Troubleshooting
You can print the items that have been checked.
Chapter 1
Basic Use
Message Is Displayed ................................................................................6-2
Operation Panel Message List .............................................................................. 6-3
Media Messages ................................................................................................... 6-4
Ink Messages ...................................................................................................... 6-12
Other Messages .................................................................................................. 6-15
Chapter 2
Using Various Media
When You Cannot Print ............................................................................6-20
Printing Does Not Start ........................................................................................ 6-20
Printing Halts During Print Job ............................................................................ 6-24
Cannot Print on a Network .................................................................................. 6-25
Chapter 3
Printing by Objective
Unexpected Printing Results ....................................................................6-28
Print quality trouble .............................................................................................. 6-29
Abnormal Content ................................................................................................ 6-32
Other Problems ................................................................................................... 6-35
Chapter 4
Maintenance
Removing Media Jams .............................................................................6-36
Removing a Roll Media Jam ................................................................................ 6-36
Removing a Cut Sheet Jam ................................................................................. 6-39
Updating the Firmware .............................................................................6-42
Obtaining the Firmware Update ........................................................................... 6-42
Confirming the Firmware Version ........................................................................ 6-42
Reinstalling the USB or IEEE1394 Driver ................................................6-43
Uninstalling the Software ..........................................................................6-44
Uninstalling the Printer Driver .............................................................................. 6-44
Uninstalling GARO Status Monitor ...................................................................... 6-44
Uninstalling the GARO Device Setup Utility ........................................................ 6-45
Chapter 5
Using the Printer
in a Network
Environment
Chapter 7
Troubleshooting
Chapter 6
Operating the
Function Menu
Contents
7- 1
How to Use the Chapter
Contents Pages
→ Before clicking the Start Print button
Index
‹ Message Is Displayed
TOP
Message Is Displayed
When the printer requires attention, messages are displayed on the operation panel and in the GARO Status Monitor
(Windows).
• Operation panel
• GARO Status Monitor (Windows)
Chapter 1
Basic Use
Chapter 2
Using Various Media
Information Power
Data
Message
ERROR
E02010
Media Skewed
Cleaning
(3 sec.)
Stop/Eject
(1 sec.)
Chapter 3
Printing by Objective
Online
Offline
Menu
Refer to the following pages for more information about
what to do when you see messages displayed.
Read the displayed message and perform the required
procedure.
Note
z The printer status cannot be displayed with a USB connection to Mac OS X.
z If the GARO Status Monitor is not installed on Windows, look at the message on the printer operation panel.
Chapter 4
Maintenance
Chapter 5
Using the Printer
in a Network
Environment
Chapter 7
Troubleshooting
Chapter 6
Operating the
Function Menu
Contents
7- 2
Index
‹ Message Is Displayed
TOP
Operation Panel Message List
Media Messages
Ink Messages
Other Messages
Load Roll Media
Check Ink Level
Remove RollMedia
Rep. Ink Tank
Close UpperCover / Close
RightCover / Close CRG Cover
Reset Lever
End of Roll
No Bk/PC/C/PM/M/Y Ink Tank
Check Head Hght L/M/H → L/M/H
RllMed.Shortage Replace RllMed
Check Bk/PC/C/PM/M/Y Ink Tank
Turn Power Off!!
Load Cut Sheet
Not Enough Ink
No Printhead
Remove Cut Sheet
Ink level ?
Printhead Error!
Eject Cut Sheet
Remove Ink Tank
Check Printhead
Incorrect Media
MTCart Full Soon
Scale Read Error
Med.SizeNoMatch
Replace MT-Cart.
Mist Full Soon
Illegal Med Pos
No MT-Cartridge
Mist Count Error
NoBorderlessData
Check MT-Cart.
Cut.Move Timeout
No borderless
CutUnitFuseBlown
Size undetected
Adj. Failed
Media Skewed
Incorrect Value
Media Too Large
ERROR nnnnnn (n = Numbers)
Media Too Small
Media Jam
Chapter 1
Basic Use
Chapter 2
Using Various Media
Chapter 3
Printing by Objective
Chapter 4
Maintenance
Chapter 5
Using the Printer
in a Network
Environment
Chapter 7
Troubleshooting
Chapter 6
Operating the
Function Menu
Cut Failed
Drying..
Feed Limit..
Contents
Cut by Stop key
7- 3
Index
‹ Message Is Displayed
Media Messages
Load Roll Media
Cause 1:
TOP
Remove RollMedia
Cause 1:
The printer is waiting for you to remove the
ejected roll media.
The printer is waiting for you to load the roll
media.
Chapter 1
Basic Use
Chapter 2
Using Various Media
Chapter 3
Printing by Objective
Solution 1: Load roll media of the type and size specified to
the printer using the next step. (→ P.2-10)
1. Load roll media of the specified size and
type.
2. Select the media type.
3. Select length if the media remaining
detection feature for roll media is ON.
4. Press the OK button.
Solution 2: Press and hold the Stop/Eject button for at least
1 second to stop printing.
Solution 1: Perform the procedure described below to
remove the roll.
1. Open the top cover.
2. Lift the release lever, and remove the roll
media.
3. Lower the release lever.
4. Close the top cover.
Chapter 4
Maintenance
Chapter 5
Using the Printer
in a Network
Environment
Chapter 7
Troubleshooting
Chapter 6
Operating the
Function Menu
Contents
7- 4
Index
‹ Message Is Displayed
End of Roll
Cause 1:
The roll media has run out.
TOP
RllMed.Shortage
Replace RllMed
Cause 1:
Data received is to print a size longer than the
remaining roll media.
Chapter 1
Basic Use
Chapter 2
Using Various Media
Solution 1: Do the procedure below to load the same size
and type of roll media in use. (→ P.2-10)
1. Load size and type of roll in use.
2. Select the media type.
3. Select length if the media remaining
detection feature for roll media is ON.
4. Press the OK button.
Chapter 3
Printing by Objective
Solution 1: Load new roll media to the printer using the
following procedure. (→ P.2-10)
1. Load a new roll media of the same size and
type of roll in use.
2. Select the media type.
3. Select length if the media remaining
detection feature for roll media is ON.
4. Press the OK button.
Solution 2: Press and hold the Stop/Eject button for at least
1 second to stop printing.
Chapter 4
Maintenance
Chapter 5
Using the Printer
in a Network
Environment
Chapter 7
Troubleshooting
Chapter 6
Operating the
Function Menu
Contents
7- 5
Index
‹ Message Is Displayed
TOP
Load Cut Sheet
Remove Cut Sheet
Cause 1:
Cause 1:
The printer is waiting for the roll media to be
loaded.
The printer is waiting for you to remove the
ejected sheets.
Chapter 1
Basic Use
Chapter 2
Using Various Media
Chapter 3
Printing by Objective
Solution 1: Load cut sheets of the type and size specified
to the printer using the next step. (→ P.2-22)
1. Load cut sheets of the specified size and
type.
2. Select the media type.
3. Press the OK button.
Solution 2: Press and hold the Stop/Eject button for at least
1 second to stop printing.
Solution 1: Perform the procedure described below to
remove the sheets. (→ P.2-25)
1. Open the top cover.
2. Lift the release lever, and remove the cut
sheets.
3. Lower the release lever.
4. Close the top cover.
Chapter 4
Maintenance
Chapter 5
Using the Printer
in a Network
Environment
Chapter 7
Troubleshooting
Chapter 6
Operating the
Function Menu
Contents
7- 6
Index
‹ Message Is Displayed
TOP
Eject Cut Sheet
Incorrect Media
Cause 1:
Cause 1:
The printer received print data for the roll media
while a cut sheet was loaded.
The media type specified by the printer does
not match the set value for the media in the
media feed source.
[Media Type]
Glossy
Photo Paper
Solution 1: Perform the procedure described below to
remove the sheets. (→ P.2-25)
1. Open the top cover.
2. Lift the release lever, and remove the cut
sheets.
3. Lower the release lever.
4. Close the top cover.
5. Load the roll.
Solution 2: Press and hold the [5] or [6] button for at least 1
second to stop printing.
The specified
media type
when loaded
Printer driver
Chapter 1
Basic Use
Chapter 2
Using Various Media
Chapter 3
Printing by Objective
Chapter 4
Maintenance
Solution 1: Perform the procedure below to correct the
Media Type setting on the printer.
1. Confirm the type of media loaded for the
print job.
2. Use the printer operation panel to set the
media type. (→ P.2-17)
Chapter 5
Using the Printer
in a Network
Environment
Solution 2: Perform the procedure below to correct the
Media Type setting on the printer.
1. Press and hold the Stop/Eject button for at
least 1 second to stop printing.
2. Use the printer driver to set the media type
so the value matches the loaded media
type, then re-start the print job.
Chapter 6
Operating the
Function Menu
Chapter 7
Troubleshooting
Contents
7- 7
Index
‹ Message Is Displayed
TOP
Med.SizeNoMatch
Illegal Med Pos
Cause 1:
Cause 1:
The width of the loaded roll media does not
permit borderless printing.
Solution 1: Load roll media with a width that permits
borderless printing. (→ P.2-10)
The position of the loaded media is incorrect.
Solution 1: Load 10", 14", 16", JIS B2, or ARCH24 roll
paper.
Solution 2: Re-set the roll paper correctly on the roll holder.
(→ P.2-10)
Cause 2:
Data for a sheet size that does not permit
borderless printing has been received.
Solution 1: Perform the procedure below to set a paper
width that permits borderless printing.
1. Press and hold the Stop/Eject button for at
least 1 second to stop printing.
2. Change the Roll Width to a size that permits
borderless printing using the printer driver,
and then restart the print job.
NoBorderlessData
Cause 1:
Data that does not permit borderless printing
has been received.
Solution 1: Press the Online button to continue printing
with borders.
7- 8
Solution 2: Perform the procedure below to correct the
Media Type setting on the printer.
1. Press and hold the Stop/Eject button for at
least 1 second to stop printing.
2. Use the printer driver to confirm that the
dimensions of the print job match the
enlargement settings, then re-start the print
job.
Chapter 1
Basic Use
Chapter 2
Using Various Media
Chapter 3
Printing by Objective
Chapter 4
Maintenance
Chapter 5
Using the Printer
in a Network
Environment
Chapter 7
Troubleshooting
Chapter 6
Operating the
Function Menu
Contents
Index
‹ Message Is Displayed
TOP
No borderless
Cause 1:
The printer received data that cannot be used
for borderless printing.
Solution 1: Use the following procedure to correct the
Media Type setting on the printer.
1. Press and hold the Stop/Eject button for at
least 1 second to stop printing.
2. Check the dimensions of the print data and
the enlargement/reduction settings in the
printer driver, then reprint the job.
Cause 2:
The misalignment detection function is off.
Solution 1: Set the accuracy Skew Check Lv. in the media
type you are printing on to Standard or Loose,
and then reload the paper.
Chapter 1
Basic Use
Chapter 2
Using Various Media
Chapter 3
Printing by Objective
Chapter 4
Maintenance
Chapter 5
Using the Printer
in a Network
Environment
Chapter 7
Troubleshooting
Chapter 6
Operating the
Function Menu
Contents
7- 9
Index
‹ Message Is Displayed
TOP
Size undetected
Media Skewed
Cause 1:
Cause 1:
The media has shifted out of the correct load
position, or the media is curled.
The loaded media is skewed.
Chapter 1
Basic Use
Chapter 2
Using Various Media
Chapter 3
Printing by Objective
Solution 1: Set the media correctly. (→ P.2-10, P.2-22)
Cause 2:
The printer interior is dusty or dirty.
Solution 1: Open the top cover and clean inside the printer.
(→ P.4-12)
Solution 1: If using roll media, perform the procedure
described below to reload the roll media.
(→ P.2-10)
1. Open the top cover.
2. Press the release lever to the rear to open.
3. Align the right edge of the roll media so that
it is parallel to the right paper alignment line,
then pull the release lever to the front to
close.
4. Close the top cover.
5. Select the Media Type and press the OK
button.
Solution 2: Perform the procedure below if you are using
cut sheets. (→ P.2-22)
1. Open the top cover.
2. Press the release lever to the rear to open.
3. Align the right edge of the cut sheet with the
right side, align the leading edge of the
sheet inside the printer, then pull the release
lever toward you to close.
4. Close the top cover.
7- 10
Chapter 4
Maintenance
Chapter 5
Using the Printer
in a Network
Environment
Chapter 7
Troubleshooting
Chapter 6
Operating the
Function Menu
Contents
Index
‹ Message Is Displayed
TOP
Media Too Large
Cut Failed
Cause 1:
Cause 1:
The loaded media is larger than any media size
allowed for loading in the printer.
Leading edge of the roll media not detected
after cutting.
Solution 1: Set the correct size media then try again.
(→ P.2-10, P.2-22)
Solution 1: Perform the procedure described below to
remove the jammed sheet. (→ P.2-18)
1. Open the top cover.
2. Use a cutter to cut the roll media manually,
and then remove the sheet.
3. Lift the release lever.
4. Reload the roll media, and then lower the
release lever.
5. Close the top cover.
Cause 2:
Drying..
Solution 1: Set the correct size media then try again.
(→ P.2-10, P.2-22)
Media Too Small
Cause 1:
The loaded media is smaller than any media
size allowed for loading in the printer.
Media size smaller than the required size was
set for printing the print pattern or the nozzle
check pattern.
Solution 1: Load A3 size media or larger for printing.
Media Jam
Cause 1:
Cause 1:
The printer is waiting for the ink to dry on the
printout.
Solution 1: Wait until the printed sheet ejects automatically.
Feed Limit..
Media has jammed in the printer.
ERROR
E02E01
Turn Power Off!!
Cause 1:
You pressed the [5] button on the operation
panel to feed more media than allowed.
Solution 1: Remove your finger from the [5] button to stop
the paper feed.
Cut by Stop key
Cause 1:
7- 11
Solution 1: Perform the procedure described below to
remove the jammed sheet. (→ P.7-36)
1. Switch the printer off.
2. Remove the jammed sheet.
3. Turn ON the power supply.
Chapter 1
Basic Use
Chapter 2
Using Various Media
Chapter 3
Printing by Objective
Chapter 4
Maintenance
Chapter 5
Using the Printer
in a Network
Environment
Chapter 7
Troubleshooting
Chapter 6
Operating the
Function Menu
The loaded media cannot be cut automatically.
Solution 1: The printer stops after the print job ends to
protect the printing surface. Support the printout
with your hand to prevent it from falling into the
output stacker, and then press the Stop/Eject
button to cut the printout.
Contents
Index
‹ Message Is Displayed
Ink Messages
Check Ink Level
Cause 1:
TOP
No Bk/PC/C/PM/M/Y Ink Tank
Cause 1:
The ink tank of the displayed color is not
installed.
Chapter 1
Basic Use
Ink in ink tank is running low.
BK PC C PM M
Y
Chapter 2
Using Various Media
Chapter 3
Printing by Objective
Solution 1: Obtain a new ink tank. If a long print job is in
progress, or if you need to print a job of many
sheets, you should replace the ink tank with a
new one.
Rep. Ink Tank
Cause 1:
Ink has run out.
Chapter 4
Maintenance
Solution1 Install correctly the ink tank named in the
message. (→ P.4-2)
Cause 2:
A problem has occurred with the ink tank
indicated on the display.
Solution 1: Replace with a new ink tank. (→ P.4-2)
Chapter 5
Using the Printer
in a Network
Environment
Chapter 7
Troubleshooting
Chapter 6
Operating the
Function Menu
Solution 1: Open the right back cover and replace the ink
tank color that is displayed flashing on the
printer operation panel with a new ink tank. (→
P.4-2)
7- 12
Contents
Index
‹ Message Is Displayed
TOP
Check Bk/PC/C/PM/M/Y Ink Tank
Not Enough Ink
Cause 1:
Cause 1:
The ink tank indicated by the color on the
display cannot be used with this printer, or an
empty tank was installed.
You cannot execute Head Cleaning B, print, or
use any other function that uses ink because
the remaining ink level is low.
Chapter 1
Basic Use
Chapter 2
Using Various Media
Chapter 3
Printing by Objective
Solution 1: Install correctly the ink tank of the color named
in the message. (→ P.4-2)
Important
z The ink may mix if you install an incorrect ink tank. If
the ink does not eject properly as a result of installing
the wrong ink tank, or if the images are very poor
quality, perform the Move Printer operation, and then
install new ink tanks. (→ P.4-34)
Cause 2:
A problem has occurred with the ink tank
indicated on the display.
Solution 1: Replace with a new ink tank. (→ P.4-2)
Solution 1: Replace the ink tank where the ink level is low.
(→ P.4-2)
Ink level ?
Cause 1:
The ink level detection function is turned OFF.
Solution 1: Every time printing is performed, this message
is displayed and the printer goes offline. Press
the Online button to continue printing.
Solution 2: To retrieve the ink level display, replace with the
ink tanks specified for use with this printer.
Chapter 4
Maintenance
Chapter 5
Using the Printer
in a Network
Environment
Chapter 7
Troubleshooting
Chapter 6
Operating the
Function Menu
Contents
7- 13
Index
‹ Message Is Displayed
TOP
Remove Ink Tank
Replace MT-Cart.
Cause 1:
Cause 1:
While the Move Printer message is displayed,
the right back cover is closed without removing
the ink tanks.
Maintenance cartridge is full.
Solution 1: Replace the maintenance cartridge after
stopping the print job. (→ P.4-15)
Solution 1: Remove the ink tank.
No MT-Cartridge
MTCart Full Soon
Cause 1:
Maintenance cartridge is full.
Solution 1: The current print job can continue. Obtain a
new Maintenance cartridge.
Cause 1:
Chapter 1
Basic Use
Chapter 2
Using Various Media
A maintenance cartridge is not installed.
Solution 1: Install a maintenance cartridge. (→ P.4-15)
Chapter 3
Printing by Objective
Check MT-Cart.
Cause 1:
The maintenance cartridge installed is either
used (full) or is a maintenance cartridge that
cannot be used with this printer.
Solution 1: Install a new maintenance cartridge intended
for use with this printer. (→ P.4-15)
Chapter 4
Maintenance
Chapter 5
Using the Printer
in a Network
Environment
Chapter 7
Troubleshooting
Chapter 6
Operating the
Function Menu
Contents
7- 14
Index
‹ Message Is Displayed
Other Messages
Close UpperCover / Close RightCover / Close CRG Cover
Cause 1:
The cover that is displayed is open.
Solution1 Close the cover named in display.
Reset Lever
Cause 1:
The release lever is up.
Solution 1: Lower the release lever.
TOP
Check Head Hght L/M/H → L/M/H
Cause 1:
The current height of the printhead (displayed
at the left end of the bottom display line) is not
the appropriate height (displayed at the right
end of the bottom display line) for printing on
the type of media loaded for the print job.
Solution 1: Confirm the height (H/M/L) named at the right
end of the bottom display line, and then do the
procedure below to adjust the height of the
printhead.
1. Press the Online button to bring the printer
online.
2. Press and hold the [3] or [4] button for at
least 1 second to move the carriage to the
center.
3. Open the top cover.
4. Set the printhead height adjustment lever to
the correct position for the media.
5. Close the top cover.
Chapter 1
Basic Use
Chapter 2
Using Various Media
Chapter 3
Printing by Objective
Chapter 4
Maintenance
Chapter 5
Using the Printer
in a Network
Environment
Chapter 7
Troubleshooting
Chapter 6
Operating the
Function Menu
Contents
7- 15
Index
‹ Message Is Displayed
TOP
Turn Power Off!!
Cause 1:
The tape inside the top cover or the belt stopper
have not been removed.
Solution 2: If the message appears again after doing the
procedure above, read the content of the
message and write down the first line, turn OFF
the printer, and then contact a Océ service
center.
Chapter 1
Basic Use
Chapter 2
Using Various Media
Chapter 3
Printing by Objective
Solution 1: Turn OFF the printer, open the top cover,
remove the tape and belt stopper, and then
press the Power button. (→ Quick Start Guide)
Cause 2:
Media has jammed in the printer.
ERROR
E02E01
Turn Power Off!!
Solution 1: Turn OFF the printer and remove the jammed
sheet, reset the media, and then turn ON the
printer again. (→ P.7-36)
Cause 3:
The printer has malfunctioned.
Solution 1: Turn OFF the printer, wait for 3 seconds min.,
and then turn ON the printer again.
7- 16
Chapter 4
Maintenance
Chapter 5
Using the Printer
in a Network
Environment
Chapter 7
Troubleshooting
Chapter 6
Operating the
Function Menu
Contents
Index
‹ Message Is Displayed
TOP
No Printhead
Check Printhead
Cause1
Cause1
The printhead is not installed.
Solution 1: Install the printhead. (→ P.4-23)
The printhead installed cannot be used with this
printer.
Printhead Error!
Solution 1: Install the printhead for this printer.
(→ P.4-23)
Cause1
Cause 2:
The printhead has malfunctioned.
Printhead abnormal.
Solution 1: Turn OFF the printer, wait for 3 seconds min.,
and then turn ON the printer again.
Solution 1: Open the top cover. If the carriage is out,
replace the printhead. (→ P.4-22)
Solution 2: If the message appears again after doing the
procedure above, read the content of the
message and write down the first line, turn OFF
the printer, and then contact a Océ service
center.
Solution 2: If the carriage is not installed, close the top
cover, press the Online button, select Replace
P.head, and then replace the printhead.
(→ P.4-22)
Chapter 1
Basic Use
Chapter 2
Using Various Media
Chapter 3
Printing by Objective
Chapter 4
Maintenance
Chapter 5
Using the Printer
in a Network
Environment
Chapter 7
Troubleshooting
Chapter 6
Operating the
Function Menu
Contents
7- 17
Index
‹ Message Is Displayed
TOP
Scale Read Error
Mist Count Error
Cause 1:
Cause 1:
The carriage has malfunctioned.
Solution 1: Open the top cover and make sure a foreign
object has not fallen into the printer.
Solution 2: Turn OFF the printer, wait for 3 seconds min.,
and then turn ON the printer again.
Solution 3: If the message appears again after doing the
procedure above, read the content of the
message and write down the first line, turn OFF
the printer, and then contact a Océ service
center.
Printer ink mist processing limit has been
exceeded.
Solution 1: Write the message displayed on the top line of
the printer display on a memo, and then turn
OFF the power supply, and consult your Océ
customer service center.
Chapter 2
Using Various Media
Cut.Move Timeout
Chapter 3
Printing by Objective
Cause 1:
The optional cutter unit (Round cutter) is not
moving.
Mist Full Soon
Solution 1: Open the top cover, and remove the foreign
object from the optional cutter.
Cause 1:
Cause 2:
The printer ink mist processing has become full.
(Just before the following “Mist Count Error” is
displayed.)
Solution 1: The current print job can continue. If performing
banner printing or borderless printing, the print
job may stop while incomplete, so contact your
Océ customer service center.
Chapter 1
Basic Use
The optional cutter unit is broken.
Solution 1: Write the message displayed on the top line of
the printer display on a memo, and then turn
OFF the power supply, and consult your Océ
customer service center.
Chapter 4
Maintenance
Chapter 5
Using the Printer
in a Network
Environment
Chapter 7
Troubleshooting
Chapter 6
Operating the
Function Menu
Contents
7- 18
Index
‹ Message Is Displayed
CutUnitFuseBlown
Incorrect Value
Cause 1:
Cause 1:
The optional cutter unit (Round cutter) is not
operating.
Solution 1: Turn the printer off, remove the connector cover
from the optional cutter unit, and check that the
connector is firmly connected.
Cause 2:
The optional cutter unit is broken.
Solution 1: Write the message displayed on the top line of
the printer display on a memo, and then turn
OFF the power supply, and consult your Océ
customer service center.
Cause 1:
Printhead nozzles are clogged.
Solution 1: Reload the media and then print the nozzle
check pattern to check the condition of the
nozzles. (→ P.4-38) If the printhead is not
operating properly, perform Head Cleaning.
(→ P.4-40)
Cause 2:
The IP address, subnet mask setting, or the
default gateway setting is not correct.
Solution 1: Set the correct settings for the IP address,
subnet mask and default gateway. For more
details about the values of the printer network
information settings, contact your system
administrator. (→ P.5-4)
ERROR nnnnnn (n = Numbers)
Cause 1:
Error in the print data.
Solution 1: If the job does not print correctly, check the
settings then restart the print job.
Adj. Failed
The high-transparency film for which the
printhead or amount of line feed cannot be
adjusted is loaded. (→ P.4-42, P.4-45)
Solution 1: Follow the Manual Printhead Adjustment
Procedure to perform manual printhead
adjustment. (→ P.4-43)
Solution 2: To adjust the amount of line feed (Adjust Band),
perform the procedure for “Adjusting Line Feed
Manually”. (→ P.4-46)
7- 19
TOP
Solution 2: Turn OFF the printer, wait for 3 seconds min.,
and then turn ON the printer again.
Solution 3: If the message appears again after doing the
procedure above, write down the error number
displayed on the top line, turn OFF the printer,
and then contact your Océ customer service
center.
Chapter 1
Basic Use
Chapter 2
Using Various Media
Chapter 3
Printing by Objective
Chapter 4
Maintenance
Chapter 5
Using the Printer
in a Network
Environment
Chapter 7
Troubleshooting
Chapter 6
Operating the
Function Menu
Contents
Index
‹ When You Cannot Print
TOP
When You Cannot Print
Chapter 1
Basic Use
Check the following items when the printer does not operate and will not print.
Printing Does Not Start
Printing Halts During Print Job
Cannot Print on a Network
No error message is displayed.
Error message is displayed.
Cannot print for a TCP/IP network.
Error message is displayed.
Blank media is ejected from the
printer.
Cannot print from the NetWare
network.
Ink initialization operation starts
unexpectedly.
Chapter 3
Printing by Objective
Chapter 4
Maintenance
Printing Does Not Start
No error message is displayed.
Cause 1:
Printer is not selected as the destination for the
print job.
Chapter 2
Using Various Media
Solution 1: For Windows, select the Name of the Select
Printer in the Print dialog box and then try to
print again.
Chapter 5
Using the Printer
in a Network
Environment
Chapter 7
Troubleshooting
Chapter 6
Operating the
Function Menu
Contents
7- 20
Index
‹ When You Cannot Print
Solution 2: If you are using Mac OS 8/9, make sure that the
correct name of the printer is selected with the
Chooser, and then try again.
TOP
Cause 2:
Print queue has halted.
Chapter 1
Basic Use
Chapter 2
Using Various Media
Solution 3: For Mac OS X, select the name of the printer in
the Print dialog box and then try to print again.
Solution 1: For Windows:
1. In the Printers folder, double-click the icon
for the printer.
2. From the Printer menu select Pause Printing
to release this setting.
Chapter 3
Printing by Objective
Chapter 4
Maintenance
Chapter 5
Using the Printer
in a Network
Environment
Chapter 7
Troubleshooting
Solution 2: For Mac OS 8/9
1. Open GARO Printmonitor.
Chapter 6
Operating the
Function Menu
Contents
7- 21
Index
‹ When You Cannot Print
2. From the File menu select Resume Printing
Queue to release the print pause.
TOP
Chapter 1
Basic Use
Chapter 2
Using Various Media
Chapter 3
Printing by Objective
Chapter 4
Maintenance
Chapter 5
Using the Printer
in a Network
Environment
Chapter 7
Troubleshooting
Chapter 6
Operating the
Function Menu
Contents
7- 22
Index
‹ When You Cannot Print
Solution 3: For Mac OS X:
1. Open the Printer Setup Utility.
2. From the Printers menu select Start Job to
release the print pause.
TOP
Error message is displayed.
Cause1
Media has jammed in the printer.
ERROR
E02E01
Turn Power Off!!
Chapter 1
Basic Use
Chapter 2
Using Various Media
Chapter 3
Printing by Objective
Solution1 Remove the jammed sheet. (→ P.7-36)
Cause 3:
With Mac OS 8/9, the printer is shared via USB.
Solution 1: Connect the printer directly to the computer to
be used for printing through its USB or
IEEE1394 port. If you want to share the printer,
do the print job from a Windows computer.
Cause 2:
Printer is offline.
Solution 1: After correcting the problem in response to the
error message, press the Online button to set
the printer online.
Solution 2: If the operation panel display reads Offline,
press the Online button to set the printer online.
Cause 3:
An error message is displayed during printing.
Solution 1: When an error message appears in the printer
operation panel or the Windows display, read
the message in the GARO Status Monitor. Then
correct the problem. (→ P.7-2)
Cause 4:
No print media loaded.
Solution 1: Replenish the print media in the specified
media supply source.
7- 23
Chapter 4
Maintenance
Chapter 5
Using the Printer
in a Network
Environment
Chapter 7
Troubleshooting
Chapter 6
Operating the
Function Menu
Contents
Index
‹ When You Cannot Print
Cause 5:
The Media Type in the media source selection
is not selected.
TOP
Printing Halts During Print Job
Solution 1: Use the printer operation panel to select the
correct setting for the media type. (→ P.2-17)
Error message is displayed.
Solution 2: If the Media Type selection is incorrect, cancel
the print job in the computer side, open the
printer driver and select the correct setting for
the “print media loaded”.
Solution 1: Read the message displayed in the GARO
Status Monitor or GARO Printmonitor, and
correct the problem indicated by the error
message. (→ P.7-2)
Cause 6:
Cause 2:
No ink.
Solution 1: When the ink tank replacement message
appears, replace the ink tank for the indicated
color. (→ P.4-2)
Ink initialization operation starts unexpectedly.
Cause 1:
When the printer was switched off previously,
this force cancelled a cleaning operation.
Solution 1: Wait for the ink initialization operation to finish.
Ink filling may require up to 10 minutes to
complete.
Cause 1:
Chapter 1
Basic Use
An error message is displayed during printing.
Roll media ran out during the print job and the
tape on the trailing edge of the media sheet is
preventing the rest of the sheet from feeding.
Solution 1: Follow the procedure for removing a media jam.
Remove the used roll and replace it with a new
one. (→ P.7-36)
Chapter 2
Using Various Media
Chapter 3
Printing by Objective
Chapter 4
Maintenance
Chapter 5
Using the Printer
in a Network
Environment
Chapter 7
Troubleshooting
Chapter 6
Operating the
Function Menu
Contents
7- 24
Index
‹ When You Cannot Print
Blank media is ejected from the printer.
Cause 1:
A blank page is ejected from the previous print
job.
TOP
Cannot Print on a Network
Cannot print for a TCP/IP network.
Solution 1: The print job starts after the blank page is
ejected.
Cause 1:
Cause 2:
Solution 1: Confirm that the connection of the cable that
connects the printer to the network is secure,
then press the Power button to cycle the printer
off and on again. (→ P.5-4)
The leading edge of the roll media is cut to an
even length.
Solution 1: When the roll media was loaded, a plain cut
sheet was ejected as part of the normal
procedure to align the roll media correctly. The
printer returns to standby as soon as the
preparation is completed.
Cause 3:
Printhead nozzles are jammed.
Solution 1: Print a nozzle check pattern to confirm the
condition of the printhead. If a nozzle is
blocked, do the printhead cleaning procedure.
(→ P.4-40)
Cause 4:
No ink.
Solution 1: Check the ink tanks and replace any empty ink
tanks.(→ P.4-2)
Cause 5:
The printer is broken.
Cause 2:
The printer LAN port and cable are not
connected correctly.
The printer cannot recognize automatically the
LAN communication method.
Solution 1: Use the printer operation panel to select
Interface Setup → Ethernet Driver then set
each item for the communication method that is
being used on the LAN. (→ P.5-4)
Cause 3:
The TCP/IP network is not set correctly.
Solution 1: Confirm that the IP Address is set correctly.
(→ P.5-6)
Chapter 1
Basic Use
Chapter 2
Using Various Media
Chapter 3
Printing by Objective
Chapter 4
Maintenance
Chapter 5
Using the Printer
in a Network
Environment
Chapter 7
Troubleshooting
Chapter 6
Operating the
Function Menu
Solution 1: Contact your Océ customer service center.
Contents
7- 25
Index
‹ When You Cannot Print
Cause 4:
TOP
job is more than 255 characters, however, LPR
cannot send the job. In such a case, shorten
the name of the file.
3.
The settings for the computer used for printing
are not set correctly.
Solution 1: Check the following points:
1. Correct printer driver installed?
The printer driver must be installed on every
computer that will be printing from Windows.
2. Is the output destination port set correctly for
every computer that will be used for
printing?
Do Control Panel → Printers and check the
output destination.
Cannot print from the NetWare network.
Cause 1:
The printer LAN port and cable are not
connected correctly.
Solution 1: Confirm that the connection of the cable that
connects the printer to the network is secure,
then press the Power button to cycle the printer
off and on again. (→ P.5-19)
Cause 2:
The printer cannot recognize automatically the
LAN communication method.
Solution 1: Use the printer operation panel to select
Interface Setup→Ethernet Driver then set each
item for the communication method that is
being used on the LAN. (→ P.5-19)
Cause 3:
Cause 5:
The print file name is too long.
Solution 1: Normally, LPR (for “printing with Microsoft TCP/
IP” on Windows NT) sends the job name based
on the name of the software application and the
name of the file to the printer. If the name of the
7- 26
The NetWare network is not set correctly.
Solution 1: Check the following points:
1. Make sure that the NetWare file server is
running.
2. Is there enough disk space available on the
NetWare file server? You may not be able to
do large print jobs if there is not enough free
space available.
3. Start NWADMIN or PCONSOLE and confirm
(1) that the print service is set correctly, and
(2) that the print queue has been enabled for
use. (→ P.5-24)
Chapter 1
Basic Use
Chapter 2
Using Various Media
Chapter 3
Printing by Objective
Chapter 4
Maintenance
Chapter 5
Using the Printer
in a Network
Environment
Chapter 7
Troubleshooting
Chapter 6
Operating the
Function Menu
Contents
Index
‹ When You Cannot Print
4. Make sure that the printer network settings
are correct. Especially, confirm that a frame
type is enabled for the Frame Type setting.
(→ P.5-18, P.5-20)
Cause 4:
The settings for the computer used for printing
are not set correctly.
Solution 1: Check the following points:
1. Correct printer driver installed? The printer
driver must be installed on every computer
that will be printing.
2. Is the output destination port set correctly for
every computer that will be used for
printing? Do Control Panel → Printers and
check the output destination.
Cause 5:
A print job data stream cannot be sent from the
NetWare server to a printer in another subnet.
Solution 1: When data is sent from NetWare to the printer,
the data is sent in the NCP path mode, but in
some network environments data sent to a
printer on another subnet is lost. If this problem
occurs, switch off the NCP bus mode under the
printer protocol settings and try again.
Cause 6:
When using the queue server mode, the Printer
Type setting appears set for Parallel.
Solution 1: Select Other/Unknown for the Printer Type
setting.
7- 27
TOP
Chapter 1
Basic Use
Chapter 2
Using Various Media
Chapter 3
Printing by Objective
Chapter 4
Maintenance
Chapter 5
Using the Printer
in a Network
Environment
Chapter 7
Troubleshooting
Chapter 6
Operating the
Function Menu
Contents
Index
‹ Unexpected Printing Results
TOP
Unexpected Printing Results
Chapter 1
Basic Use
If the results you see in the print job are not what you
expect, check the items described below.
Print quality trouble
Printing is faint
Abnormal Content
Other Problems
Broken lines are visible
Ink consumption is exceedingly high
Random, bizarre characters are
printing
Length for the media feed method
is not correct
The message MTCart Full Soon does
not disappear after you replace the
maintenance cartridge with a new
one
Back sides of printed sheets are dirty
Only monochrome is printing
Media is not cutting straight
Black or white streaks visible
Color tones uneven
The printer does not turn on
When printing on Glossy Photo Paper
or Semi-Glossy Photo Paper, you may
see differences between light and
shaded areas on ripple surfaces of the
media.
Image color borders printing thick
The roll media will not feed into the
paper feed slot
Ink smeared
Edges smeared with ink
The edges of the image are blurred
The overall print result is tinged red
or blue
Chapter 2
Using Various Media
Chapter 3
Printing by Objective
Chapter 4
Maintenance
Chapter 5
Using the Printer
in a Network
Environment
Chapter 7
Troubleshooting
Chapter 6
Operating the
Function Menu
Contents
7- 28
Index
‹ Unexpected Printing Results
Print quality trouble
Printing is faint
Cause 1:
Printing on the wrong side of the sheet.
Solution 1: Check the front and back side of the media. If
you print on the other side of the media, you will
not achieve the correct results in printing.
Cause 2:
If you frequently change the type of Bk ink, the
Bk ink may become patchy.
Solution 1: Execute Head Cleaning B. (→ P.4-40)
Cause 3:
Printhead nozzles are jammed.
Solution 1: Print a nozzle check pattern to confirm the
condition of the printhead. If a printhead nozzle
is blocked, do the printhead cleaning
procedure. (→ P.4-38, P.4-40)
Solution 2: If only yellow appears smeared, you may be
able to correct this by selecting on the operation
panel Med. Detail Set.→Correct Smear→On.
(→ P.1-22)
Cause 4:
A printout is in the output stacker.
Solution 1: The capacity of the output stacker is limited to
one printout. Start the next print job only after
you have removed the previous printout from
the output stacker.
7- 29
TOP
Cause 5:
The ink port needle is stuck and the ink has
clogged.
Solution 1: Leave the printer with the ink tanks installed for
more than 24 hours and then execute Head
Cleaning B. (→ P.4-40)
Cause 6:
A piece of jammed sheet remains under the top
cover.
Solution 1: Follow the procedure below to remove paper
scraps from under the top cover.
1. Press the Online button to display Offline.
2. Press and hold [3] for at least 1 sec. to move
the carriage to the center.
3. Open the top cover.
4. Remove all the paper scraps under the top
cover.
Cause 7:
The ink was not dry enough for cutting during
borderless printing.
Solution 1: Use the operation panel to lengthen the settings
for Drying_Time in the Med.Detail Set..
Chapter 1
Basic Use
Chapter 2
Using Various Media
Chapter 3
Printing by Objective
Chapter 4
Maintenance
Chapter 5
Using the Printer
in a Network
Environment
Chapter 7
Troubleshooting
Chapter 6
Operating the
Function Menu
Contents
Index
‹ Unexpected Printing Results
TOP
Ink smeared
Edges smeared with ink
Cause 1:
Cause 1:
The selected Media Type does not match the
media loaded in the media supply source.
Solution 1: Check the paper feed source named in the
message. If the paper is not the same as that
specified for the job, pause the print job
temporarily, load the correct paper, and then
print again. (→ P.2-10, P.2-22)
The platen has become dirty after a full bleed
print job or printing a small media size.
Solution 1: Clean the part of the platen under the top cover.
(→ P.4-12)
Cause 2:
The specified Media Type does not match the
loaded media type.
Solution 1: Return the printhead height adjustment lever to
the standard position. (→ P.2-26)
Solution 1: Check the paper feed source named in the
message. If the paper types do not match,
pause the print job temporarily, load the correct
paper, and then print again.
(→ P.2-10, P.2-22)
Cause 3:
Cause 3:
Cause 2:
The printhead height adjustment lever is at the
down position.
You are printing on thick paper or paper that
buckles easily.
Solution 1: Set the head height adjustment lever to the high
position. (→ P.2-26)
Cause 4:
The paper was loaded incorrectly, causing the
paper to crease.
Solution 1: Lift the release lever and align the paper
position again.
Chapter 2
Using Various Media
Chapter 3
Printing by Objective
Chapter 4
Maintenance
Print media is curled or creased.
Solution 1: Smooth out the curls and creases on the paper,
and then reload the media.
Cause 4:
Chapter 1
Basic Use
A line is printed at the cutting position because
the cutting dust reduction function is turned on.
Solution 1: If the cutting dust reduction function is not
needed, use the operation panel to turn OFF
this feature for the print media in use.
Chapter 5
Using the Printer
in a Network
Environment
Chapter 7
Troubleshooting
Chapter 6
Operating the
Function Menu
Contents
7- 30
Index
‹ Unexpected Printing Results
Back sides of printed sheets are dirty
Cause 1:
A print job using large size media was executed
after a print job on small size media.
Solution 1: Clean the part of the platen under the top cover.
(→ P.4-12)
Cause 2:
The platen was not cleaned after a full bleed
print job.
Solution 1: Clean the part of the platen under the top cover.
(→ P.4-12)
Cause 3:
Do the print job with the media width detection
function switched off.
Solution 1: Clean the part of the platen under the top cover.
(→ P.4-12)
Black or white streaks visible
Cause 1:
Printhead is out of alignment.
Solution 1: Use the operation panel to adjust the amount of
feed for the print media in use. (→ P.4-45)
Cause 2:
Printing is not proceeding smoothly due to an
interruption in the flow of data from the
computer.
TOP
When printing on Glossy Photo Paper or Semi-Glossy
Photo Paper, you may see differences between light and
shaded areas on ripple surfaces of the media.
Cause 1:
You may not be able to achieve a sufficient
image in some print patterns with the printhead
in the middle (standard) position.
Solution 1: Lower the printhead height adjustment lever to
the low position. However, never print on media
that wrinkles easily such as Coated Paper or
Plain Paper with the printhead height
adjustment lever in the low position. This could
damage the printer.
Chapter 1
Basic Use
Chapter 2
Using Various Media
Chapter 3
Printing by Objective
Chapter 4
Maintenance
Chapter 5
Using the Printer
in a Network
Environment
Chapter 7
Troubleshooting
Chapter 6
Operating the
Function Menu
Solution 1: Close other applications that are open and
cancel other jobs that are executing.
Cause 3:
The Feed Priority item is set for Print Length.
Contents
Solution 1: For the Feed Priority item, select Band Joint the
adjust the amount of feed. (→ P.4-45)
7- 31
Index
‹ Unexpected Printing Results
Abnormal Content
Broken lines are visible
Cause 1:
Printhead is out of alignment.
Solution 1: Use the printer operation panel to adjust the
printhead position. (→ P.4-42)
Solution 2: If the lines are still broken after peforming
Solution 1, perform printhead position
adjustment manually to fine adjust the value for
printhead adjustment. (→ P.4-43)
Random, bizarre characters are printing
Cause 1:
Data from the print job data stream has been
lost.
Solution 1: Switch the printer and computer off, then switch
them on again and start the print job again.
Cause 2:
Another printer driver was selected for the print
job.
Solution 1: Select the correct printer driver for the printer
and try again. (→ P.1-32)
Cause 3:
Font selected for printing not supported.
Solution 1: Make sure that the software application you are
using has the correct type of fonts and that they
have been installed correctly. (→ Software
Application Instructions)
7- 32
TOP
Length for the media feed method is not correct
Cause 1:
Band Joint is selected.
Solution 1: If you want to match size the media feed
direction correctly, select Print Length for the
Feed Priority item, then enter the setting for the
Adjust Length. The amount of media feed can
be adjusted in 0.02% increments.
Only monochrome is printing
Cause 1:
The Color Mode is set for Black Only in the
printer driver.
Solution 1: On the Main tab of the printer driver, select
Color for the Color Mode and try again.
(→ Printer Driver Online Help)
Cause 2:
Color ink nozzles are jammed.
Solution 1: Print a nozzle check pattern to confirm the
condition of the printhead. If a printhead nozzle
is blocked, do the printhead cleaning
procedure. (→ P.4-38, P.4-40)
Chapter 1
Basic Use
Chapter 2
Using Various Media
Chapter 3
Printing by Objective
Chapter 4
Maintenance
Chapter 5
Using the Printer
in a Network
Environment
Chapter 7
Troubleshooting
Chapter 6
Operating the
Function Menu
Contents
Index
‹ Unexpected Printing Results
Color tones uneven
Cause 5:
Cause 1:
Solution 1: You may be able to correct the smearing of the
yellow ink, select Med. Detail Set. → Correct
Smear → On the operation panel of the printer.
(→ P.1-22)
The printer driver is not performing color
adjustment.
Solution 1: Use the printer driver to adjust the colors with
the settings on the Color Settings of the Color
Mode dialog box.(→ Printer Driver Online Help)
Cause 2:
Colors in the printout do not match the colors
on the screen.
Solution 1: Perform monitor color correction. (→ Monitor
Instructions)
Solution 2: The color management software settings are
incorrect. (→ Software Application Instructions)
Cause 3:
Color ink nozzles are jammed.
Yellow ink is smearing.
Image color borders printing thick
Cause 1:
Ink is clogged in a nozzle.
Solution 1: On the Layout sheet of the printer driver, under
Special Settings set SSC Adjustment to Level
1, the execute the print job again. If printing at
Level 1 does not solve the problem, select
Level 2 and do the print again. However, please
remember that using this feature can cause
changes in the color hues over the entire image
so you should check the hues as you are
printing.
Solution 1: Print a nozzle check pattern to confirm the
condition of the printhead. If a printhead nozzle
is blocked, do the printhead cleaning
procedure. (→ P.4-38, P.4-40)
The edges of the image are blurred
Cause 4:
Cause 1:
A color ink tank is inserted in the wrong slot.
Solution 1: On the printer operation panel, execute Move
Printer, remove the ink tank from the printer,
then insert the correct color ink tank.
(→ Quick Start Guide)
Solution 2: After doing the above procedure, execute
Nozzle Check If each color is not printing
correctly, on the printer operation panel execute
Head Cleaning B. (→ P.4-38, P.4-40)
7- 33
TOP
Chapter 1
Basic Use
Chapter 2
Using Various Media
Chapter 3
Printing by Objective
Chapter 4
Maintenance
Chapter 5
Using the Printer
in a Network
Environment
Chapter 7
Troubleshooting
The suction fan is set to strong
Solution 1: Reduce the strength of the suction fan. Note
that this will not be suitable for printing high
density images.
Chapter 6
Operating the
Function Menu
Contents
Index
‹ Unexpected Printing Results
The overall print result is tinged red or blue
Cause 1:
Unsuitable color balance.
Solution 1: Use the procedure described below to return
the Adjust Printer and Color Adj. to the factory
set values (2).
1. Press the Online button to display MAIN
MENU.
2. Press [3] or [4] to select Adjust Printer, and
then press the [6] button.
3. Press [3] or [4] to select Color Adj., and then
press the [6] button.
4. Press [3] or [4] to select Return Defaults,
and then press the [6] button.
5. Press the [3] or[4] button to select Yes, and
then press the OK button.
Solution 2: If the color balance is not restored despite
performing the procedure described above,
restore the set values for each color using Color
Adj. in the Adjust Printer menu.
1. Press the Online button to display MAIN
MENU.
2. Press [3] or [4] to select Adjust Printer, and
then press the [6] button.
3. Press [3] or [4] to select Color Adj., and then
press the [6] button.
4. Press [3] or [4] to select the ink color to be
adjusted, and then press the [6] button.
7- 34
TOP
5. If the color selected using the [3] and [4]
buttons is too thin, select “1”, and if the ink is
too thick, select “3”, and then press the OK
button.
6. Repeat Step 4 and 5 for each color to be
adjusted.
Note
z If thick colors need to be adjusted, adjust the Y, M, C,
and K inks.
z If thin colors need to be adjusted, adjust the PM and
PC inks.
Chapter 1
Basic Use
Chapter 2
Using Various Media
Chapter 3
Printing by Objective
Chapter 4
Maintenance
Chapter 5
Using the Printer
in a Network
Environment
Chapter 7
Troubleshooting
Chapter 6
Operating the
Function Menu
Contents
Index
‹ Unexpected Printing Results
Other Problems
Ink consumption is exceedingly high
Cause 1:
Printing many color images over an entire
printing area.
Solution 1: Printing photographs or other images that
require a lot of color fill consumes large
amounts of ink. This is not unusual.
Cause 2:
Executing Head Cleaning B very often.
Solution 1: Head Cleaning B consumes a large amount of
ink (this is not unusual). After the printer has
been moved, or after the printer has been
stored and not used for a long period (excluding
other problems with the printhead), you should
execute Head Cleaning B.
Cause 3:
The printer consumes ink for the initial ink tank
filling.
Solution 1: The first time the printer used after it is set up or
moved to a new location, the ink level display
may drop to as low as 80% as a result of filling
the printhead and ink tanks with ink (this is not
abnormal).
TOP
Solution 2: After replacing a new maintenance cartridge
the message disappears upon executing a print
or cleaning operation.
Media is not cutting straight
Cause 1:
The media is wrinkled at the cutting position.
Chapter 1
Basic Use
Chapter 2
Using Various Media
Solution 1: Flatten the media at the cutting position.
The printer does not turn on
Cause 1:
The power cord was unplugged with the printer
power on.
Solution 1: Wait three minutes with the power cord
unplugged, then plug in the power cord again
and switch the printer on.
The roll media will not feed into the paper feed slot
Cause 1:
The roll media is curled.
Solution 1: Insert the paper into the paper feed slot at an
angle starting with the left corner or right corner,
then feed the paper through and straighten it
out.
Chapter 3
Printing by Objective
Chapter 4
Maintenance
Chapter 5
Using the Printer
in a Network
Environment
Chapter 7
Troubleshooting
Chapter 6
Operating the
Function Menu
The message MTCart Full Soon does not disappear after
you replace the maintenance cartridge with a new one
Cause 1:
7- 35
The printer has not yet recognized the new
maintenance cartridge.
Solution 1: Replace the maintenance cartridge and press
the Information button.
Contents
Index
‹ Removing Media Jams
TOP
Removing Media Jams
The printer stops and a Media Jam or Turn Power Off!!
message appears on the printer display as soon as a jam
occurs. When a jam occurs, follow the next procedure to
check the locations where jams occur and remove the
jammed sheets.
Removing a Roll Media Jam
Follow the procedure below to remove a roll media jam.
1
z Operation panel
Press and hold the Power button for over 1 second
or more until the Online lamp goes off, release the
button, then switch the printer off.
Data
Message
ERROR
E02E01
Turn Power Off!!
Cleaning
(3 sec.)
Stop/Eject
(1 sec.)
Message
Shut Down..
Please Wait..
Cleaning
(3 sec.)
Stop/Eject
(1 sec.)
Chapter 2
Using Various Media
Chapter 3
Printing by Objective
Information Power
Data
Information Power
Chapter 1
Basic Use
Online
Offline
Menu
Online
Offline
Menu
2
Chapter 4
Maintenance
Open the top cover.
Chapter 5
Using the Printer
in a Network
Environment
z GARO Status Monitor (Windows)
Chapter 7
Troubleshooting
Chapter 6
Operating the
Function Menu
Important
z Do not touch any areas other than those indicated.
Your hands could get dirty or this could damage the
printer.
3
7- 36
Move the carriage manually when it is out of its
normally parked position.
Contents
Index
‹ Removing Media Jams
Move it to the right or left edge of the carriage rail
before attempting to remove the media.
TOP
5
Hold the left and right corners of the jammed media
and pull the sheet forward, then above the cutter
groove (a), then cut at the edge of the printed area
or where the media is wrinkled.
Use a pair of scissors if the media is difficult to cut
with a cutter.
Chapter 1
Basic Use
Chapter 2
Using Various Media
Chapter 3
Printing by Objective
4
Lift the release lever.
Chapter 4
Maintenance
6
Move the carriage manually when it is out of its
normally parked position.
Push the carriage to the right until it stops.
Chapter 5
Using the Printer
in a Network
Environment
Chapter 7
Troubleshooting
Chapter 6
Operating the
Function Menu
7- 37
Important
z Be sure to push the carriage to the right. If you push it
to the left, the printer will display a carriage error after
the printer is switched on.
Contents
Index
‹ Removing Media Jams
7
Grasp the center of the roll media edges and gently
pull out the roll media until it is over the ejection
guide. Next, align the right edge of the roll media
with the right of the paper alignment line (b), and
lower the release lever.
TOP
9
If the printer is OFF, press the Power button to turn
ON the printer.
Information Power
Data
Message
Cleaning
(3 sec.)
Stop/Eject
(1 sec.)
Online
Offline
Menu
The media starts to feed, and the printer is ready to
use after feeding is finished.
Important
z Do not pull strongly on the roll media when you align it
with the paper alignment line. The roll media may not
feed out straight in some cases.
z If you pull too much of the roll media out, more of the
leading sheet than is needed will be cut.
8
Chapter 1
Basic Use
Note
z If you need to correct the alignment of the leading
edge, press the Online button to display Offline, press
the [6] button to feed the media, then select Force
Cutting on the MAIN MENU to cut the leading edge.
(→ P.6-3)
z If replacing the roll media and changing the paper
type, set the new paper type using the menu. (→ P.217)
Chapter 2
Using Various Media
Chapter 3
Printing by Objective
Chapter 4
Maintenance
Chapter 5
Using the Printer
in a Network
Environment
Chapter 7
Troubleshooting
Close the top cover.
Chapter 6
Operating the
Function Menu
Contents
7- 38
Index
‹ Removing Media Jams
TOP
Removing a Cut Sheet Jam
Follow the procedure below to remove a cut sheet jam that
occurs during printing.
1
3
Lift the release lever.
Chapter 1
Basic Use
Press and hold the Power button for over 1 second
or more until the Online lamp goes off, release the
button, then switch the printer off.
Chapter 2
Using Various Media
Information Power
Data
Message
Shut Down..
Please Wait..
Cleaning
(3 sec.)
Stop/Eject
(1 sec.)
Online
Offline
Menu
2
Open the top cover. If the carriage is not parked,
move the carriage to the left edge or right edge.
4
Chapter 3
Printing by Objective
If the sheet is visible, pull the jammed sheet forward
gently.
Chapter 4
Maintenance
Chapter 5
Using the Printer
in a Network
Environment
Chapter 7
Troubleshooting
Chapter 6
Operating the
Function Menu
Important
z Do not touch any areas other than those indicated.
Your hands could get dirty or this could damage the
printer.
7- 39
Contents
Index
‹ Removing Media Jams
5
If the paper is not visible, open the ejection guide
and remove the roll holder. Next, remove the
jammed paper from the bottom.
TOP
7
If the printer is OFF, press the Power button to turn
ON the printer.
Information Power
Chapter 1
Basic Use
Data
Message
Cleaning
(3 sec.)
Stop/Eject
(1 sec.)
Online
Chapter 2
Using Various Media
Offline
Menu
8
6
Inspect the interior to make sure there are no paper
scraps remaining, and then close the ejection guide.
If the carriage is at the left edge, move the carriage
to the right edge by hand.
Push the carriage to the right until it stops.
With the print side of the new sheet facing up,
holding the sheet square between the paperweight,
making sure that the stack is aligned with the line (a)
on the right and aligned with the line (b) at the back.
Chapter 3
Printing by Objective
Chapter 4
Maintenance
b
a
Chapter 5
Using the Printer
in a Network
Environment
Chapter 7
Troubleshooting
Chapter 6
Operating the
Function Menu
Important
z Make sure you push the carriage to the right. If you
push it to the left, the printer will display a carriage
error when the printer is switched on.
7- 40
Contents
Index
‹ Removing Media Jams
9
Lower the release lever, and then close the top
cover.
TOP
Chapter 1
Basic Use
Chapter 2
Using Various Media
Chapter 3
Printing by Objective
Cut sheet preparation begins. When preparation is
finished, the printer is ready to print.
Chapter 4
Maintenance
Chapter 5
Using the Printer
in a Network
Environment
Chapter 7
Troubleshooting
Chapter 6
Operating the
Function Menu
Contents
7- 41
Index
‹ Updating the Firmware
Updating the Firmware
By updating the firmware for this printer, you can add on
new functions and improvements for existing functions.
Obtaining the Firmware Update
Contact a Océ service center, or the dealer where you
purchased the printer, for details about how to obtain the
most recent version of the firmware update.
Confirming the Firmware Version
Do the procedure below to confirm the current version of
the printer firmware before doing a firmware update. If the
version of the firmware in use is older than the downloaded
version, do the firmware update.
2
3
Press the Online button to display MAIN
MENU.
Press [ ] or [
press [ ].
MAIN MENU
Information
4
Press [
Version
S/C: xx.xx.xx
] to select Information then
↓
] or [
] to select S/C: XX.XX.XX.
Chapter 1
Basic Use
Chapter 2
Using Various Media
Chapter 3
Printing by Objective
Chapter 4
Maintenance
Chapter 5
Using the Printer
in a Network
Environment
Note
z If the version number of the printer being used is the
same as or newer than the firmware update in hand,
then you do not need to update the firmware.
Chapter 7
Troubleshooting
1
Chapter 6
Operating the
Function Menu
If the printer power is off, press the Power button to
switch the printer on.
After a few seconds Online is displayed in the
operation panel and the Online lamp lights.
7- 42
TOP
Contents
Index
‹ Reinstalling the USB or IEEE1394 Driver
TOP
Reinstalling the USB or IEEE1394 Driver
If you try to install the USB or IEEE1394 driver with the USB
or IEEE1394 cable already connected to the printer, the
driver may not be installed correctly.
In such a case, follow the procedure below to install the
printer driver after reinstalling the USB or IEEE1394 driver.
1
2
3
4
7- 43
Right click the My Computer icon then
select Properties.
5
6
7
When the Wizard prompts you to select how
to search for the driver source files, select
only CD-ROM drive. Set the User Software
CD-ROM in the CD-ROM drive then follow
the instructions on the screen to install the
interface driver.
Select only Specify a location then click the
Browse button.
Select the printer driver folder.
z Windows Me/Windows 98
Open the CD-ROM, open the appropriate
language folder, then Drivers / WinMe_9X /
Driver / OK.
On the Hardware sheet, click Device
Manager. Next, in the Device Manager
window click the Other Devices icon then
click the Properties button.
Click the Driver tab then click the Update
Driver... button. When the Upgrade Device
Driver Wizard opens, follow the instructions
on the screen to complete the installation.
Next, when the Add New Hardware Wizard
opens, follow the instructions on the screen.
z Windows Server 2003/Windows XP/Windows
2000
Open the CD-ROM, open the appropriate
language folder, then Drivers / WinXP_2K /
Driver / OK.
8
Confirm that the correct folder has been
selected for Specify a location then install
the driver.
Chapter 1
Basic Use
Chapter 2
Using Various Media
Chapter 3
Printing by Objective
Chapter 4
Maintenance
Chapter 5
Using the Printer
in a Network
Environment
Chapter 7
Troubleshooting
Chapter 6
Operating the
Function Menu
Contents
Index
‹ Uninstalling the Software
Uninstalling the Software
Follow the procedure below to uninstall the printer driver
and utilities from computer.
TOP
2
Click the printer in the list you wish to delete, and
then click the Delete button.
Confirmation message appears.
Important
z If you uninstall the software from Windows Server
2003, Windows XP, Windows 2000, or Windows NT
4.0, you must log in as a member of the Administrators
group before the uninstallation.
3
4
„ Windows
Make sure that the printer is deleted from the
list, then click the Exit button in the Delete
Printer window.
Follow the procedure below to uninstall GARO Status
Monitor from a Windows system.
1
2
The Delete Printer window opens.
7- 44
Uninstalling GARO Status Monitor
1
Programs, then click imagePROGRAF GARO
Printer Driver Uninstaller from Océ Printer
Uninstaller.
Chapter 3
Printing by Objective
Chapter 4
Maintenance
Important
z If you uninstall the software from Windows Server
2003, Windows XP, Windows 2000, or Windows NT
4.0, you must log in as a member of the Administrators
group before the uninstallation.
On the desktop, click the Start button, point to
Chapter 2
Using Various Media
Click the Yes button.
Uninstalling the Printer Driver
Follow the procedures below to uninstall the printer drivers.
Chapter 1
Basic Use
On the desktop click the Start button, point
to Programs, click GARO Status Monitor,
then select Uninstaller (GARO Status
Monitor).
When the selection screen appears, select Delete
then click the Next button.
Chapter 5
Using the Printer
in a Network
Environment
Chapter 7
Troubleshooting
Chapter 6
Operating the
Function Menu
GARO Status Monitor is deleted.
3
Obey the instructions on the screen to delete
the GARO Status Monitor.
Contents
Index
‹ Uninstalling the Software
Uninstalling the GARO Device Setup
Utility
Follow this procedure to uninstall the GARO Device Setup
Utility installed with Windows.
1
2
3
Click the Start button then select Programs
/ GARO Device Setup Utility / Uninstaller
(GARO Device Setup Utility).
When the selection screen appears, select
Delete then click the Next button.
Obey the instructions on the screen to delete
the GARO Device Setup Utility.
TOP
Chapter 1
Basic Use
Chapter 2
Using Various Media
Chapter 3
Printing by Objective
Chapter 4
Maintenance
Chapter 5
Using the Printer
in a Network
Environment
Chapter 7
Troubleshooting
Chapter 6
Operating the
Function Menu
Contents
7- 45
Index
‹ Contents
TOP
Contents
How to Use This Guide .................................................................................................................ii
How to Use the Top Page ................................................................................................................................ ii
How to Use the Chapter Contents Pages......................................................................................................... iii
Chapter 1
Basic Use
Chapter 2
Using Various Media
Chapter 1 Basic Use
Printer Part Names ................................................................................................................... 1-2
Printer Main Unit............................................................................................................................................ 1-2
Chapter 3
Printing by Objective
Switching the Printer On and Off .............................................................................................. 1-7
Switching the Printer On................................................................................................................................ 1-7
Switching the Printer Off................................................................................................................................ 1-8
Online and Offline.......................................................................................................................................... 1-9
Chapter 4
Maintenance
What’s On the Operation Panel? ............................................................................................ 1-11
Viewing the Display ..................................................................................................................................... 1-11
Using the Operation Panel Buttons ............................................................................................................. 1-12
Reading Operation Panel Lamps ................................................................................................................ 1-14
Function Menus ...................................................................................................................... 1-16
Printer Function Priorities ............................................................................................................................ 1-16
How to Perform Menu Settings.................................................................................................................... 1-18
Menu Settings Summary Tables ................................................................................................................. 1-20
Printer Driver ........................................................................................................................... 1-32
What the Printer Driver Can Do...................................................................................................................
Main Sheet .................................................................................................................................................
Page Setup Sheet ......................................................................................................................................
Layout Sheet ..............................................................................................................................................
Maintenance Sheet ....................................................................................................................................
1-32
1-35
1-37
1-38
1-38
Options ................................................................................................................................... 1-39
Chapter 5
Using the Printer
in a Network
Environment
Chapter 7
Troubleshooting
Chapter 6
Operating the
Function Menu
Contents
Media Take-up Unit ..................................................................................................................................... 1-39
Consumables .......................................................................................................................... 1-40
C- 1
Print Media .................................................................................................................................................. 1-40
Index
‹ Contents
TOP
Specifications .......................................................................................................................... 1-43
Basic Environmental Performance ......................................................................................... 1-46
Chapter 1
Basic Use
Chapter 2 Using Various Media
Media Size ................................................................................................................................ 2-2
Media Size..................................................................................................................................................... 2-2
Media Type Sizes and Print Area .................................................................................................................. 2-4
Handling Paper and Other Print Media.......................................................................................................... 2-9
Printing with Rolls Media ........................................................................................................ 2-10
Loading Roll Media...................................................................................................................................... 2-10
Removing a Roll .......................................................................................................................................... 2-18
Printing with Cut Sheets ......................................................................................................... 2-22
Loading Cut Sheets ..................................................................................................................................... 2-22
Removing a Cut Sheet ................................................................................................................................ 2-25
Change the height of the printhead ........................................................................................ 2-26
Changing Printhead Height ......................................................................................................................... 2-26
Aligning the Printhead ................................................................................................................................. 2-28
Changing Printhead Height Again ............................................................................................................... 2-28
Using the Media Take-up Unit ................................................................................................ 2-29
Settings for Using the Media Take-up Unit..................................................................................................
Attaching Roll Media....................................................................................................................................
Removing Media that Has Finished Printing ...............................................................................................
Settings to Not Use the Media Take-up Unit ...............................................................................................
2-30
2-30
2-36
2-39
Chapter 2
Using Various Media
Chapter 3
Printing by Objective
Chapter 4
Maintenance
Chapter 5
Using the Printer
in a Network
Environment
Chapter 7
Troubleshooting
Chapter 6
Operating the
Function Menu
Chapter 3 Printing by Objective
Printing from Windows .............................................................................................................. 3-2
Before You Begin .......................................................................................................................................... 3-2
Enlarging and Reducing the Original............................................................................................................. 3-6
Printing Photos and Illustrations without Borders (Borderless Printing) ...................................................... 3-13
Rotating the Page 90 Degrees for Printing (Conserve Paper) .................................................................... 3-23
C- 2
Contents
Index
‹ Contents
TOP
Printing Several Pages on One Sheet (Page Layout) .................................................................................
Printing Posters (Page Layout)....................................................................................................................
Using Watermarks .......................................................................................................................................
Vertical and Horizontal Banner Printing (Long Prints) ................................................................................
Printing without Top and Bottom Margins (Conserve Paper) ......................................................................
Custom Print Quality....................................................................................................................................
Fine Adjusting Color for Printing..................................................................................................................
About Size Options......................................................................................................................................
When the Printout Quality Is Not Clean.......................................................................................................
Software Provided for Windows ..................................................................................................................
3-24
3-27
3-29
3-31
3-39
3-40
3-43
3-53
3-58
3-58
Chapter 1
Basic Use
Chapter 2
Using Various Media
Chapter 3
Printing by Objective
Chapter 4 Maintenance
Replacing Ink Tanks ................................................................................................................. 4-2
How to Confirm Ink Levels.............................................................................................................................
When to Replace an Ink Tank .......................................................................................................................
Ink Tank Handling Precautions......................................................................................................................
Replacing an Ink Tank...................................................................................................................................
4-2
4-3
4-4
4-5
Cautions About Using Refilled Ink Tanks for This Printer ......................................................... 4-9
Switching Off Ink Level Detection.................................................................................................................. 4-9
Executing a Print Job..................................................................................................................................... 4-9
Cleaning the Printer ................................................................................................................ 4-10
Cleaning the Exterior Covers....................................................................................................................... 4-10
Cleaning Inside the Top Cover .................................................................................................................... 4-11
Replacing the Maintenance Cartridge .................................................................................... 4-14
Checking Spacing Remaining in the Maintenance Cartridge ......................................................................
When to Replace the Maintenance Cartridge..............................................................................................
Maintenance Cartridge Handling Precautions .............................................................................................
Maintenance Cartridge Replacement Procedure ........................................................................................
4-14
4-15
4-16
4-16
Replacing the Printhead ......................................................................................................... 4-21
Chapter 4
Maintenance
Chapter 5
Using the Printer
in a Network
Environment
Chapter 7
Troubleshooting
Chapter 6
Operating the
Function Menu
Contents
Printhead Handling Precautions .................................................................................................................. 4-21
How to Replace the Printhead..................................................................................................................... 4-22
C- 3
Replacing the Cutter Blade ..................................................................................................... 4-27
Index
‹ Contents
TOP
Replacing Standard Cutter Blades
(Flat Cutters)................................................................................................................................................ 4-27
Replacing Optional Cutter Blades (Round Cutters)..................................................................................... 4-30
Moving the Printer ................................................................................................................... 4-33
Confirming the Print Condition ................................................................................................ 4-37
Cleaning the Printhead ........................................................................................................... 4-39
Types of Printhead Cleaning ....................................................................................................................... 4-39
Printhead Cleaning Procedure .................................................................................................................... 4-39
Aligning the Printhead ............................................................................................................. 4-41
Aligning Printhead Procedure...................................................................................................................... 4-41
Manual Printhead Adjustment Procedure.................................................................................................... 4-42
Adjusting the Amount of Media Feed ...................................................................................... 4-44
Media Feed Adjustment Procedure ............................................................................................................ 4-44
Adjusting Media Feed Manually ................................................................................................................. 4-45
Reducing the Amount of Cutting Dust .................................................................................... 4-47
Chapter 5 Using the Printer in a Network Environment
Before Using the Printer ........................................................................................................... 5-2
System Requirements ................................................................................................................................... 5-2
The Network Environment ............................................................................................................................. 5-3
TCP/IP Network Settings (Windows, UNIX) ............................................................................. 5-4
Procedures Required for a TCP/IP Network.................................................................................................. 5-4
Connecting the LAN Cable ............................................................................................................................ 5-4
Setting the Printer IP Address .................................................................................................................................... 5−6
Configuring TCP/IP Protocol Settings ......................................................................................................... 5-14
Configuring the Printer for Sharing .............................................................................................................. 5-17
................................................................................................................................................ 5-18
NetWare Settings (Windows) .................................................................................................. 5-19
C- 4
Procedures Required for a NetWare Network ............................................................................................. 5-19
Setting the Printer Frame Type ................................................................................................................... 5-20
Setting Up a NetWare Print Service ............................................................................................................ 5-22
Chapter 1
Basic Use
Chapter 2
Using Various Media
Chapter 3
Printing by Objective
Chapter 4
Maintenance
Chapter 5
Using the Printer
in a Network
Environment
Chapter 7
Troubleshooting
Chapter 6
Operating the
Function Menu
Contents
Index
‹ Contents
TOP
Setting NetWare Protocol ............................................................................................................................ 5-26
Configuring the Computer for NetWare ....................................................................................................... 5-30
Printing with UNIX ................................................................................................................... 5-31
Using LPD to Print ....................................................................................................................................... 5-31
Using FTP to Print ....................................................................................................................................... 5-32
Initializing the Network Settings .............................................................................................. 5-33
List of Network Settings .......................................................................................................... 5-34
Chapter 1
Basic Use
Chapter 2
Using Various Media
General Settings.......................................................................................................................................... 5-34
Software Applications Used to Configure Network Settings ................................................... 5-37
Chapter 6 Operating the Function Menu
Checking the Printer Function Menu ........................................................................................ 6-2
Cutter Functions ....................................................................................................................... 6-3
When You Need to Cut Media....................................................................................................................... 6-3
Replacing the Cutter...................................................................................................................................... 6-3
Media Functions ....................................................................................................................... 6-4
Changing the Media Type Settings ............................................................................................................... 6-4
Printing Cleanly to the Manuscript Edges...................................................................................................... 6-5
Ink Functions ............................................................................................................................ 6-6
Chapter 3
Printing by Objective
Chapter 4
Maintenance
Chapter 5
Using the Printer
in a Network
Environment
Chapter 7
Troubleshooting
Replacing an Ink Tank During a Print Job ..................................................................................................... 6-6
Print Quality Functions .............................................................................................................. 6-7
Determining if the Printhead is Blocked.........................................................................................................
When the Printhead Nozzles Are Clogged ....................................................................................................
Correcting Image Offset ................................................................................................................................
Correcting Horizontal Banding in Images ......................................................................................................
Printing to an Accurate Length ......................................................................................................................
6-7
6-7
6-8
6-8
6-9
Printer Information Functions .................................................................................................. 6-10
Checking the Print Job History .................................................................................................................... 6-10
Checking the Printer Settings Information ................................................................................................... 6-10
Checking the Media Type Settings Information........................................................................................... 6-11
C- 5
Chapter 6
Operating the
Function Menu
Contents
Index
‹ Contents
TOP
Checking the Printer Functions Menu ......................................................................................................... 6-11
Chapter 7 Troubleshooting
Chapter 1
Basic Use
Message Is Displayed ............................................................................................................... 7-2
Operation Panel Message List ...................................................................................................................... 7-3
Media Messages ........................................................................................................................................... 7-4
Ink Messages .............................................................................................................................................. 7-12
Other Messages .......................................................................................................................................... 7-15
When You Cannot Print .......................................................................................................... 7-20
Printing Does Not Start................................................................................................................................ 7-20
Printing Halts During Print Job .................................................................................................................... 7-24
Cannot Print on a Network .......................................................................................................................... 7-25
Unexpected Printing Results .................................................................................................. 7-28
Print quality trouble...................................................................................................................................... 7-29
Abnormal Content........................................................................................................................................ 7-32
Other Problems ........................................................................................................................................... 7-35
Removing Media Jams ........................................................................................................... 7-36
Removing a Roll Media Jam........................................................................................................................ 7-36
Removing a Cut Sheet Jam......................................................................................................................... 7-39
Updating the Firmware ........................................................................................................... 7-42
Obtaining the Firmware Update................................................................................................................... 7-42
Confirming the Firmware Version ................................................................................................................ 7-42
Reinstalling the USB or IEEE1394 Driver ............................................................................... 7-43
Uninstalling the Software ........................................................................................................ 7-44
Uninstalling the Printer Driver...................................................................................................................... 7-44
Uninstalling GARO Status Monitor .............................................................................................................. 7-44
Uninstalling the GARO Device Setup Utility ................................................................................................ 7-45
Contents ............................................................................................................ C-1
Index ....................................................................................................................I-1
C- 6
Chapter 2
Using Various Media
Chapter 3
Printing by Objective
Chapter 4
Maintenance
Chapter 5
Using the Printer
in a Network
Environment
Chapter 7
Troubleshooting
Chapter 6
Operating the
Function Menu
Contents
Index
‹ Index
TOP
Index
Carriage Shaft .............................................................1-4
Cleaning the Exterior Covers ......................................4-10
Cleaning the Printer ...................................................4-10
Cleaning the Printhead ..............................................4-39
Color Matching ..........................................................3-47
Color Mode ................................................................3-44
Confirming the Print Condition ....................................4-37
Conserve Paper ................................................3-23, 3-39
Consumables ............................................................1-40
Cookie ..............................................................5-14, 5-26
Custom Sizes ............................................................3-53
Cut Sheet ....................................................................2-3
Jam ......................................................................7-39
Cut Sheet Lamp .........................................................1-15
Cut Sheet Sizes .........................................................1-40
Cutter ..........................................................................6-3
Replacing ................................................................6-3
Cutter Blade ..................1-5, 1-42, 4-27, 4-28, 4-30, 4-31
Cutter dust reduction function .....................................4-47
Cutter Grooves ............................................................1-2
Cutter position adjustment dial ...................................4-29
Symbols
button
button
button
button
...................................................................1-13
...................................................................1-13
...................................................................1-13
...................................................................1-14
A
Accessory Pocket ........................................................1-3
Adjust Band ...............................................................4-44
Adjust the Printhead Position ......................................4-41
Adjusting Color ..........................................................3-43
Adjusting the Amount of Media Feed ..........................4-44
Administrator Mode .......................................... 5-15, 5-26
Aligning the Printhead ................................................4-41
ARP/PING command .................................. 5-6, 5-9, 5-37
B
Basic Environmental Performance ..............................1-46
Bindery ......................................................................5-23
Borderless Printing .....................................................3-13
Basic Procedure ....................................................3-14
Fit Roll Paper Width ...............................................3-17
Print Image with Actual Size ...................................3-20
Settings Required ..................................................3-13
Borderless printing ink groove ....................................4-13
C
I- 1
Canon imagePROGRAF HDI Driver ...........................3-61
Canon imagePROGRAF Printer Driver 2005 ...............3-58
Carriage .......................................... 1-5, 4-29, 4-31, 7-37
Part Names .............................................................1-5
D
Data Lamp ................................................................1-14
Default G/W ...............................................................5-13
Device Manager ...............................................5-15, 5-27
Device Status Extension ............................................3-60
Digital Photo Print Pro ................................................3-61
Display ......................................................................1-11
Display Series ...........................................................3-57
Chapter 1
Basic Use
Chapter 2
Using Various Media
Chapter 3
Printing by Objective
Chapter 4
Maintenance
Chapter 5
Using the Printer
in a Network
Environment
Chapter 7
Troubleshooting
Chapter 6
Operating the
Function Menu
Contents
Index
‹ Index
TOP
DSE ..........................................................................5-18
E
How to Replace the Printhead ....................................4-22
I
Ejection Guide .............................................................1-2
Enhance Text with Photos ..........................................3-43
Enlarging or Reducing Printing .....................................3-6
Fit Roll Paper Width .................................................3-9
Fit the Size of the Media ..........................................3-7
Selecting the Magnification Rate ............................3-11
Expansion Board Slots .................................................1-3
IIS .............................................................................5-18
imagePROGRAF Media Configuration Tool ................3-62
Information button ......................................................1-13
Initializing the Network Settings ..................................5-33
Ink Level Detection ......................................................4-9
Ink Levels ....................................................................4-2
Ink Tank ..................................... 1-6, 1-41, 4-2, 4-7, 4-34
Replacing an Ink Tank .............................................4-5
Ink Tank Cover .....................................................1-6, 4-6
Ink Tank Handling Precautions .....................................4-4
Intake ducts ...............................................................4-23
IP Address ............................................... 5-6, 5-10, 5-11
F
Feed Adjustment ..........................................................6-8
Functions Menu .........................................................6-11
Flow Summaries ....................................................1-16
How to Perform Menu Settings ...............................1-18
Summary Tables ...................................................1-20
J
JavaScript ........................................................5-14, 5-26
G
GARO Device Setup Utility ............... 3-59, 5-6, 5-20, 5-37
Installing ..................................................................5-6
Uninstalling ...........................................................7-45
GARO Status Monitor ................................................3-58
Uninstalling ...........................................................7-44
Gateway Address ......................................................5-11
General Settings ........................................................5-34
L
Halftones ...................................................................3-43
HDI Driver .................................................................3-61
Head Cleaning .............................................................6-7
Height of the Printhead ..............................................2-26
Holder Stopper ............................................................1-2
Horizontal Banner ......................................................3-31
M
H
I- 2
Chapter 1
Basic Use
Chapter 2
Using Various Media
Chapter 3
Printing by Objective
Chapter 4
Maintenance
Chapter 5
Using the Printer
in a Network
Environment
Lamp .........................................................................1-14
LAN board ...................................................................5-4
LAN Cable ...................................................................5-4
Layout Sheet .............................................................1-38
Loading Cut Sheets ...................................................2-23
Long Prints ................................................................3-31
LPR Port ...................................................................3-59
Chapter 7
Troubleshooting
MAC Address .....................................................5-9, 5-10
MAIN MENU .....................................................1-17, 1-20
Main Sheet ................................................................1-35
Maintenance Cartridge ................................ 1-2, 1-3, 1-41
Maintenance Cartridge Replacement Procedure .........4-16
Contents
Chapter 6
Operating the
Function Menu
Index
‹ Index
Maintenance Sheet ....................................................1-38
Managing a Printer .....................................................5-14
Matching Mode ..........................................................3-50
Matching the Width of the Roll ....................................3-31
Media Configuration Tool ...........................................3-62
Media Detailed Settings .............................................3-58
Media Jam .................................................................7-36
Media Size ............................................... 2-2, 3-56, 3-57
Media Type Settings .......................................... 2-25, 6-4
Media Type Settings Information ................................6-11
Menu Map .................................................................6-11
Message .....................................................................7-2
Message Lamp ..........................................................1-14
Moving Handles ...........................................................1-3
Moving the Printer ......................................................4-33
Multicast DNS ............................................................5-35
N
NCP path mode .........................................................7-27
NDS ..........................................................................5-23
NetSpot Console ........................................................3-59
NetWare .......................................................... 5-22, 7-26
NetWare Frame Type .................................................5-21
NetWare Print Service ................................................5-23
NetWare Settings .......................................................5-36
Printer Operation Panel .........................................5-21
Network Environment ...................................................5-3
Network Settings ........................................................5-34
Novell Directory Service .............................................5-23
Nozzle Check .................................................... 4-37, 6-7
NWADMIN .................................................................5-24
I- 3
TOP
O
OK button ..................................................................1-13
Online button .............................................................1-12
Online Lamp ..............................................................1-15
Operation Panel ..................................................1-2, 1-11
Operation Panel Button ..............................................1-12
Options .....................................................................1-39
OS ..............................................................................5-2
Output stacker .............................................................1-2
Oversize ....................................................................3-57
Chapter 1
Basic Use
Page Border ..............................................................3-26
Page Layout .....................................................3-24, 3-27
Page Setup Sheet .....................................................1-37
PageComposer ...........................................................3-5
Paper Feed Slot ...........................................................1-2
Paper Source button ..................................................1-13
Paper Tray ................................................................4-13
Paperweight ................................................................1-4
PCONSOLE ..............................................................5-24
ping ...........................................................................5-11
Platen ................................................................1-4, 4-13
Poster Artist ...............................................................3-60
Power button .............................................. 1-7, 1-8, 1-12
Power Supply Connector .............................................1-3
Preview
Print Preview ...........................................................3-5
Settings Preview .....................................................3-4
Print Centered ...........................................................3-12
Print Job History ........................................................6-10
Print Media ................................................................1-40
Media Jam ............................................................7-36
Chapter 4
Maintenance
Chapter 2
Using Various Media
Chapter 3
Printing by Objective
P
Chapter 5
Using the Printer
in a Network
Environment
Chapter 7
Troubleshooting
Chapter 6
Operating the
Function Menu
Contents
Index
‹ Index
Print Quality ...............................................................3-40
Print trouble ...............................................................7-28
Print Type ....................................................................3-2
Print Types ...................................................................I-6
Printe
Printer Part Name ....................................................1-2
Printer
Specifications ........................................................1-43
Printer Driver ................................................... 1-32, 5-30
Printer Driver 2005 .....................................................3-58
Printer Function Priorities ...........................................1-16
Printer Operation Panel ..............................................5-37
Printer Server ............................................................5-17
Printhead ......................................... 1-5, 1-42, 4-21, 4-24
Handling Precautions .............................................4-21
Printhead Adj. ..............................................................6-8
Printhead Cleaning
Procedure .............................................................4-39
Printhead Fixer Cover ........................................ 1-5, 4-23
Printhead Fixer Lever ......................................... 1-5, 4-23
Printhead Height Adjustment Lever ..............................1-5
Printing Poster ...........................................................3-27
Printing Several Pages on One Sheet .........................3-24
Printing to an Accurate Length .....................................6-9
Printing without Top and Bottom Margins ....................3-39
Proxy Server .................................................... 5-14, 5-26
Q
Queue Server Mode ...................................................5-23
R
Release Lever .......................................... 1-2, 7-37, 7-39
Remote Printer Mode .................................................5-23
I- 4
TOP
Remote UI ............................ 3-59, 5-14, 5-26, 5-33, 5-37
Replace an ink tank .....................................................6-6
Resolution .................................................................3-42
Right Back Cover .......................................... 1-2, 1-6, 4-7
Roll Holder ..................................................................1-2
Roll Holder Sets .........................................................1-39
Roll Holder Slot ...........................................................1-2
Roll Media ...................................................................2-2
Jam ......................................................................7-36
Roll Media Lamp ........................................................1-14
Roll Media Sizes ........................................................1-40
Rotating the Page 90 Degrees ...................................3-23
S
Setting Network Information
GARO Device Setup Utility ......................................5-7
Setting the Printer Port ...............................................5-30
Setup Menu .................................................................5-6
Shaft Cleaner .....................................................1-5, 4-19
Shared Printer ...........................................................5-17
Size Options .....................................................3-33, 3-53
Software ...........................................................5-37, 7-44
Space Remaining in the Maintenance Cartridge .........4-14
Spool Prevention Stay .................................................1-2
Stand ..........................................................................1-3
Status Print .........................................................5-9, 6-10
Stop/Eject button .......................................................1-13
Stopper .......................................................................1-3
Submenu ..........................................................1-18, 1-31
Subnet Mask ....................................................5-11, 5-12
Switch the Printer Off ...................................................1-8
Switch the Printer On ...................................................1-7
Chapter 1
Basic Use
Chapter 2
Using Various Media
Chapter 3
Printing by Objective
Chapter 4
Maintenance
Chapter 5
Using the Printer
in a Network
Environment
Chapter 7
Troubleshooting
Chapter 6
Operating the
Function Menu
Contents
Index
‹ Index
TOP
T
TCP/IP ....................................................... 5-2, 5-3, 7-25
TCP/IP Settings .........................................................5-35
Printer Operation Panel .........................................5-11
Top cover ..... 1-2, 1-5, 4-12, 4-23, 4-28, 4-30, 7-36, 7-39
Cleaning Inside ......................................................4-11
Part Names .............................................................1-4
Top cover handles .....................................................4-13
Top Cover Roller ................................................ 1-4, 4-13
Type ..........................................................................1-40
Chapter 1
Basic Use
Uninstalling the Printer Driver .....................................7-44
USB Port .....................................................................1-3
User Print Settings .....................................................3-33
Using Watermarks .....................................................3-29
Chapter 4
Maintenance
Chapter 2
Using Various Media
Chapter 3
Printing by Objective
U
V
Vertical Banner ..........................................................3-31
W
Web browser .......................................... 5-14, 5-33, 5-37
When to Replace an Ink Tank ......................................4-3
When to Replace the Maintenance Cartridge ..............4-15
Windows ........................................................... 5-3, 7-44
Windows 2000 ...........................................................5-17
Windows NT ..............................................................5-17
Windows XP ..............................................................5-17
Z
Zeroconf Function ......................................................5-35
I- 5
Chapter 5
Using the Printer
in a Network
Environment
Chapter 7
Troubleshooting
Chapter 6
Operating the
Function Menu
Contents
Index
‹ Index
TOP
Print Types
The colour quality depends strongly on the media type used and the settings in the driver. For consistent high colour quality, use Océ media print preferences,
listed in the table below.
Name Printer
Operating
Panel
Océ Media name
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
IJM005 Océ Draft Paper
IJM020 Océ Standard Paper
IJM113 Océ Premium Paper
90g/m2
IJM150 Océ SmartMatt Paper
IJM215 Océ SmartFitPlus
PhotoGloss
IJM250 Océ Smart Dry Photo
Paper Gloss
IJM311 Océ Double Matt Film
IJM138 Océ Transparent Paper
90g/m2
86500 Océ Check Plot Bond
86800 Océ Deluxe Bond
862024 Océ Premium Color
Bond
AMPP07 Océ PrintPerfect
Alternative Matte Photopaper
GIPPLS7 Océ PhotoPerfect
Plus Glossy Photopaper
PSDRY8 Océ Instant Dry
Photopaper
868342 Océ Double Matte Film
4 mil
866020 Océ Color Vellum 20 lb
Name Printing
Preferences in driver
Chapter 1
Basic Use
Name Remote UI
Draft Paper
Standard Paper
Océ Draft Paper
Océ Standard Paper
Océ Draft Paper
Océ Standard Paper
Premium Paper
Océ Premium Paper
Océ Premium Paper
SmartMatt Paper
Océ SmartMatt Paper
SmartFit Photo
Océ SmartFitPlus Photo Paper
Océ SmartMatt Paper
Océ SmartFitPlus Photo
Paper
Smart Dry Photo
Océ Smart Dry Photo Paper
Océ Smart Dry Photo Paper
DM Film
Océ Double Matt Film
Océ Double Matt Film
Transp. Paper
Océ Transparent Paper
Océ Transparent Paper
Check Plot Bond
Deluxe Bond
Océ Check Plot Bond
Océ Deluxe Bond
Premium Bond
Océ Inkjet Premium Color Bond
Océ Check Plot Bond
Océ Deluxe Bond
Océ Inkjet Premium Color
Bond
PrintPerfect
Océ Matte Photopaper
PhotoPerfect
Océ PhotoPerfectPlus
Océ PhotoPerfectPlus Photopaper
Photopaper
Photo Dry
Océ Instant Dry Photopaper
Océ Instant Dry Photopaper
Ink Jet Film
Océ Ink Jet Film
Océ Ink Jet Film
Premium Vellum
Océ Premium Vellum
Océ Premium Vellum
Océ Matte Photopaper
The Océ Océ CS2044 will be distributed:
• Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
Chapter 2
Using Various Media
Chapter 3
Printing by Objective
Chapter 4
Maintenance
Chapter 5
Using the Printer
in a Network
Environment
Chapter 7
Troubleshooting
Chapter 6
Operating the
Function Menu
• as a dye ink printer.
• standard network board installed.
• with stand included
Contents
• Windows driver only.
The above mentioned may differ from the contents of the manuals.
I- 6
Index
‹ Regulations for this product
Regulations for this product
FCC Regulations
Océ Large Format Printer, Océ CS2044
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not
cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
Note: This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC
Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may
cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular
installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the
equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:
• Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
• Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
• Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.
• Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.
Use of shielded cable is required to comply with Class B limits in Subpart B of Part 15 of FCC Rules.
Do not make any changes or modifications to the equipment unless otherwise specified in the manual. If such changes or modifications
should be made, you could be required to stop operation of the equipment.
Océ North America Inc.
TOP
Chapter 1
Basic Use
Chapter 2
Using Various Media
Chapter 3
Printing by Objective
Chapter 4
Maintenance
Chapter 5
Using the Printer
in a Network
Environment
Chapter 7
Troubleshooting
Chapter 6
Operating the
Function Menu
5450 North Cumberland Avenue
Chicago, IL 60656
I- 7
Contents
Index
‹ Regulations for this product
TOP
Canadian Radio Interference Regulations
This digital apparatus does not exceed the Class B limits for radio noise emissions from digital apparatus as set out in the interferencecausing equipment standard entitled “Digital Apparatus”, ICES-003 of the Industry and Science Canada.
Cet appareil numérique respecte les limites de bruits radioélectriques applicables aux appareils numérique de Classe B prescites dans
la norme sur le matériel brouiller: “Appareils Numériques”, NMB-003 édictée par l’Industrie et Sciences Canada.
International ENERGY STAR® Program
As an ENERGY STAR® Partner, Océ-Technologies B.V.. has determined that this product meets the
ENERGY STAR® guidelines for energy efficiency. The international ENERGY STAR® Office Equipment Program is a global program that promotes energy saving through the use of computers and other
office equipment. The program backs the development and dissemination of products with functions
that effectively reduce energy consumption. It is an open system in which businesses can participate
voluntarily. The targeted products are office equipment such as computers, monitors, printers, facsimiles, and copiers. Their standards and logos are uniform among participating nations.
Chapter 1
Basic Use
Chapter 2
Using Various Media
Chapter 3
Printing by Objective
Chapter 4
Maintenance
Chapter 5
Using the Printer
in a Network
Environment
Chapter 7
Troubleshooting
Chapter 6
Operating the
Function Menu
Contents
I- 8
Index
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement